C-Class Operator's Manual

Your Operator's Manuals
Digitally - in the vehicle

Get to grips with the content of the Digital Operator's Manual in the multimedia
system fitted in your vehicle (under the "Vehicle" menu item).
Printed manual - in the vehicle

In addition to the vehicle Operator's Manual, the complete additional operating
instructions for your multimedia system are also available from your
Mercedes-Benz Service Center.
Digitally - via the Internet

You will find the Operator's Manual on your Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digitally - as an App
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free in the Apple App Store and
on Google Play.
Apple iOS AndroidTM
C-Class
Operator's Manual
C-Class Operator's Manual
2055841505Q
2055841505
Order no. P205 0070 13 Part no. 205 584 15 05 Edition B 2016
Symbols (Y This symbol tells you where you can find Publication details
Registered trademarks: page) more information about a topic.
Internet
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an
RBluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-
instruction that is continued on the next
tooth SIG Inc. page. Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
Dis This text indicates a message on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks play multifunction display/multimedia dis-
of DOLBY Laboratories. play. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
RBabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are reg- ~ This symbol tells you that you can find http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
istered trademarks of Daimler AG. further information in the Digital Oper-
RHomeLink is a registered trademark of John- ator's Manual.
son Controls. Editorial office
RiPod and iTunes are registered trademarks
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
of Apple Inc.
RBurmester is a registered trademark of
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
RMicrosoft and Windows media are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Vehicle manufacturer
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Daimler AG
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-
Mercedesstrae 137
uity Digital Corporation.
70327 Stuttgart
RGracenote is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc. Germany
RZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps. As at 08.04.2015
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz media system from your authorized
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Center.
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- Digital form via the Internet
cle before driving. For your own safety and a The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and vides easy access to all information
warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys-
could result in damage to the vehicle or personal tem. It also provides helpful animations,
injury to you or others. interesting background information and a
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow wide array of search options.
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Digital form as an App
Benz Limited Warranty. Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
This Operator's Manual provides information on can view all the information on your vehicle
the most important functions of your vehicle. and multimedia system via mobile Internet
The equipment or product designation of your or download it independently of network
vehicle may vary depending on: access. Available for smartphones or tab-
lets.
RModel
ROrder
RCountry specification
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
Apple iOS
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
RDigital Operator's Manual
RPrinted Operator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet Android
REquipment-dependent supplements Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all may not yet be available in your country.
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all The technical documentation team at
documents on to the new owner. Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motor-
Your Operator's Manual: ing.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Digital form inside the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted A Daimler Company
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-
2055841505 2055841505Q
2 Contents
Index ....................................................... 3 Introduction ......................................... 27
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 25 At a glance ........................................... 35
Safety ................................................... 44
Opening and closing ........................... 81
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 104
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 118
Climate control ................................. 129
Driving and parking .......................... 145
On-board computer and displays .... 235
Multimedia system ........................... 298
Stowage and features ...................... 308
Maintenance and care ...................... 330
Breakdown assistance ..................... 342
Wheels and tires ............................... 360
Technical data ................................... 386

Index 3
1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Damping System

Function/notes ............................. 197
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 197
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Adaptive Highbeam Assist
tion System) Display message ............................ 268
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
Function/notes ............................. 120
drive) .................................................. 198 Switching on/off ........................... 121
12 V socket Additional speedometer ................... 251
see Socket (12 V) Additives (engine oil) ........................ 392
360 camera
Address book
Cleaning ......................................... 339
see also Digital Operator's Man-
Display in the multimedia system .. 212
ual .................................................. 298
Function/notes ............................. 210 Adjusting the volume
Multimedia system ........................ 299
A Air bags
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Deployment ..................................... 58
Display message ............................ 256 Display message ............................ 265
Function/notes ................................ 68 Front air bag (driver, front
Important safety notes .................... 68 passenger) ....................................... 52
Warning lamp ................................. 289 Important safety notes .................... 51
Accident Introduction ..................................... 51
Automatic measures after an acci- Knee bag .......................................... 53
dent ................................................. 61 Occupant Classification System
Activating media mode (OCS) ............................................... 54
General notes ................................ 306 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Activating/deactivating cooling lamps ............................................... 47
with air dehumidification ................. 133 Side impact air bag .......................... 53
Active Blind Spot Assist Window curtain air bag .................... 54
Activating/deactivating (on- Air vents
board computer) ............................ 248 Important safety notes .................. 143
Display message ............................ 276 Rear ............................................... 144
Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting ........................................... 143
Activating/deactivating (on- Setting the center air vents ........... 144
board computer) ............................ 248 Setting the side air vents ............... 144
Display message ............................ 275 Air-conditioning system
Function/information .................... 222 see Climate control
Active Parking Assist AIRMATIC
Canceling ....................................... 206 Display message ............................ 274
Detecting parking spaces .............. 203 Function/notes ............................. 196
Display message ............................ 276 AIRPANEL
Exiting a parking space .................. 205 Cleaning instructions ..................... 339
Function/notes ............................. 202 Alarm
Important safety notes .................. 202 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 79
Parking .......................................... 204 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 79
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 76 Switching the function on/off
Adaptive Brake Assist (ATA) ................................................ 79
Function/notes ................................ 72 Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
4 Index
AMG Automatic transmission

Adaptive sport suspension sys- Accelerator pedal position ............. 158
tem ................................................ 197 Changing gear ............................... 158
Performance Seat .......................... 108 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 156
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 252 Display message ............................ 282
AMG sports exhaust system ............ 152 Double-clutch function .................. 158
Anti-lock braking system Drive program ................................ 159
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Drive program display .................... 157
Anti-Theft Alarm system Driving tips .................................... 158
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 154
Armrest Emergency running mode .............. 164
Stowage compartment .................. 309 Engaging drive position .................. 157
Ashtray ............................................... 318 Engaging neutral ............................ 156
Assistance display (on-board com- Engaging park position automati-
puter) .................................................. 246 cally ............................................... 156
Assistance menu (on-board com- Engaging reverse gear ................... 156
puter) .................................................. 247 Engaging the park position ............ 156
ASSYST PLUS Gliding mode ................................. 159
Displaying a service message ........ 334 Kickdown ....................................... 159
Driving abroad ............................... 335 Manual shifting .............................. 161
Hiding a service message .............. 334 Oil temperature (on-board com-
Resetting the service interval dis- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 252
play ................................................ 334 Overview ........................................ 155
Service message ............................ 333 Problem (malfunction) ................... 164
Special service requirements ......... 334 Pulling away ................................... 149
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Rocking the vehicle free ................ 159
Activating/deactivating ................... 79 Starting the engine ........................ 148
Function ........................................... 79 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 161
Switching off the alarm .................... 79 Transmission position display
ATTENTION ASSIST (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 157
Activating/deactivating ................. 248 Transmission positions .................. 158
Display message ............................ 274 Automatic transmission emer-
Function/notes ............................. 214 gency mode ....................................... 164
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop B
Authorized workshop Back button ....................................... 299
see Qualified specialist workshop Backup lamp
AUTO lights
Changing bulbs .............................. 124
Display message ............................ 267 Bag hook ............................................ 313
see Lights
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 335
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-
stop function) .................................... 151 Traffic Assist)
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
Function/notes ................................ 69
start/stop function) .......................... 150 Important safety notes .................... 69
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 118 Battery (high-voltage)
see High-voltage battery
Index 5
Battery (SmartKey) Maintenance .................................. 183

Checking .......................................... 84 Parking brake ................................ 178
Important safety notes .................... 84 RBS warning lamp .......................... 288
Replacing ......................................... 84 Recuperative Brake System ............. 45
Battery (vehicle) Riding tips ...................................... 182
Charging ........................................ 350 Warning lamp ................................. 288
Display message ............................ 269 Breakdown
Important safety notes .................. 347 Where will I find...? ........................ 342
Jump starting ................................. 352 see Flat tire
Belt see Towing away
see Seat belts Brightness control (instrument
Blind Spot Assist cluster lighting) ................................... 35
Activating/deactivating (on- Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 236
board computer) ............................ 248
Display message ............................ 276 C
Notes/function .............................. 216
see Active Blind Spot Assist California
Bluetooth Important notice for retail cus-
tomers and lessees .......................... 28
Connecting another mobile
Calling up a malfunction
phone ............................................ 306
see Display messages
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 306
Calling up the climate control bar
ual .................................................. 298
Calling up the climate control
Telephony ...................................... 305
menu
Box (trunk) ......................................... 314
Brake Assist
Car
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
see Vehicle
Brake fluid
Care
Display message ............................ 261
360 camera ................................. 339
Notes ............................................. 392
AIRPANEL ...................................... 339
Brake force distribution
Car wash ........................................ 335
see EBD (electronic brake force
Carpets .......................................... 341
distribution)
Display ........................................... 340
Brake pedal
Exhaust pipe .................................. 340
Pedal resistance/pedal travel .......... 45
Exterior lights ................................ 338
Brakes
Gear or selector lever .................... 340
ABS .................................................. 68
General notes ................................ 335
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72
Interior ........................................... 340
BAS .................................................. 68
Matte finish ................................... 337
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Paint .............................................. 337
Assist ............................................... 69
Plastic trim .................................... 340
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 392
Power washer ................................ 336
Display message ............................ 256
Rear view camera .......................... 339
EBD .................................................. 76
Roof lining ...................................... 341
High-performance brake system .... 183
Seat belt ........................................ 341
Hill start assist ............................... 150
Seat cover ..................................... 341
HOLD function ............................... 194
Sensors ......................................... 339
Important safety notes .................. 182
6 Index
Steering wheel ............................... 340 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat

Trim pieces .................................... 340 anchors ............................................ 64
Washing by hand ........................... 336 On the front-passenger seat ............ 65
Wheels ........................................... 338 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 65
Windows ........................................ 338 Top Tether ....................................... 64
Wiper blades .................................. 338 Child-proof locks
Wooden trim .................................. 340 Important safety notes .................... 66
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 313 Rear doors ....................................... 67
CD Children
see also Digital Operator's Man- Special seat belt retractor ............... 62
ual .................................................. 298 Cigarette lighter ................................ 319
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 244 Cleaning
Center console Mirror turn signal ........................... 339
Lower section ............................ 40, 41 Climate control
Upper section .................................. 39 3-zone automatic control panel ..... 131
Central locking Control panel for automatic cli-
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 81 mate control (1 zone) .................... 130
Changing bulbs Control panel for dual-zone auto-
High-beam headlamps ................... 124 matic climate control ..................... 130
Low-beam headlamps .................... 123 Controlling automatically ............... 133
Opening and closing the side trim Cooling with air dehumidification .. 133
panels ............................................ 124 Cooling with air dehumidification
Reversing lamps ............................ 124 (multimedia system) ...................... 303
Turn signals (front) ......................... 124 Defrosting the windows ................. 136
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 124 Defrosting the windshield .............. 135
Changing the media source ............. 243 ECO start/stop function (3-zone
Charge-air pressure (on-board automatic climate control) ............. 132
computer, Mercedes-AMG vehi- General notes ................................ 129
cles) .................................................... 252 Immediate pre-entry climate con-
Charging trol ................................................. 143
see Charging the high-voltage bat- Indicator lamp ................................ 133
tery (important safety notes) Ionization ....................................... 140
Charging cable Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 303
Connecting .................................... 173 Notes on using the automatic cli-
Controls ......................................... 171 mate control .................................. 132
Important safety notes .................. 171 Overview ........................................ 302
Indicator lamp ................................ 172 Overview of systems ...................... 129
Removing ....................................... 173 Perfume atomizer .......................... 138
Storing ........................................... 171 Perfume atomizer (multimedia
Warming up ................................... 170 system) .......................................... 303
Charging the high-voltage battery Pre-entry climate control (via key)
(important safety notes) ................... 168 (multimedia system) ...................... 303
Child Pre-entry climate control at
Restraint system .............................. 63 departure time ............................... 142
Child seat Pre-entry climate control at
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 66 departure time (multimedia sys-
tem) ............................................... 303
Pre-entry climate control via key ... 141
Index 7
Problem with the rear window Convenience opening feature ............ 96

defroster ........................................ 137 Coolant (engine)
Problems with cooling with air Checking the level ......................... 333
dehumidification ............................ 133 Display message ............................ 268
Rear control panel ......................... 131 Displaying the temperature (on-
Refrigerant ..................................... 393 board computer) ............................ 246
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 394 Filling capacity ............................... 393
Setting the air distribution ............. 134 Important safety notes .................. 392
Setting the air vents ...................... 143 Temperature display in the instru-
Setting the airflow ......................... 135 ment cluster .................................. 236
Setting the climate mode ............... 134 Warning lamp ................................. 293
Setting the climate mode (multi- Cooling
media system) ............................... 303 see Climate control
Setting the temperature ................ 134 Copyright ............................................. 34
Switching air-recirculation mode Cornering light function
on/off ............................................ 137 Display message ............................ 267
Switching on/off ........................... 132 Function/notes ............................. 120
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 137 Crosswind Assist ................................. 76
Switching the rear window Cruise control
defroster on/off ............................ 136 Cruise control lever ....................... 185
Switching the synchronization Deactivating ................................... 186
function on and off ........................ 135 Display message ............................ 279
Synchronization function (multi- Driving system ............................... 185
media system) ............................... 304 Function/notes ............................. 185
Climate control settings General notes ................................ 185
Multimedia system ........................ 302 Important safety notes .................. 185
Climate control system Setting a speed .............................. 186
Climate control (3-zone automatic Storing and maintaining current
climate control) ............................. 132 speed ............................................. 185
Cockpit Storing the current speed or call-
Overview .......................................... 35 ing up the last stored speed .......... 186
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Cup holder
PLUS Center console .............................. 316
Activating/deactivating ................. 247 Important safety notes .................. 316
Display message ............................ 261 Rear compartment ......................... 317
Operation/notes .............................. 70 Customer Assistance Center
COMAND display (CAC) ..................................................... 32
Cleaning ......................................... 340 Customer Relations Department ....... 32
Combination switch .......................... 119
Connecting a USB device D
ual .................................................. 298 Data
Consumption statistics (on-board see Technical data
computer) .......................................... 240 Data carrier
Controller ........................................... 299 Selecting ........................................ 244
Convenience box ............................... 314 Daytime running lamps
Convenience closing feature .............. 96 Display message ............................ 267
Function/notes ............................. 118
8 Index
Switching on/off (on-board com- with Steering Assist and Stop&Go

puter) ............................................. 250 Pilot ............................................... 192
Declarations of conformity ................. 31 Doors
Diagnostics connection ...................... 31 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 89
Digital Operator's Manual Central locking/unlocking
Help ................................................. 25 (SmartKey) ....................................... 81
Introduction ..................................... 25 Control panel ................................... 43
Digital speedometer ......................... 241 Display message ............................ 284
DIRECT SELECT lever Emergency locking ........................... 89
Automatic transmission ................. 156 Emergency unlocking ....................... 89
Display Important safety notes .................... 87
see Display messages Opening (from inside) ...................... 88
see Warning and indicator lamps Drinking and driving ......................... 180
Display message Drive program
Hybrid drive system ....................... 272 Automatic transmission ................. 159
Display messages SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 253
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 333 Drive programs
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 255 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 157
Driving systems ............................. 274 Driver's door
Engine ............................................ 268 see Doors
General notes ................................ 255 Driving abroad
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 255 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 335
Introduction ................................... 255 Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 219
Lights ............................................. 267 Driving on flooded roads .................. 184
Safety systems .............................. 256 Driving safety systems
SmartKey ....................................... 285 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 68
Tires ............................................... 280 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 76
Vehicle ........................................... 282 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72
Distance recorder ............................. 239 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 295 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Distance warning function Assist ............................................... 69
Function/notes ................................ 71 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
DISTRONIC PLUS PLUS ................................................ 70
Activating ....................................... 188 Distance warning function ............... 71
Activation conditions ..................... 188 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Cruise control lever ....................... 188 bution) ............................................. 76
Deactivating ................................... 191 ESP (Electronic Stability Pro-
Display message ............................ 277 gram) ............................................... 73
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 191 Important safety information ........... 68
Driving tips .................................... 192 Overview .......................................... 67
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 189 PRE-SAFE Brake ............................. 77
Function/notes ............................. 186 Recuperative Brake System ............. 45
Important safety notes .................. 187 STEER CONTROL ............................. 78
Setting a speed .............................. 190 Driving system
Setting the specified minimum RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
distance ......................................... 190 vehicles) ........................................ 195
Stopping ........................................ 189
Index 9
Driving systems DYNAMIC SELECT switch

360camera .................................. 210 Automatic transmission ................. 154
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 219 Climate control (dual-zone auto-
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 222 matic climate control) .................... 132
Active Parking Assist ..................... 202 PLUG-IN HYBRID operation ............ 229
AIRMATIC ...................................... 196
AMG adaptive sport suspension E
system ........................................... 197
EASY-ENTRY feature
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 214
Function/notes ............................. 112
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 216
EASY-EXIT feature
Cruise control ................................ 185
Function/notes ............................. 112
Display message ............................ 274
EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 314
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
bution)
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 192
Driving Assistance Plus package ... 219 Display message ............................ 258
HOLD function ............................... 194 Function/notes ................................ 76
ECO display
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 218
Lane Tracking package .................. 216 Function/notes ............................. 180
PARKTRONIC ................................. 199 On-board computer ....................... 240
ECO start/stop function
Rear view camera .......................... 206
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 215 Automatic engine start .................. 151
Driving tips Automatic engine switch-off .......... 150
AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 183 Deactivating/activating ................. 151
Automatic transmission ................. 158 General information ....................... 150
Brakes ........................................... 182 Important safety notes .................. 150
Break-in period .............................. 145 Introduction ................................... 150
Electronic Stability Program
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 192
Downhill gradient ........................... 182 see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
Drinking and driving ....................... 180 Emergency
Driving in winter ............................. 184 Automatic measures after an acci-
Driving on flooded roads ................ 184 dent ................................................. 61
Driving on wet roads ...................... 184 Emergency release
Exhaust check ............................... 180 Driver's door .................................... 89
Fuel ................................................ 180 Trunk ............................................... 94
General .......................................... 179 Vehicle ............................................. 89
Hydroplaning ................................. 184 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Icy road surfaces ........................... 184 Activation ......................................... 58
Limited braking efficiency on sal- Emissions control
ted roads ....................................... 182 Service and warranty information .... 28
Snow chains .................................. 363 Engine
Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 182 Check Engine warning lamp ........... 293
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 145 Display message ............................ 268
Wet road surface ........................... 182 ECO start/stop function ................ 150
DVD video Engine number ............................... 388
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 244 Irregular running ............................ 153
see also Digital Operator's Man- Jump-starting ................................. 352
ual .................................................. 298 Starting (important safety notes) ... 148
10 Index
Starting problems .......................... 153 Exhaust check ................................... 180

Starting the engine with the Exhaust pipe
SmartKey ....................................... 148 Cleaning ......................................... 340
Starting via smartphone ................ 149 Exhaustive discharging (high-volt-
Starting with the Start/Stop but- age battery) ....................................... 349
ton ................................................. 148 Exterior lighting
Switching off .................................. 177 Cleaning ......................................... 338
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 357 see Lights
Engine electronics Exterior mirrors
Problem (malfunction) ................... 153 Adjusting ....................................... 113
Engine oil Dipping (automatic) ....................... 114
Adding ........................................... 332 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 114
Additives ........................................ 392 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 114
Checking the oil level ..................... 331 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 114
Checking the oil level using the Setting ........................................... 114
dipstick .......................................... 332 Storing settings (memory func-
Display message ............................ 270 tion) ............................................... 116
Filling capacity ............................... 391 Storing the parking position .......... 115
General notes ................................ 391 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 309
Notes about oil grades ................... 391
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 331 F
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 252 Favorites
Entering an address Overview ........................................ 301
see also Digital Operator's Man- Features ............................................. 316
ual .................................................. 298 Filler cap
ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- see Refueling
gram) Flat tire
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 253 Changing a wheel/mounting the
Characteristics ................................. 73 spare wheel ................................... 379
Crosswind Assist ............................. 76 MOExtended tires .......................... 343
Deactivating/activating (button Preparing the vehicle ..................... 343
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 74 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 344
Deactivating/activating (except Floormats ........................................... 329
MercedesAMG vehicles) ................. 74 Frequencies
Deactivating/activating (on- Mobile phone ................................. 386
board computer, except Two-way radio ................................ 386
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 247 Fuel
Display message ............................ 256 Additives ........................................ 390
Function/notes ................................ 73 Consumption statistics .................. 240
General notes .................................. 73 Displaying the current consump-
Important safety information ........... 73 tion ................................................ 240
Trailer stabilization ........................... 76 Displaying the range ...................... 240
Warning lamp ................................. 290 Driving tips .................................... 180
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 390
tem) ...................................................... 73 Fuel gauge ....................................... 36
Exhaust Grade (gasoline) ............................ 389
see Exhaust pipe Important safety notes .................. 389
Index 11
Problem (malfunction) ................... 168 Handwriting recognition

Refueling ........................................ 164 Switching text reader function
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 389 on/off ............................................ 301
Fuel filler flap Touchpad ....................................... 300
Opening ......................................... 165 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 120
Fuel level Head restraints
Calling up the range (on-board Adjusting (electrically) ................... 107
computer) ...................................... 240 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 107
Fuel tank Adjusting (rear) .............................. 107
Capacity ........................................ 389 Adjusting the fore-and-aft posi-
Problem (malfunction) ................... 168 tion manually ................................. 107
Fuses General notes ................................ 106
Allocation chart ..................... 357, 359 Important safety notes .................. 106
Before changing ............................. 357 Installing/removing (rear) .............. 107
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 357 Head-up display
Fuse box in the engine compart- Adjusting the brightness ................ 250
ment .............................................. 358 Displays and operating .................. 238
Fuse box in the front-passenger Function/notes ............................. 238
footwell .......................................... 358 Important safety notes .................. 238
Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 359 Selecting displays .......................... 249
Important safety notes .................. 357 Setting the position ....................... 250
Storing settings (memory func-
G tion) ............................................... 116
Headlamps
G-Meter (on-board computer,
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 393
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 252
Fogging up ..................................... 121
Garage door opener
see Automatic headlamp mode
Clearing the memory ..................... 329 Heating
General notes ................................ 326
see Climate control
High beam flasher ............................. 119
Opening/closing the garage door .. 329
High-beam headlamps
Problems when programming ........ 328
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 120
Programming (button in the rear-
Changing bulbs .............................. 124
view mirror) ................................... 327
Display message ............................ 267
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 328
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Gear indicator (on-board com-
High-voltage battery
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 252
Battery care ................................... 170
Genuine parts ...................................... 27
Charging (charging station) ............ 174
Glove box ........................................... 309 Charging (mains socket) ................ 171
Google Local Search Charging (wallbox) ......................... 173
see also Digital Operator's Man- Charging cable warming ................ 170
ual .................................................. 298 Cruise range .................................. 170
Energy consumption ...................... 170
H General notes .................................. 45
Handbrake Method of operation ...................... 169
see Parking brake Outside temperatures .................... 170
HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 92 Overvoltage protection .................. 170
12 Index
Problems with the charging proc- Indicators

ess ................................................. 175 see Turn signals
Terms of use .................................. 170 Insect protection on the radiator .... 331
Vehicle fire ....................................... 45 Instrument cluster
Hill start assist .................................. 150 Overview .......................................... 36
HOLD function Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36
Activating ....................................... 195 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 235
Activation conditions ..................... 194 Interior lighting ................................. 121
Deactivating ................................... 195 Control ........................................... 122
Display message ............................ 277 Overview ........................................ 121
Function/notes ............................. 194 Reading lamp ................................. 121
General notes ................................ 194 iPod
Home address see also Digital Operator's Man-
see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 298
ual .................................................. 298
Hood J
Closing ........................................... 331
Display message ............................ 284 Jack
Important safety notes .................. 330 Using ............................................. 381
Opening ......................................... 330 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 352
Horn ...................................................... 35
HUD K
see Head-up display Key positions
Hybrid drive system SmartKey ....................................... 146
Automatic switch off ........................ 44 Start/Stop button .......................... 146
Danger of electric shock .................. 44 KEYLESS-GO
Display message ............................ 272 Convenience closing feature ............ 97
General notes .................................. 44 Deactivation ..................................... 82
High-voltage battery ........................ 45 Locking ............................................ 82
Important safety notes .................... 44 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 147
Manual switch off ............................ 44 Start function ................................... 83
Opening the hood ............................ 45 Unlocking ......................................... 82
Warning lamp ................................. 288 Kickdown
Hybrid vehicles Driving tips .................................... 159
Important safety notes .................... 44 Manual gearshifting ....................... 163
Hydroplaning ..................................... 184 Knee bag .............................................. 53
I L
Ignition lock Lamps
see Key positions see Warning and indicator lamps
Immobilizer .......................................... 79 Lane Keeping Assist
Indicator and warning lamps Activating/deactivating ................. 219
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating (on-
PLUS .............................................. 295 board computer) ............................ 248
Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 275
see Warning and indicator lamps Function/information .................... 218
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Index 13
Lane Tracking package ..................... 216 M

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 253
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat M+S tires ............................................ 362
Malfunction message
anchors ................................................ 64
License plate lamp (display mes- see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
sage) ................................................... 267
tions) .................................................. 337
Light function, active
Maximum charge current
Display message ............................ 267
Setting (charging cable) ................. 172
Light sensor (display message) ....... 267
Setting (on-board computer) .......... 248
Lights
mbrace
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 120
Call priority .................................... 323
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 118
Display message ............................ 261
Cornering light function ................. 120
Downloading destinations
Fogged up headlamps .................... 121
(COMAND) ..................................... 323
General notes ................................ 118
Downloading routes ....................... 326
Hazard warning lamps ................... 120
Emergency call .............................. 320
High beam flasher .......................... 119
General notes ................................ 320
High-beam headlamps ................... 119
Geo fencing ................................... 326
Light switch ................................... 118
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 325
Low-beam headlamps .................... 119
MB info call button ........................ 322
Parking lamps ................................ 119
Remote fault diagnosis .................. 325
Rear fog lamp ................................ 119
Remote vehicle locking .................. 324
Setting exterior lighting ................. 118
Roadside Assistance button .......... 321
Standing lamps .............................. 119
Search & Send ............................... 323
Switching the daytime running
Self-test ......................................... 320
lamps on/off (on-board com-
Speed alert .................................... 326
puter) ............................................. 250
System .......................................... 320
Turn signals ................................... 119
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 326
see Interior lighting
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 324
Loading guidelines ............................ 308
Mechanical key
Locking
Function/notes ................................ 83
see Central locking
General notes .................................. 83
Locking (doors)
Inserting .......................................... 83
Automatic ........................................ 89
Locking vehicle ................................ 89
Emergency locking ........................... 89
Removing ......................................... 83
From inside (central locking but-
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 89
ton) .................................................. 88
Memory card (audio) ......................... 244
Locking centrally
Memory function
see Central locking
Seats, steering wheel, exterior
Low-beam headlamps
mirrors ........................................... 116
Changing bulbs .............................. 123
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Display message ............................ 267
360camera .................................. 210
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 219
Lumbar support
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 222
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Active Parking Assist ..................... 202
port ................................................ 108
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 214
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 216
14 Index
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186 Multifunction display

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Function/notes ............................. 237
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 192 Permanent display ......................... 251
General notes ................................ 185 Multifunction steering wheel
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 218 Operating the on-board computer .. 236
PARKTRONIC ................................. 199 Overview .......................................... 38
PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- Multimedia system
pant protection) ............................... 60 Switching on and off ...................... 299
PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory Music files
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 61 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Rear view camera .......................... 206 ual .................................................. 298
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 215
Message memory (on-board com- N
puter) .................................................. 255 Navigation
Messages Menu (on-board computer) ............ 241
see Display messages see also Digital Operator's Man-
see Warning and indicator lamps ual .................................................. 298
Mirror turn signal Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
Cleaning ......................................... 339 cle ....................................................... 145
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors O
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Occupant Classification System
Mobile phone (OCS)
Connecting (Bluetooth inter- Conditions ....................................... 54
face) .............................................. 305 Faults ............................................... 58
Connecting another mobile Operation ......................................... 54
phone ............................................ 306 System self-test ............................... 56
Frequencies ................................... 386 Occupant safety
Installation ..................................... 386 Air bags ........................................... 51
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 245 Automatic measures after an acci-
Transmission output (maximum) .... 386 dent ................................................. 61
Modifying the programming Children in the vehicle ..................... 62
(SmartKey) ........................................... 83 Important safety notes .................... 46
MOExtended tires .............................. 343 Introduction to the restraint sys-
Mounting wheels tem .................................................. 46
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 384 Occupant Classification System
Mounting a new wheel ................... 383 (OCS) ............................................... 54
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 380 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Raising the vehicle ......................... 381 lamps ............................................... 47
Removing a wheel .......................... 383 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 67
Securing the vehicle against roll- PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu-
ing away ........................................ 380 pant protection) ............................... 60
MP3 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory
Operation ....................................... 244 occupant protection PLUS) .............. 61
see also Digital Operator's Man- Restraint system warning lamp ........ 46
ual .................................................. 298 Seat belt .......................................... 48
Index 15
OCS Operating system

Conditions ....................................... 54 see On-board computer
Faults ............................................... 58 Operation
Operation ......................................... 54 Digital Operator's Manual ................ 25
System self-test ............................... 56 Operator's Manual
Odometer ........................................... 239 Overview .......................................... 28
Oil Vehicle equipment ........................... 28
see Engine oil Outside temperature display ........... 236
On-board computer Overhead control panel ...................... 42
AMG menu ..................................... 252 Override feature
Assistance graphic menu ............... 246 Rear side windows ........................... 67
Assistance menu ........................... 247
Display messages .......................... 255 P
Displaying a service message ........ 334
Paddle shifters
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191
Factory settings ............................. 252 see Steering wheel paddle shifters
G-Meter ......................................... 252 Paint code number ............................ 387
Head-up display ............................. 238 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 337
HYBRID menu ................................ 248 Panic alarm .......................................... 46
Important safety notes .................. 235 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Instrument cluster menu ............... 251 sliding panel
Lights menu ................................... 250 Important safety notes .................... 98
Media menu ................................... 243 Operating ....................................... 100
Menu overview .............................. 239 Operating the roller sunblinds for
Message memory .......................... 255 the sliding sunroof ......................... 101
Navigation menu ............................ 241 Problem (malfunction) ................... 103
Operation ....................................... 236 Rain closing feature ....................... 101
RACETIMER ................................... 253 Reversing feature ............................. 99
Radio menu ................................... 243 Parking ............................................... 177
Service menu ................................. 246 Important safety notes .................. 177
Settings menu ............................... 247 Parking brake ................................ 178
Standard display ............................ 239 Position of exterior mirror, front-
Telephone menu ............................ 245 passenger side ............................... 115
Trip menu ...................................... 239 Rear view camera .......................... 206
Video DVD operation ..................... 244 Switching off the engine ................ 177
Online access to the vehicle see PARKTRONIC
Data protection .............................. 176 Parking aid
Functions ....................................... 176 see 360 camera
General information ....................... 176 see Active Parking Assist
Internet .......................................... 176 see Exterior mirrors
Opening and closing the side trim see PARKTRONIC
panels ................................................. 124 see Rear view camera
Opening the fuel filler flap Parking assistance
(PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) ............ 166 see PARKTRONIC
Operating safety Parking brake
Declaration of conformity ................ 31 Display message ............................ 258
Important safety notes .................... 30 Electric parking brake .................... 178
Warning lamp ................................. 292
16 Index
Parking lamps Fuel consumption (COMAND) ........ 228

Switching on/off ........................... 119 General notes ................................ 224
PARKTRONIC Haptic accelerator pedal ................ 230
Deactivating/activating ................. 201 High-voltage battery (condition of
Driving system ............................... 199 charge) .......................................... 227
Function/notes ............................. 199 HYBRID menu ................................ 248
Important safety notes .................. 199 Important safety notes .................. 225
Problem (malfunction) ................... 202 Instrument cluster (power dis-
Range of the sensors ..................... 199 play) ............................................... 225
Warning display ............................. 200 Noiseless start ............................... 228
PASSENGER AIR BAG Operating (on-board computer) ..... 227
Display message ............................ 265 Operating mode ............................. 226
Indicator lamps ................................ 47 Overrun mode ................................ 232
Problems (malfunction) .................. 265 Parking .......................................... 232
Perfume atomizer Power display (electric motor) ....... 225
Operating ....................................... 138 Problems with SRS (supplemental
Problem (malfunction) ................... 140 restraint system) ............................ 234
Setting the perfume intensity Problems with the combustion
(multimedia system) ...................... 303 engine ............................................ 233
Vial ................................................ 138 Problems with the hybrid drive
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67 system ........................................... 234
Phone book Problems with the Recuperative
see also Digital Operator's Man- Brake System ................................ 233
ual .................................................. 298 Pulling away ................................... 228
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- READY display ............................... 228
tions) .................................................. 340 Recuperative Brake System ........... 225
PLUG-IN HYBRID operating Resetting the values (Audio 20) ..... 228
Electrical energy generated ........... 228 Resetting the values (COMAND) .... 228
PLUG-IN HYBRID operation Route-based operating strategy ..... 232
Automatic engine start (ECO Shifting manually ........................... 229
start/stop function) ....................... 232 Starting .......................................... 228
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO When the vehicle is stationary ....... 230
start/stop function) ....................... 231 Power washers .................................. 336
Charge level of the high-voltage Power windows
battery ........................................... 227 see Side windows
Displaying the total range and Pre-entry climate control (via
electric range ................................. 228 SmartKey)
Driving tips .................................... 230 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 142
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 229 Pre-entry climate control at depar-
ECO start/stop function ................ 231 ture time
Electric motor (power display) ....... 225 General notes ................................ 142
Electrical energy generated Pre-entry climate control at time of
(Audio 20) ...................................... 228 departure
Electrical energy generated Setting departure time ................... 143
(COMAND) ..................................... 228 Pre-entry climate control via key
Energy flow display ........................ 227 General notes ................................ 141
Fuel consumption .......................... 228
Fuel consumption (Audio 20) ......... 228
Index 17
Pre-entry climate control via Radio-wave reception/transmis-

SmartKey sion in the vehicle
Activating/deactivating ................. 141 Declaration of conformity ................ 31
PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant Rain closing feature (panorama
protection) roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .. 101
Display message ............................ 262 RBS (Recuperative Brake System)
Operation ......................................... 60 Warning lamp ................................. 288
PRE-SAFE Brake Reading lamp ..................................... 121
Activating/deactivating ................. 247 Rear compartment
Display message ............................ 262 Setting the air vents ...................... 144
Function/notes ................................ 77 Setting the airflow ......................... 135
Important safety notes .................... 77 Setting the temperature ................ 134
Warning lamp ................................. 295 Rear fog lamp
PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory Display message ............................ 267
occupant protection PLUS) Switching on/off ........................... 119
Operation ......................................... 61 Rear lamps
Protection against theft see Lights
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 79 Rear seat (folding the backrest for-
Immobilizer ...................................... 79 wards/back) ...................................... 311
Protection of the environment Rear seats
General notes .................................. 27 Display message ............................ 284
Pulling away Folding the backrest forwards/
Automatic transmission ................. 149 back ............................................... 311
General notes ................................ 149 Rear view camera
Hill start assist ............................... 150 Cleaning instructions ..................... 339
Display in the multimedia system .. 207
Q Function/notes ............................. 206
Switching on/off ........................... 207
QR code Rear window blind ............................ 318
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rear window defroster
Rescue card ..................................... 32 Problem (malfunction) ................... 137
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31 Switching on/off ........................... 136
Quick access for audio and tele- Rear-view mirror
phone Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 113
Changing the station/music Dipping (automatic) ....................... 114
track .............................................. 301 Recuperative Brake System
Driving safety systems ..................... 45
R Important safety notes .................... 45
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi- Reflective safety jacket .................... 342
cles) .................................................... 195 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 253 tem)
Radiator cover ................................... 331 Important safety notes .................. 393
Radio Refueling
Selecting a station ......................... 243 Fuel gauge ....................................... 36
Radio mode Important safety notes .................. 164
see also Digital Operator's Man- Refueling process .......................... 165
ual .................................................. 298
18 Index
Refueling process (PLUG-IN S

HYBRID vehicles) ........................... 165
see Fuel Safety
Remote control Children in the vehicle ..................... 62
Garage door opener ....................... 326 Hybrid drive system ......................... 44
Programming (garage door see Occupant safety
opener) .......................................... 327 see Operating safety
Replacing bulbs Safety notes
Important safety notes .................. 122 Hybrid vehicles ................................ 44
Overview of bulb types .................. 123 Safety system
Removing/replacing the cover see Driving safety systems
(front wheel arch) .......................... 123 SD memory card
Reporting safety defects .................... 32 Ejecting .......................................... 307
Rescue card ......................................... 32 Inserting ........................................ 307
Reserve (fuel tank) Inserting/removing ........................ 307
see Fuel
Reserve fuel ual .................................................. 298
Selecting ........................................ 244
Display message ............................ 271
Search & Send
Warning lamp ................................. 293
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 137
ual .................................................. 298
Restraint system
Seat belts
Display message ............................ 263
Adjusting the driver's and front-
Introduction ..................................... 46
passenger seat belt ......................... 51
Warning lamp ................................. 292
Adjusting the height ......................... 50
Warning lamp (function) ................... 46
center rear-compartment seat ......... 50
Reversing feature
Cleaning ......................................... 341
Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 99
Correct usage .................................. 49
Roller sunblinds ............................. 101
Fastening ......................................... 50
Side windows ................................... 95
Important safety guidelines ............. 48
Sliding sunroof ................................. 99
Introduction ..................................... 48
Trunk lid ........................................... 90
Releasing ......................................... 50
Reversing lamps (display mes-
Warning lamp ................................. 287
sage) ................................................... 267
Warning lamp (function) ................... 51
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29 Seats
Roller sunblind
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Adjusting (Performance Seat) ........ 108
sliding panel .................................. 101 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Rear side windows ......................... 317 port ................................................ 108
Rear window .................................. 318 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 106
Roof carrier ........................................ 315 Calling up a stored setting (mem-
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning ory function) .................................. 117
guidelines) ......................................... 341 Cleaning the cover ......................... 341
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 394 Correct driver's seat position ........ 104
Route guidance Important safety notes .................. 104
see also Digital Operator's Man- Seat heating .................................. 108
ual .................................................. 298 Seat heating problem .................... 110
Index 19
Storing settings (memory func- Convenience closing feature ............ 96

tion) ............................................... 116 Convenience opening feature .......... 96
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 108 Important safety information ........... 94
Switching seat ventilation on/ Opening/closing .............................. 95
off .................................................. 109 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 98
Securing a load Resetting ......................................... 97
see Securing cargo Reversing feature ............................. 95
Securing cargo .................................. 313 SIRIUS services
Selector lever see also Digital Operator's Man-
Cleaning ......................................... 340 ual .................................................. 298
see Automatic transmission Ski and snowboard bag .................... 310
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 339 Sliding sunroof
Service menu (on-board com- Opening/closing .............................. 99
puter) .................................................. 246 Resetting ....................................... 100
Service message see Panorama roof with power
see ASSYST PLUS tilt/sliding panel
Service products SmartKey
Brake fluid ..................................... 392 Changing the battery ....................... 84
Coolant (engine) ............................ 392 Changing the programming ............. 83
Engine oil ....................................... 391 Checking the battery ....................... 84
Fuel ................................................ 388 Convenience closing feature ............ 96
Important safety notes .................. 388 Convenience opening feature .......... 96
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Display message ............................ 285
tem) ............................................... 393 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 81
Washer fluid ................................... 393 Important safety notes .................... 81
Setting the charge current (on- KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 83
board computer) ............................... 248 Loss ................................................. 86
Setting the date/time format Mechanical key ................................ 83
see also Digital Operator's Man- Overview .......................................... 81
ual .................................................. 298 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 146
Setting the departure time (on- Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86
board computer) ............................... 249 Starting the engine ........................ 148
Setting the language Smartphone
see also Digital Operator's Man- Starting the engine ........................ 149
ual .................................................. 298 SMS
Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Man-
see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 298
ual .................................................. 298 Snow chains ...................................... 363
Settings Socket (12 V)
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 252 Center console .............................. 319
On-board computer ....................... 247 General notes ................................ 319
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 253 Rear compartment ......................... 319
Side impact air bag ............................. 53 Sound
Side marker lamp (display mes- Switching on/off ........................... 299
sage) ................................................... 267 Special seat belt retractor .................. 62
Side windows Specialist workshop ............................ 31
Cleaning ......................................... 338 Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
20 Index
Speedometer Stowage areas ................................... 308

Activating/deactivating the addi- Stowage compartments
tional speedometer ........................ 251 Armrest (under) ............................. 309
Digital ............................................ 241 Center console .............................. 309
In the Instrument cluster ................. 36 Cup holders ................................... 316
Segments ...................................... 235 Door ............................................... 310
Selecting the display unit ............... 251 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 309
SPORT handling mode Glove box ....................................... 309
Deactivating/activating Important safety information ......... 308
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 74 Map pockets .................................. 310
Warning lamp ................................. 292 Rear ............................................... 310
Sports exhaust system Stowage net ................................... 310
see AMG sports exhaust system see Stowage areas
Standing lamps Stowage net ....................................... 310
Display message ............................ 267 Stowage well beneath the trunk
Switching on/off ........................... 119 floor .................................................... 315
Start/Stop button Summer tires
Starting the engine ........................ 148 In winter ........................................ 362
Start/stop function Sun visor ............................................ 317
see ECO start/stop function Suspension setting
Starting (engine) ................................ 148 AIRMATIC ...................................... 197
STEER CONTROL .................................. 78 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Steering system ........................................... 197
Display message ............................ 285 Switching air-recirculation mode
Warning lamps ............................... 297 on/off ................................................. 137
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot Switching on media mode
(DISTRONIC PLUS) Via the device list .......................... 307
Display message ............................ 279
Steering assistant STEER CON- T
TROL
see STEER CONTROL Tachometer ........................................ 236
Steering wheel Tail lamps
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 111 Display message ............................ 267
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 110 see Lights
Button overview ............................... 38 Tank content
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 236 Fuel gauge ....................................... 36
Cleaning ......................................... 340 Technical data
EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 112 Capacities ...................................... 388
Important safety notes .................. 110 Information .................................... 386
Steering wheel heating .................. 111 Tires/wheels ................................. 384
Storing settings (memory func- Vehicle data ................................... 394
tion) ............................................... 116 Telephone
Steering wheel heating Accepting a call (multifunction
Problem (malfunction) ................... 112 steering wheel) .............................. 245
Switching on/off ........................... 111 Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 161 necting) ......................................... 306
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 253 Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
eral information) ............................ 305
Index 21
Display message ............................ 285 Tires

Introduction ................................... 245 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 379
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 245 Average weight of the vehicle
Number from the phone book ........ 245 occupants (definition) .................... 377
Redialing ........................................ 246 Bar (definition) ............................... 377
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 245 Changing a wheel .......................... 379
see also Digital Operator's Man- Characteristics .............................. 377
ual .................................................. 298 Checking ........................................ 361
Switching between mobile Curb weight (definition) ................. 378
phones ........................................... 306 Definition of terms ......................... 377
Temperature Direction of rotation ...................... 380
Coolant (display in the instrument Display message ............................ 280
cluster) .......................................... 236 Distribution of the vehicle occu-
Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 246 pants (definition) ............................ 379
Engine oil (on-board computer, DOT (Department of Transporta-
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 252 tion) (definition) ............................. 377
Outside temperature ...................... 236 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Setting (climate control) ................ 134 (TIN) ............................................... 377
Transmission oil (on-board com- GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 252 (definition) ..................................... 378
Through-loading feature ................... 311 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 253 inition) ........................................... 378
Tire pressure GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 367 ing) (definition) .............................. 378
Checking manually ........................ 366 Important safety notes .................. 360
Display message ............................ 280 Increased vehicle weight due to
Maximum ....................................... 366 optional equipment (definition) ...... 378
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 346 Information on driving .................... 360
Notes ............................................. 365 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 378
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 346 Labeling (overview) ........................ 374
Recommended ............................... 363 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 379
Tire pressure loss warning system Load index ..................................... 376
General notes ................................ 366 Load index (definition) ................... 378
Important safety notes .................. 366 Maximum load on a tire (defini-
Restarting ...................................... 367 tion) ............................................... 378
Tire pressure monitor Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Checking the tire pressure elec- (definition) ..................................... 378
tronically ........................................ 369 Maximum permissible tire pres-
Function/notes ............................. 367 sure (definition) ............................. 378
General notes ................................ 367 Maximum tire load ......................... 376
Important safety notes .................. 368 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 378
Restarting ...................................... 369 MOExtended tires .......................... 362
Warning lamp ................................. 296 Optional equipment weight (defi-
Warning message .......................... 369 nition) ............................................ 379
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 344 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
Storage location ............................ 343 inition) ........................................... 379
Tire pressure not reached .............. 346 Replacing ....................................... 379
Tire pressure reached .................... 346 Service life ..................................... 361
22 Index
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 379 Towing a trailer

Snow chains .................................. 363 ESP (Electronic Stability Pro-
Speed rating (definition) ................ 378 gram) ............................................... 76
Storing ........................................... 380 Towing away
Structure and characteristics Important safety guidelines ........... 354
(definition) ..................................... 377 Installing the towing eye ................ 355
Summer tires in winter .................. 362 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 356
Temperature .................................. 374 Removing the towing eye ............... 355
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Transporting the vehicle ................ 356
(definition) ..................................... 379 With both axles on the ground ....... 356
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 379 With the rear axle raised ................ 355
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 379 Towing eye ......................................... 343
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 378 Traffic reports
Tire size (data) ............................... 384 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Tire size designation, load-bearing ual .................................................. 298
capacity, speed rating .................... 374 Traffic Sign Assist
Tire tread ....................................... 361 Display message ............................ 277
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 379 Function/notes ............................. 215
Total load limit (definition) ............. 379 Important safety notes .................. 215
Traction ......................................... 373 Instrument cluster display ............. 216
Traction (definition) ....................... 379 Transfer case ..................................... 164
Tread wear ..................................... 373 Transmission
Uniform Tire Quality Grading see Automatic transmission
Standards ...................................... 373 Transmission position display ......... 157
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Transmission position display
Standards (definition) .................... 378 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 157
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 379 Transporting the vehicle .................. 356
Wheel and tire combination ........... 384 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 378 tions) .................................................. 340
see Flat tire Trip computer (on-board com-
Top Tether ............................................ 64 puter) .................................................. 240
Touchpad Trip odometer
Changing the station/music Calling up ....................................... 239
track .............................................. 301 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 241
Character suggestions ................... 300 Trunk
Deleting characters ....................... 300 Important safety notes .................... 89
Entering a space ............................ 300 Locking separately ........................... 94
Entering characters ....................... 300 Opening/closing (automatically
Gesture control .............................. 300 from inside) ...................................... 93
Handwriting recognition ................ 300 Opening/closing (automatically
Operating the touchpad ................. 300 from outside) ................................... 91
Overview ........................................ 300 Opening/closing (from outside,
Quick access for Audio .................. 301 HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 92
Switching ....................................... 300 Opening/closing (manually from
Switching input line ....................... 300 outside) ............................................ 90
Tow-starting Trunk lid
Emergency engine starting ............ 357 Display message ............................ 283
Index 23
Obstacle recognition ........................ 90 Transporting .................................. 356

Opening dimensions ...................... 394 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 89
Opening/closing .............................. 89 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 81
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 394 Vehicle data ................................... 394
Turn signals Vehicle data
Changing bulbs (front) ................... 124 Roof load (maximum) ..................... 394
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 124 Trunk load (maximum) ................... 394
Display message ............................ 267 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 394
Switching on/off ........................... 119 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 89
Two-way radio Vehicle identification number
Frequencies ................................... 386 see VIN
Installation ..................................... 386 Vehicle identification plate .............. 387
Transmission output (maximum) .... 386 Vehicle level
Type identification plate AIRMATIC ...................................... 197
see Vehicle identification plate Display message ............................ 275
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 343
U Video
Unlocking Operating the DVD ......................... 244
Emergency unlocking ....................... 89 see also Digital Operator's Man-
From inside the vehicle (central ual .................................................. 298
VIN
unlocking button) ............................. 88
USB devices Seat ............................................... 388
Connecting to the Media Inter- Type plate ...................................... 387
Voice Control System
face ............................................... 307
see Separate operating instructions
V
W
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 317
Warning
Vehicle
Stickers ........................................... 44
Correct use ...................................... 32
Warning and indicator lamps
Data acquisition ............................... 32
ABS ................................................ 289
Display message ............................ 282
Brakes ........................................... 288
Equipment ....................................... 28
Check Engine ................................. 293
Individual settings .......................... 247
Coolant .......................................... 293
Limited Warranty ............................. 32
Distance warning ........................... 295
Loading .......................................... 370
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 89 ESP .............................................. 290
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 81 ESP OFF ....................................... 291
Lowering ........................................ 384 Fuel tank ........................................ 293
Maintenance .................................... 29 General notes ................................ 286
Operating safety .............................. 30 Hybrid drive system ....................... 288
Parking .......................................... 177 Overview .......................................... 36
Parking for a long period ................ 179 Parking brake ................................ 292
Pulling away ................................... 149 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 47
Raising ........................................... 381 RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-
Reporting problems ......................... 32 tem) ............................................... 288
Securing from rolling away ............ 380 Reserve fuel ................................... 293
Towing away .................................. 354 Restraint system ............................ 292
24 Index
Seat belt ........................................ 287 Winter tires

SPORT handling mode ................... 292 M+S tires ....................................... 362
Steering ......................................... 297 Wiper blades
Tire pressure monitor .................... 296 Cleaning ......................................... 338
Warranty .............................................. 28 Important safety notes .................. 126
Washer fluid Replacing ....................................... 126
Display message ............................ 285 Replacing (windshield) ................... 126
Wheel and tire combinations Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
Tires ............................................... 384 tions) .................................................. 340
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 384 Workshop
Wheel chock ...................................... 380 see Qualified specialist workshop
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 379
Checking ........................................ 361
Cleaning ......................................... 338
Information on driving .................... 360
Interchanging/changing ................ 379
Mounting a new wheel ................... 383
Mounting a wheel .......................... 380
Removing a wheel .......................... 383
Snow chains .................................. 363
Storing ........................................... 380
Tightening torque ........................... 384
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 384
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 264
Operation ......................................... 54
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 135
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 333
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 128
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 126
Switching on/off ........................... 125
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 184
Snow chains .................................. 363
Winter operation
Radiator cover ............................... 331
Summer tires ................................. 362
Digital Operator's Manual 25
Introduction Operation
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor- Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. ual
The Digital Operator's Manual additionally X Press the button in the center console.
describes further functions and equipment The overview relating to the vehicle appears.
installed in your vehicle. The functions of the
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by
vehicle and multimedia system are described in
the Digital Operator's Manual. You can call up turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller.
the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia X Confirm 7 the message about the warning
system. and safety notes.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
i You will not incur any costs when calling up Manual appears.
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connecting
to the Internet.
Operating the Digital Operator's Man-
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual: ual
RVisual search General notes
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the Please observe the information about the oper-
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can ation of the controller (Y page 299).
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access Content pages
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view. The content pages can be accessed by means of
a visual search, a keyword search or using the
RKeyword search
contents.
The keyword search allows you to search for a
keyword by entering characters. Further
information can be found in the Digital Oper-
ator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND"
section under the "Character entry (teleph-
ony)" keyword.
RContents
You can select individual sections in the con-
tents.
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-
ted for safety reasons while driving.
X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3

the controller.
X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
8 the controller to the left :.
X To select information texts or save book-
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
right ;.
X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X To exit a content page: select the %
symbol ?.
26 Digital Operator's Manual
X To call up the basic menu of the Digital

Operator's Manual: select symbol A.
X To switch functions to the multimedia
system using the buttons on the center
console: press the $, %, or
button.
The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-
ator's Manual remains open in the back-
ground.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 27
Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Introduction
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources H Environmental note
that form the basis of our existence on this Have a defective high-voltage battery dis-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner posed of in an environmentally-responsible
that takes the requirements of both nature manner. Contact a qualified specialist work-
and humanity into account. shop which has the necessary specialist
You too can help to protect the environment knowledge and tools to carry out the work
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
tally responsible manner. you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for this purpose.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Environmental concerns and recom-
Roperating conditions of your vehicle mendations
Ryour personal driving style
Wherever the operating instructions require you
You can influence both factors. You should to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or
bear the following in mind: re-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-
Operating conditions: tal rules and regulations when disposing of
materials. In this way you will help to protect the
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- environment.
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need H Environmental note
them. Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute assemblies and parts which are of the same
to environmental protection. You should quality as new parts. They are covered by the
therefore adhere to the service intervals. same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
Ralways have service work carried out at a
parts.
qualified specialist workshop. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
Personal driving style: ces, as well as control units and sensors for
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
starting the engine.
Rdoors
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
Rdoor pillars
is stationary.
Rdoor sills
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
Rseats
from the vehicle in front.
Rcockpit
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Rinstrument cluster
braking. Rcenter console
Z
28 Service and vehicle operation
Do not install accessories such as audio sys- Should you have any questions concerning
tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs equipment and operation, please consult an
or welding. You could impair the operating authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
efficiency of the restraint systems.
Introduction
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-

Have aftermarket accessories installed at a let are important documents and should be kept
qualified specialist workshop. in the vehicle.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
well as accessories relevant to safety which Service and vehicle operation
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant Warranty
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual- accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that tions in the Service and Warranty Information
have been specifically approved for your vehi- booklet.
cle.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- accordance with the following warranty terms
cifically developed, manufactured or selected and conditions:
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
therefore be used. REmission System Warranty
More than 300,000 different genuine REmission Performance Warranty
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
Mercedes-Benz models. setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain and Vermont Emission Control System War-
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for ranty
necessary service and repair work. In addition, RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
strategically located parts delivery centers pro- laws)
vide quick and reliable parts service.
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
Always specify the vehicle identification number by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz warranties. These are available at any author-
parts (Y page 387). ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Operator's Manual Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
Vehicle equipment ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
mation booklet will be posted to you.
i This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to Information for customers in Califor-
print. Country-specific differences are possi- nia
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also Under California law you may be entitled to a
applies to safety-relevant systems and func- replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-
therefore differ from that shown in the able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
descriptions and illustrations. USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
The original purchase agreement lists all sys- facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
tems installed in your vehicle. defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
covered by its express warranty.
Service and vehicle operation 29
During the period of 18 months from original For additional information, refer to the
delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, section in the Service and Warranty booklet
Introduction
a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre- (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-
sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more erature portfolio.
of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction
results in a condition that is likely to cause Change of address or change of own-
death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is ership
driven, that defect or malfunction has been
subject to repair two or more times, and you In the event of a change of address, please send
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
LLC in writing of the need for its repair. Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction
(USA) at the hotline number
of a less serious nature than category (1)
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
has been subject to repair four or more
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
times and you have directly notified
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its
ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.
repair.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
literature in the vehicle so that it is available to
repair of the same or different substantial
the next owner.
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days. If you have purchased a used car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Please send your written notice to: Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number
One Mercedes Drive 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Vehicle operation outside the USA

Maintenance
and Canada
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all
the necessary maintenance work which should If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
be done at regular intervals. countries, please be aware that:
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet Rservice facilities or replacement parts may
with you when you bring the vehicle to an not be readily available.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
advisor will record every service for you in the converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
Service and Warranty Booklet. may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane
rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam-
Breakdown assistance age.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
gram offers technical help in the event of a
ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-
Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24
following addresses.
hours a day, 365 days a year.
In the USA
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA) Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
1-800-387-0100 (Canada) European Delivery Department
Z
30 Operating safety
One Mercedes Drive tronic equipment carried out at a qualified

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 specialist workshop.
In Canada
Introduction
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

European Delivery Department Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
98 Vanderhoof Avenue curb or an unpaved road
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb or a hole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or
Operating safety parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the undercar-
Important safety notes riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
G WARNING Components damaged in this way can unex-
If you do not have the prescribed service/ pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
maintenance work or any required repairs longer withstand the strain they are designed
to.
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident. If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
Always have the prescribed service/mainte- twigs can gather between the underbody and
nance work as well as any required repairs the underbody paneling. If these materials
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catch fire.
G WARNING In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
of fire. paying attention to road and traffic condi-
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine and
an electric motor. The voltage supply for oper-
flammable materials which have become
ating the vehicle electrically is provided by the
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a vehicle's high-voltage electrical system.
qualified specialist workshop.
G DANGER
G WARNING The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is
Modifications to electronic components, their under high voltage. If you modify components
software as well as wiring can impair their in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system
function and/or the function of other net- or touch damaged components, you may be
worked components. In particular, systems electrocuted. The components in the vehi-
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a cle's high-voltage electrical system may be
result, these may no longer function as inten- damaged in an accident, although the damage
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an Following an accident, do not touch any high-
accident and injury. voltage components and never modify the
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have
tronic components or their software. You the vehicle towed away after an accident and
should have all work to electrical and elec-
Operating safety 31
the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
checked by a qualified specialist workshop. the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Introduction
The components of the vehicle's high-voltage
Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
electrical system are marked with yellow warn-
ing stickers. The cables of the vehicle's high- tics connection in the vehicle.
voltage electrical system are orange in color.
Vehicles with an electric motor generate much G WARNING
less driving noise than vehicles with internal Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
combustion engines. As a result, your vehicle pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
may not be heard by other road users in certain The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
situations. This can happen, for example, when
you are parking and your vehicle is not seen by jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
other road users. This requires you to adopt a Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
particularly anticipatory driving style, as it is stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
necessary to allow for the possibility that other the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
road users may behave erratically. securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
Declarations of conformity
top of one another.
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves ! If the engine is switched off and equipment
on the diagnostics connection is used, the
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com- starter battery may discharge.
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
subject to the two following two conditions: 1) nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-
These devices may not cause harmful interfer- mation being reset, for example. This may lead
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
interference received, including interference the next emissions test during the main inspec-
that may cause undesired operation. Changes tion.
or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the equipment."
Qualified specialist workshop
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
not cause interference, and (2) These devices correctly carry out the work required on your
must accept any interference, including inter- vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
ference that may cause undesired operation of evant to safety.
the device." Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Diagnostics connection Rwork relevant to safety
The diagnostics connection is only intended for Rservice and maintenance work
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a Rrepair work
qualified specialist workshop. Ralterations, installation work and modifica-
G WARNING tions
Rwork on electronic components
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the Rwork on the hybrid drive system
Z
32 Data stored in the vehicle
Correct use If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth- defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
ers could fail to recognize certain dangers. a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
Introduction
Leave warning stickers in position. cannot become involved in individual problems

Observe the following information when driving between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
your vehicle: USA, LLC.
Rthe safety notes in this manual To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Rthe vehicle technical data
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Rtraffic rules and regulations http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor istrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
vehicles Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
Problems with your vehicle http://www.safercar.gov
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact Limited Warranty
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti- ! Follow the instructions in this manual about
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat- the proper operation of your vehicle as well as
isfaction, please discuss the problem again with about possible vehicle damage. Damage to
a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-
the following addresses. ventions against these instructions is not cov-
ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
In the USA Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-
Customer Assistance Center ranty.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 QR codes for the rescue card
In Canada
Customer Relations Department The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
98 Vanderhoof Avenue the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
Reporting safety defects routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under http://
USA only: portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/
The following text is published as required of content/asportal/en/communication/
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed- informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966".
Data stored in the vehicle
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury Data storage
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration A wide range of electronic components in your
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz vehicle contain data memories.
USA, LLC.
Data stored in the vehicle 33
These data memories temporarily or perma- tion with other information (if necessary, under
nently store technical information about: consultation with an authorized expert), could
RVehicle's operating state be traced to a person.
Introduction
RIncidents Examples include:
RMalfunctions Raccident reports
In general, this technical information docu- Rdamage to the vehicle

ments the state of a component, a module, a Rwitness statements
system or the surroundings. Further additional functions that have been con-
These include, for example: tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
Roperating conditions of system components, certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-
e.g. fluid levels cle as well. The additional functions include, for
example, vehicle location in case of an emer-
Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its
gency.
individual components, e.g. number of wheel
revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
position COMAND/mbrace
Rmalfunctions and defects in important system If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
components, e.g. lights, brakes mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's
Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy- uations, and the location of the vehicle may be
ment, intervention of stability control sys- compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-
tems tem.
Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature For additional information please refer to the
This data is of an exclusively technical nature COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's
and can be used to: Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-
tions.
Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects
Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
Event data recorders
dent
Roptimize vehicle function This vehicle is equipped with an event data
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an
movements. event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
mation can be read from the event data memory
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
and malfunction data memory.
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
Services include, for example: performed. The EDR is designed to record data
Rrepair services related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
Rservice processes for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
Rwarranties
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
Rquality assurance
such data as:
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
RHow various systems in your vehicle were
vice network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor- operating
mation is obtained from it, if required. RWhether or not the driver and passenger
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- safety belts were buckled/fastened
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
or is continually overwritten. accelerator and/or brake pedal and
When operating the vehicle, situations are con- RHow fast the vehicle was traveling.
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
Z
34 Information on copyright
These data can help provide a better under- Information on copyright

standing of the circumstances in which acci-
dents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are General information
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
Introduction
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by Information on license for free and open-source
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no software used in your vehicle and its electronic
personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and acci- components is available on the following web-
dent location) are recorded. However, other par- site:
ties, such as law enforcement could combine http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and
special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforce-
ment, can read the information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Cockpit 35
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Steering wheel paddle shift- H Electric parking brake 178
ers 161
I Diagnostics connection 31
; Combination switch 119
J Opens the hood 330
= Horn
K Light switch 118
? Instrument cluster 36
L Control panel for:
A DIRECT SELECT lever 156 Activating Steering Assist 192
B Climate control systems 129 Switching on Active Lane
Keeping Assist 222
C Overhead control panel 42 Deactivating PARKTRONIC 199
D Control panel for multimedia Switching on the 360 cam-
system and vehicle functions 39 era 210
Switching on the head-up
E Ignition lock 146 display 238
Start/Stop button 146 Vehicles without a driver
F Adjusts the steering wheel 110 assistance system: map/
coin holder
G Cruise control lever 185
36 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: Speedometer K ? Coolant 293
Speedometer segments 235 L Coolant temperature display 236
; ESP OFF 290 M RBS (Recuperative
= ESP 290 Brake System) 288
? Distance warning 295 N J This lamp has no func-

tion
A Power steering 297
O 6 Restraint system 46
B #! Turn signals 119
P Seat belt 287
C Multifunction display 237
Q K High-beam headlamps 119
D ! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 292 R L Low-beam headlamps 119
E ! ABS 289 S 8 Reserve fuel level with

fuel filler flap location indica-
F ; Check Engine 293 tor (right) 293
G Tachometer 236 T Fuel level indicator
H Electric parking brake (red) 292 U T Parking lamps, license
F USA only plate lamps and instrument
cluster lighting 119
! Canada only
V R Rear fog lamp 119
I Brakes (red) 288
$ USA only W h Tire pressure monitor 296
J Canada only
J M SPORT handling mode
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles 292
Instrument cluster 37
i You can find further information on the

instrument cluster in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-
cles in the Digital Operator's Manual under
"PLUG-IN HYBRID operation".
At a glance
38 Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance

: Multifunction display 237 ? Opens the menu list
; Multimedia system display 9 : Selects a menu
a Confirms the selection
= ~ Rejects or ends a call % Back
6 Makes or accepts a call Operating the on-board com-
Further telephone functions 245 puter 236
W X Adjusts volume Switches off voice-
8 Mute operated control navigation
Switches on voice- or the Voice Control System
operated control navigation
or the Voice Control System
i In vehicles with multimedia system

COMAND you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in
the Digital Operator's Manual
Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20
you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
Ron the voice-operated control of the navi-
gation in the manufacturer's operating
instructions
Center console 39
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance
: Climate control systems 129 C Media button (see the
separate operating instruc-
; Hazard warning lamps 120 tions)
= Vehicle functions/ D $ Radio button (see the
system settings button (see separate operating instruc-
the separate operating tions)
instructions)
E Navigation button (see
? % Telephone button (see the separate operating
the separate operating instructions)
instructions)
F Inserts or ejects a CD
A PASSENGER AIR BAG indica- or DVD (see the separate
tor lamp 47 operating instructions)
ATA indicator lamp 79
B Analog clock (not available
on all equipment levels)
40 Center console
Center console, lower section

At a glance

: Stowage compartment 308 C ECO start/stop func-
Ashtray 318 tion (vehicles without PLUG-
Cigarette lighter 319 IN HYBRID operation) 150
Socket 319 Selects the operating mode
(PLUG-IN HYBRID operation) 226
Cup holder 316
D Sets the vehicle level 196
; Adjusts the volume/mute
(see the separate operating E DYNAMIC SELECT switch 154
instructions)
F Back button (see the sepa-
= Switches multimedia system rate operating instructions)
on or off (see separate oper-
ating instructions) G Multimedia system control-
ler (see the separate operat-
? u Rear window roller sun- ing instructions)
blind 318
H g Switches to the favor-
A Touchpad (see the separate ites button (see the separate
operating instructions) operating instructions)
B Stowage compartment 308
Center console 41
Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
At a glance
: Ashtray 318 D AMG adaptive sport suspen-
Cigarette lighter 319 sion system (suspension set-
Socket 319 ting) 197
Cup holder 316 E Manual gearshifting (perma-
nent setting) 161
; Adjusts or mutes the volume
(see the separate operating F DYNAMIC SELECT switch
instructions) (selects the drive program) 154
= Adjusts the volume of the G Back button (see the sepa-
AMG sports exhaust system 152 rate operating instructions)
? ECO start/stop func- H Multimedia system control-
tion 150 ler (see the separate operat-
ing instructions)
A Touchpad (see the separate
operating instructions) I g Switches to the favor-
ites button (see the separate
B Stowage compartment 308 operating instructions)
C Activates/deactivates ESP 74
Activates/deactivates
SPORT handling mode 74
42 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: p Switches the left-hand E 3 Opens/closes the pan-
reading lamp on/off 121 orama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel 100
; | Switches the automatic
Opens/closes the roller sun-
interior lighting control
blinds 101
on/off 122
F Rear-view mirror 113
= G SOS button (mbrace
system) 320 G Buttons for the garage door
opener 327
? c Switches the front inte-
rior lighting on/off 122 H Microphone for mbrace
(emergency call system),
A u Switches the rear inte-
telephone and the Voice
rior lighting on/off 122
Control System; see the sep-
B p Switches the right- arate operating instructions
hand reading lamp on/off 121
I F Roadside Assistance
C MB Info call button call button (mbrace system) 321
(mbrace system) 322
D Eyeglasses compartment 309
Door control panel 43
Door control panel
At a glance
: r45= E 7Z\
Stores settings for the seat, Adjusts and folds the exterior
exterior mirrors and steering mirrors in/out electrically 113
column 116
F W Opens/closes the right
; Adjusts the seats electrically 106 side window 94
= c Seat heating 108 G W Opens/closes the rear
right side window 94
? s Seat ventilation 109
H n Override feature for the
A Opens the door 88 controls in the rear compart-
B % & Unlocks/locks ment 67
the vehicle 88 I p Opens/closes the
C W Opens/closes the rear trunk lid 93
left side window 94
D W Opens/closes the left
side window 94
44 Hybrid vehicles
Hybrid vehicles All components of the hybrid drive system are

marked with yellow warning stickers that warn
General notes you of the danger of high voltage. The cables of
the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are
Hybrid technology combines a fuel efficient orange in color.
internal combustion engine with a powerful The ignition must be switched off when carrying
electric motor. out general tasks, such as changing bulbs or
checking the coolant level.
Important safety notes

Safety
Automatic switching off of the hybrid

Danger of electric shock drive system
If components of the restraint system are acti-
G DANGER vated during an accident, the hybrid drive sys-
The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is tem is automatically deactivated.
under high voltage. If you modify components The hybrid drive system is not activated when
in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system the vehicle is started if:
or touch damaged components, you may be Ran electrical short circuit is detected in the
electrocuted. The components in the vehi- hybrid drive system
cle's high-voltage electrical system may be Ran electrical connection in the hybrid drive
damaged in an accident, although the damage system is disconnected
is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. This ensures that you do not come into contact
Following an accident, do not touch any high- with high voltage.
voltage components and never modify the
vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have Manual switching off of the hybrid drive
the vehicle towed away after an accident and system
the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system The hybrid drive system can be deactivated
checked by a qualified specialist workshop. manually using the high voltage switch-off
device.
When towing a vehicle after an accident, be sure
to observe the following sections: ! To prevent damage to the hybrid drive sys-
tem please observe the following instruc-
RTransporting the vehicle (Y page 356) tions:
RTowing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Ronly deactivate the hybrid drive system
(Y page 355) manually in the following situations.
RTowing a vehicle with both axles on the Rwork on the hybrid drive system may only
ground (Y page 356) be carried out at a qualified specialist work-
Read the safety instructions on towing and tow- shop, even when it has been deactivated
starting (Y page 354). manually.
Deactivate the hybrid system manually if:
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up after an accident
Rthe vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after an
accident, and the restraint system compo-
nents were not activated
Rthe vehicle is badly damaged and has to be
towed or transported
Hybrid vehicles 45
X If possible, move the vehicle out of the underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk
danger zone: shift the transmission into posi- of injury.
tion N.
X Release the electric parking brake.
Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure
the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst
X Roll the vehicle to a safe place and park it
safely. observing legal requirements.
Get assistance from others if necessary.
G WARNING
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has
Safety
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
ing. There is therefore a risk of being locked out been damaged, electrolyte and gases may
if the vehicle is being pushed or tested on a leak out. These are poisonous and caustic.
dynamometer. There is a risk of injury.
X Switch the ignition off. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
X Shift the transmission to position P. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off
Depress the electric parking brake with water and seek medical attention
(Y page 178). straight away.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 380). PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: charging the high-
X To use the high-voltage switch-off device: voltage battery (Y page 168).
open the hood.
Engine compartment
Before opening the hood:
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESSGO
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock.
X Observe the warning notes on the risk of elec-
X Press release clip : in the direction of the tric shock (Y page 44).
arrow and pull it out.
X Observe the warning notices about the hood
X Pull the high voltage switch-off device ;
(Y page 330).
apart until it engages in the stop position.
If the hybrid drive system has been deactivated
due to reasons mentioned above, have it
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
RBS driving safety system (Recupera-
before reactivation. tive Brake System)
The Recuperative Brake System supports you
High-voltage battery when braking with an electronically-controlled
brake boost mode and enables the recovery of
G WARNING kinetic energy (recuperation).
In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres- Further information about the Recuperative
sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed a Brake System (Y page 225).
critical value. In this case flammable gas
escapes through a ventilation valve on the
Z
46 Occupant safety
Panic alarm The driver is also responsible for ensuring that

the steering wheel has been correctly posi-
tioned. Observe the information relating to the
correct driver's seat position (Y page 104).
Always ensure the air bag can inflate properly if
deployed (Y page 51).
An air bag supplements a correctly fastened
seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air
bag increases the level of protection for vehicle
Safety
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-

ple, if the protection already provided by a cor-
rectly fastened seat belt will suffice, the air bags
are not deployed. Furthermore, only the air bags
that would increase the degree of protection
afforded to the vehicle occupants in the event of
X To activate: press ! button : for at an accident are deployed. Seat belts and air
least one second. bags generally do not protect against objects
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
alarm system is armed. Information on restraint system operation can
X To deactivate: press ! button : again. be found under "Triggering of Emergency Ten-
or sioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 58).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. See Children in the vehicle for information on
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function children traveling with you as well as vehicle
or KEYLESSGO restraint systems (Y page 62).
X Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
G WARNING
Occupant safety Modifications to the restraint system may
Introduction to the restraint system cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- intended protective function and may fail in an
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
Furthermore, the restraint system may also This poses an increased risk of injury or even
reduce the forces exerted on the vehicle occu- fatal injury.
pants when an accident occurs. Never modify parts of the restraint system.
The restraint system includes: Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
RSeat belt system components or their software.
RAir bags If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to
RChild restraint system accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
RChild seat securing system tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
The components of the restraint system work in details. USA only: for further information con-
conjunction with each other. They can only offer tact our Customer Assistance Center at
the intended level of protection if all vehicle 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).
occupants:
Rare correctly wearing their seat belts.
(Y page 49) Restraint system warning lamp
Radjust their seat and head restraint properly
(Y page 104). The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
Occupant safety 47
regular intervals while the engine is running. workshop. Immediately switch off the ignition
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in and remove the SmartKey from the ignition
good time.
lock after an accident.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo- PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness.
Safety
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
system warning lamp:
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched
on
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the
engine running
Rlights up again while the engine is running
All vehicles, except hybrid vehicles:
G WARNING
If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and
system components may be triggered unin- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are
tentionally or might not be triggered at all in part of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS).
the event of an accident with a high rate of
vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer- The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-
ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the
even fatal injury.
event of an accident, all deployment criteria
Have the restraint system checked and are met, the front-passenger front air bag is
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as deployed.
soon as possible. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
Hybrid vehicles: then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
dent.
G DANGER Depending on the person in the front-passenger
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, indi- seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
vidual restraint system components may be either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
triggered unintentionally or might not be trig- lowing points. You must make sure of this both
gered at all in the event of an accident with a before and during a journey.
high rate of vehicle deceleration. This could RChildren in a child restraint system:
affect Emergency Tensioning Devices or air whether the front-passenger front air bag is
bags, for example. The vehicle's high-voltage enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
led child restraint system, and the age and
electrical system may also not be deactivated size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
as intended in the event of an accident. You the notes on the "Occupant Classification
could suffer an electric shock if you touch the System (OCS)" (Y page 54) and on "Chil-
damaged components of the vehicle's high- dren in the vehicle" (Y page 62). There you
voltage electrical system. This poses an will also find instructions on rearward and
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front-passenger seat.
Have the restraint system checked and RAll other persons: depending on the classi-
repaired immediately at a qualified specialist fication of the person in the front-passenger
Z
48 Occupant safety
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena- Important safety notes
bled or deactivated (Y page 54). Be sure to
observe the notes on "Seat The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
belts (Y page 48) and "Air bags" is required by law in:
(Y page 51). There you can also find infor- Rall 50 states
mation on the correct seat position. Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Seat belts
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle
Safety
Introduction occupants should correctly fasten their seat

belts before starting the journey.
A correctly fastened seat belt is the most effec-
tive means of restraining the movement of vehi- G WARNING
cle occupants in the event of an accident or the If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-
vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of not protect as intended. Furthermore, an
vehicle occupants coming into contact with incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-
parts of the vehicle interior or being thrown from
the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-
keep the vehicle occupants in the best position ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-
in relation to the air bag. tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or
The seat belt system consists of: even fatal injury.
RSeat belts Make sure that all vehicle occupants are
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front seated properly with a correctly fastened seat
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear belt.
compartment
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts G WARNING
and the outer seat belts in the rear The seat belt does not offer the intended level
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenly from of protection if you have not moved the back-
the belt outlet, the inertia reel locks. The belt
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
strap cannot be pulled out further.
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten the seat
belts in an accident, pulling them close against slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
the occupant's body. They do not, however, pull abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
Emergency Tensioning Devices do not correct injury.
an incorrect seat position or incorrectly worn Adjust the seat properly before beginning
seat belts. your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
When triggered, the seat belt force limiter is in an almost vertical position and that the
reduces the force exerted by the seat belt on the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
vehicle occupant.
across the center of your shoulder.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are
synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This G WARNING
makes it possible to reduce the forces to which Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot
vehicle occupants are subjected during an acci- fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-
dent. tional suitable restraint system. If the seat
! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect
do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-
the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for
lead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten- example, in an accident, during braking or an
sioning Device in the event of an accident,
which will then need to be replaced.
Occupant safety 49
abrupt change of direction. This poses an Only use seat belts that have been approved for
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed
For this reason, always secure persons under for the standard three-point seat belt. If you
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint install another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or
systems. racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot
provide the best level of protection.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the G WARNING
Safety
vehicle: If you feed seat belts through the opening in
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- damaged or may even break in the event of an
cle. The child restraint system must be appro- accident. This poses an increased risk of
priate to the age, weight and size of the child injury or even fatal injury.
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle" Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
(Y page 62) in addition to the child restraint Never modify the seat belt system.
system manufacturer's installation and oper-
ating instructions Proper use of the seat belts
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system Pay attention to the safety notes about the seat
(OCS)" (Y page 54) belt (Y page 48).
All vehicle occupants must fasten the seat belt
G WARNING correctly before setting off. Make sure that all
The seat belts may not perform their intended occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly
protective function if: for the entire journey.
When fastening the seat belt, make sure that:
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely
RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the belt
dirty, bleach or dyed
buckle that belongs to the seat.
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
RThe seat belt is tightened across your body.
extremely dirty
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt coat.
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- RThe seat belt is not twisted.
fied Only then can the forces produced in the
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in event of an accident be evenly distributed
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi- across the belt.
fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, RThe shoulder section of the belt must always
e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten- be routed across the center of the shoulder.
sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or The shoulder section of the belt should not
fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an come into contact with your neck and must
not be routed under the arm. Where possible,
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as pos-
sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia sible over your lap.
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are The lap belt must always pass across your hip
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- joints and never across your stomach or
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked abdomen. Pregnant women must take partic-
immediately at a qualified specialist work- ular care. If necessary, the lap belt can be
shop. pushed down across the hip joints and pulled
tight using the shoulder section.
RThe seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointed
or fragile objects.
Z
50 Occupant safety
If these items are on or in your clothing, e.g. X Adjust the seat (Y page 104).
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., stow these items The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-
in a more suitable location. tical position.
ROnly one person should use each seat belt at X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet
any one time. and engage belt tongue ; into belt
On no account should babies or children buckle :.
travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle The seat belt on the drivers seat and the
occupant. During an accident, they could be front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-
crushed between the occupant and seat belt. matically, see "Belt adjustment"
Safety
RObjects are not secured with a seat belt if the (Y page 51).
seat belt is being used by one of the vehicles X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
occupants. section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
Also make sure that there are no objects, e.g. across your body.
cushions, between the occupant and the seat. The shoulder section of the seat belt must
Seat belts are solely intended for the protection always be routed across the center of the shoul-
and restraint of the vehicle occupants. To der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
secure objects, luggage or loads, always X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.
observe the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 308). The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
tions.
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt belt outlet downwards.
(Y page 48) and the notes on correct use of seat X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
belts (Y page 49). position and make sure that the belt outlet
If the center rear seat belt is being used, also engages.
observe the information about the seat belt for All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
the center rear seat (Y page 50). equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found under
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 62).
Seat belt for the center rear seat

If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down
and back up again, the rear center seat belt may
lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out.
X To release the rear center seat belt: pull
the seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm)
at the belt outlet on the backrest and then
release it again.
The seat belt is retracted and released.
Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
Basic illustration Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Occupant safety 51
X Press the release button in the belt buckle, or front passenger have fastened their seat
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt belts.
back. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the belt
Seat belt adjustment warning automatically reactivates.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of i For more information on the 7 seat belt
warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator
the PRE-SAFE convenience function. This func-
lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts"
tion adjusts the driver's and front-passenger
(Y page 287).
Safety
seat belt to the upper body of the occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and Air bags
Rthe ignition is switched on
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain Introduction
retraction force if any slack is detected between The air bag installation point is identified by the
the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not label AIR BAG.
hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-
ing. An air bag supplements a correctly fastened
seat belt. However, it is not intended as a sub-
You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and stitute for the seat belt. Air bags provide addi-
off using the multimedia system. Information on tional protection in the event of an accident.
activating and deactivating the seat-belt adjust-
ment function can be found in the Digital Oper- Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The
ator's Manual or in the separate operating various air bag systems work independently of
instructions for the multimedia system. each other (Y page 58).
There is, however, no system available today
Belt warning for the driver and front that can completely rule out injury or death.
passenger It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- which the air bag must be deployed.
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up Important safety notes
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
a warning tone. G WARNING
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
engine is started. If the front doors are closed could even cause additional injury when
and the driver or front-passenger seat belt has deployed. This poses an increased risk of
not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning injury or even fatal injury.
lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As To avoid hazardous situations, always make
soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
belts are fastened or a front door is opened
again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the including pregnant women
engine is started, an additional warning tone will Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
sound. The warning tone switches off after six
seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas- est possible distance to the air bags
tened. Rfollow the following instructions
If the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) Always make sure that there are no objects
and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt is between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
not fastened, a warning tone sounds again. The pants.
warning tone sounds with increasing intensity
for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver
Z
52 Occupant safety
RAdjust the seats properly before beginning Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
your journey. Always make sure that the seat the grab handles or coat hooks.
is in an almost upright position. The center of Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
the head restraint must support the head at attached to the vehicle within the deployment
about eye level. area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats rear side trim or side walls.
as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi- Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in
tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. the pockets of your clothing. Store such
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. objects in a suitable place.
Safety
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.

RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
G WARNING
ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
door or side window. You may otherwise be in such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
the deployment area of the air bags. function correctly. There is an increased risk
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of injury.
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
be in the deployment area of the air bag. to it.
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys- G WARNING
tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot Sensors to control the air bags are located in
be worn correctly. the doors. Modifications or work not per-
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
observe the following notes: ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
RAlways secure children under twelve years of function of the sensors being impaired. The air
age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable bags might therefore not function properly
child restraint systems. anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
RChild restraint systems should be installed on
protect vehicle occupants as they are
the rear seats.
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
injury.
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
when the front-passenger front air bag is Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Always have work on the doors or door pan-
indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front- eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
passenger front air bag is deactivated shop.
(Y page 47).
RAlways observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System Front air bags
(OCS)" (Y page 54) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 62) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
and operating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
Occupant safety 53
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer- (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
deploys in front of and above the glove box.
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- You should only use seat covers that have
tional head and thorax protection for the occu- been approved for the respective seat by
pants in the front seats. Mercedes-Benz.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about
the status of the front-passenger air bag
Safety
(Y page 47).
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (Y page 54). The
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit
(Y page 54)
Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol-
Driver's knee bag ster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. However, it does
not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
In the event of a side impact, the side impact air
bag is deployed on the side on which the impact
occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger
side (front) deploys under the following condi-
tions:
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
column. The driver's knee bag is always Rthe OCS system detects that the front-
deployed along with the driver's front air bag. passenger seat is occupied or
The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle
knee and lower leg protection for the occupant of the front-passenger seat
in the driver's seat. If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
the side impact air bag on the front-passenger
Side impact air bags side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
G WARNING of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
tion of the Occupant Classification System
Z
54 Occupant safety
Window curtain air bags If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-
tion, e.g. because the front passenger:
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on a vehicle armrest
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be
Safety
sure to observe the correct positioning of the

child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g.
cushions. Fully retract the seat cushion length.
The entire base of the child restraint system
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into
must always rest on the seat cushion of the
the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as
When deployed, the window curtain air bag flat as possible against the backrest of the front-
enhances the level of protection for the head. passenger seat.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
The child restraint system must not touch the
In the event of a side impact, the window curtain roof or be subjected to a load by the head
air bag is deployed on the side on which the restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
impact occurs. and the head restraint position accordingly.
If the system determines that they can offer Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
additional protection to that provided by the correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys-
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
deployed in other accident situations
(Y page 58).
Occupant Classification System opera-
tion (OCS)
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
Depending on that result, the front-passenger
front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not disable:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Prerequisites The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
To be classified correctly, the front passenger enabled.
must sit:
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Rin an almost upright position with their back ignition lock.
against the seat backrest The system carries out self-diagnostics.
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible
Occupant safety 55
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER G WARNING

AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
taneously for approximately six seconds. If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
The indicator lamps display the status of the restraint system on the front-passenger seat
front-passenger front air bag. and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-
lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag
passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the may deploy in an accident. The child could be
event of an accident, all deployment criteria struck by the air bag. This poses an increased
are met, the front-passenger front air bag is risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Safety
deployed. Make sure that the front-passenger front air
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front- bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
dent. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
If the status of the front-passenger front air bag remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG
changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rear-
display message appears in the instrument clus- ward-facing child restraint system on the front-
ter (Y page 265). When the front-passenger passenger seat. You can find more information
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIR Classification System" (Y page 58).
BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the status
of the front-passenger front air bag both before G WARNING
and during the journey. If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
G WARNING restraint system on the front-passenger seat
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator and you position the front-passenger seat too
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is close to the dashboard, in the event of an
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of accident, the child could:
an accident and cannot perform its intended Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
protective function. A person in the front- rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
passenger seat could then, for example, come cator lamp is lit, for example
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
cially if the person is sitting too close to the AIR BAG ON is lit up
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of This poses an increased risk of injury or even
injury or even fatal injury. fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied, Always move the front-passenger seat as far
always ensure that: back as possible and fully retract the seat
Rthe classification of the person in the front- cushion length. Always make sure that the
passenger seat is correct and the front- shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder
bled in accordance with the person in the belt guide on the child restraint system. The
front-passenger seat shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved and downwards from the vehicle belt sash
back as far back as possible. guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt
Rthe person is seated correctly. sash guide and the front-passenger seat
accordingly. Always observe the child
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
restraint system manufacturer's installation
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
instructions.
front air bag is correct.
Z
56 Occupant safety
If OCS determines that: Have the system checked by qualified techni-

Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the cians as soon as possible. Consult an authorized
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Mercedes-Benz Center. The front-passenger
lights up after the system self-test and seat should only be repaired at an authorized
remains lit. This indicates that the front- Mercedes-Benz Center.
passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a seat cushion is damaged, have the necessary
child of up to twelve months old, in a standard repair work carried out at an authorized
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR Mercedes-Benz Center.
Safety
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
system self-test and remains lit. This indi- mends that you only use seat accessories that
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
deactivated. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
child, in a standard child restraint system, the also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up perma- tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-
nently after the system self-test. This indi- passenger seat. Depending on that result, the
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or
activated. The result of the classification is deactivated.
dependent on, among other factors, the child
restraint system and the child's stature. It is System self-test
recommended that you install the child
restraint system on a suitable rear seat. G DANGER
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG
ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator not light up during the system self-test, the
lamp lights up and remains lit after the system system is malfunctioning. The front-
self-test depending on the result of the clas- passenger front air bag might be triggered
sification. unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator in the event of an accident with high deceler-
lamp lights up, move the front-passenger ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or
seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a even fatal injury.
person of smaller stature can sit on a rear
seat. In this case the front-passenger seat may not
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator be used. Do not install a child restraint system
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
should not use the front-passenger seat. pant Classification System (OCS) checked
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
adult or a person of adult stature, the cialist workshop.
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
lights up after the system self-test and G DANGER
remains lit. This indicates that the front-
passenger front air bag is activated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
(Y page 62). not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 this case, the front-passenger front air bag
restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cannot perform its intended protective func-
cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
cator lamp light up simultaneously. The front- passenger seat.
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this
case and does not deploy during an accident.
Occupant safety 57
That person could, for example, come into For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially lems with the Occupant Classification System"
(Y page 58).
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
Safety
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
facing child restraint system must, as far as
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
front air bag (Y page 54).
Z
58 Occupant safety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56).
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
BAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the front- on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 54).
Safety
passenger seat is occu-

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
pied by an adult or a per-
passenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature corre-
sponding to that of an X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
adult. Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Runoccupied against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Roccupied with the adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
child restraint system belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-
mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
Devices and air bags deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G WARNING G WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
been deployed. There is a risk of injury. tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
Occupant safety 59
tection in an accident. There is an increased Method of operation

risk of injury. During the first stage of a collision, the restraint
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- system control unit evaluates important physi-
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
bag replaced. eration, such as:
RDuration
It is important for your safety and that of any RDirection
passengers to have deployed air bags replaced RIntensity
Safety
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags Based on the evaluation of this data, the
continue to perform their protective function for restraint system control unit triggers the Emer-
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. gency Tensioning Devices in the event of a fron-
tal or rear-end collision.
G WARNING An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices triggered if:
that have been deployed are no longer opera- Rthe ignition is switched on
tional and are unable to perform their inten- Rthe components of the restraint system are
ded protective function. This poses an operational. You can find further information
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. under "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page 46)
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-
Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle on
sioning Devices which have been triggered the respective front seat
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
workshop. compartment are triggered independently of the
lock status of the seat belts.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE to trig- If the restraint system control unit detects a high
ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous accident severity, additional components of the
situations. This procedure is reversible. restraint system are deployed independently of
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bags one another in certain frontal collision situa-
are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small tions:
amount of powder may also be released. The RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
6 restraint system warning lamp will light up.
RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- mines that it can offer additional protection to
ing. The powder released is generally not haz- that provided by the seat belt
ardous to health, it could however cause short-
term breathing difficulties in people with asthma Depending on the person occupying the front-
or other respiratory problems. If it is safe to do passenger seat, the front-passenger air bag is
so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or activated or deactivated. The front-passenger
open a window in order to prevent breathing front air bag can only be deployed in an accident
difficulties. if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 47).
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,
which may require special handling and regard Your vehicle has dual-stage front air bags. Dur-
for the environment. Check with your local gov- ing the first deployment stage, the front air bag
ernments disposal guidelines. California resi- fills with propellant gas which reduces the risk of
dents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ injury. The second stage is then triggered within
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. milliseconds, filling the front air bag with the
maximum amount of propellant gas.
The deployment thresholds for the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and air bags are calculated
on the basis of the vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration occurring at various points in the vehi-
cle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The
Z
60 Occupant safety
air bag must be deployed on time, at the start of uations if the system determines that they
the collision. can offer additional protection to that provi-
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration ded by the seat belt
and the direction of the force are essentially i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
determined by: The various air bag systems work independ-
Rdistribution of the force during the impact ently of each other.
Rcollision angle How the air bag system works is determined
Rdeformation characteristics of the vehicle by the severity of the accident detected,
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
Safety
Rcharacteristics of the object with which the

vehicle has collided eration, and the apparent type of accident:
Factors which can only be seen and measured Rfrontal collision
after the collision has occurred do not play a Rside impact
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, nor Rrollover
do they provide an indication of air bag deploy-
ment.
The vehicle may be considerably deformed with- PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
only relatively easily deformable parts have protection system)
been hit and a high rate of deceleration has not
been reached. Conversely, an air bag may be Introduction
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only PRE-SAFE takes preemptive measures to pro-
minor deformation. This is the case if, for exam- tect occupants in certain hazardous situations.
ple, very rigid vehicle parts such as the longitu-
dinal body members are hit in an accident and
the rate of deceleration is sufficient. Important safety notes
If the restraint system control unit detects a side ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
impact or that the vehicle is rolling over, the rel- footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger
evant restraint system components are that the seats and/or objects could be dam-
deployed independently of one another depend- aged when PRE-SAFE is activated.
ing on the anticipated type of accident.
RSide impact air bags on the side of the colli-
Despite your vehicle being equipped with the
sion, regardless of Emergency Tensioning PRE-SAFE system, the possibility of personal
Device and use of the seat belt on the driver's injuries occurring as a result of an accident can-
side and the outer seats on the second row not be eliminated. Always adapt your driving
style to suit the prevailing road and weather
The side impact air bag on the front- conditions and maintain a safe distance from
passenger side deploys under the following the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
conditions:
- the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or Function
- the belt tongue has engaged in the belt PRE-SAFE intervenes:
buckle of the front-passenger seat.
Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of the col-
BAS is activated
lision, regardless of seat belt use and whether
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-
front-passenger seat is occupied
cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-
RFront Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the
steers or oversteers severely
system determines that they can offer addi-
Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package:
tional protection for the vehicle occupants in
this situation when a driver assistance system intervenes
powerfully or the radar sensor system detects
RRear Emergency Tensioning Devices in cer-
an imminent danger of collision in certain sit-
tain situations if the vehicle rolls over uations
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
front-passenger sides in certain rollover sit-
Occupant safety 61
PRE-SAFE takes the following measures Function

depending on the hazardous situation detected:
PRE-SAFE PLUS intervenes in certain situa-
Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
tions if the radar sensor system detects an
Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
sliding sunroof are closed. PRE-SAFE PLUS takes the following measures
Rvehicles with the memory function for the depending on the hazardous situation detected:
front-passenger seat: the front-passenger
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable posi-
tion. head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts
Safety
are pre-tensioned.
If the hazardous situation passes without result-
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-
ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE slackens the belt
end collision is imminent:
pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE
- the brake pressure is increased if the driver
can then be reversed.
applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: tionary.
X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly - the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
when the vehicle is stationary. The PRE-SAFE PLUS braking application is can-
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and celed:
the locking mechanism is released.
Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of gear is engaged
the PRE-SAFE convenience function. You will
Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer
find information on the convenience function
under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 51). detected
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to
pull away
If the hazardous situation passes without result-
PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu- ing in an accident, the original settings are
pant protection system PLUS) restored.
Introduction
PRE-SAFE PLUS is only available in vehicles Automatic measures after an acci-
with the Driving Assistance package. dent
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE
Immediately after an accident, the following
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end
measures are implemented, depending on the
collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-
type and severity of the impact:
uations, PRE-SAFE PLUS takes pre-emptive
measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
Important safety notes Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
Rthe front side windows are lowered
The intervention of PRE-SAFE PLUS cannot
Rvehicles with a memory function: the electri-
prevent an imminent collision.
cally adjustable steering wheel is raised
The driver is not warned about the intervention
Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
of PRE-SAFE PLUS. is cut off
PRE-SAFE PLUS does not intervene if the vehi- Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
cle is backing up. call
When driving, or when parking or exiting a park- Rvehicles with the hybrid drive system: the
ing space with assistance from Active Parking hybrid system and the high-voltage electrical
Assist, PRE-SAFE PLUS will not apply the system are deactivated
brakes.
Z
62 Children in the vehicle
Children in the vehicle dren may burn themselves on these parts,

particularly on the metal parts of the child
Important safety notes restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
Accident statistics show that children secured If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
in the rear seats are safer than children secured you, always ensure that the child restraint
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
are generally better protected there. restraint system has been exposed to direct
Safety
If a child younger than twelve years old and sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the child in it. Never leave children unattended in
vehicle: the vehicle.
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
The child restraint system must be appropri- their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
ate to the age, weight and size of the child properly. Particular attention must be paid to
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
children.
notes in this section in addition to the child Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
restraint system manufacturer's installation (Y page 48) and the notes on correct use of seat
instructions belts (Y page 49).
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
notes on the "Occupant Classification System proper seat belt positioning for children over
(OCS)" (Y page 54) 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
G WARNING without a booster seat.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Special seat belt retractor
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the G WARNING
parking position P. If the seat belt is released while driving, the
Rstart the engine. child restraint system will no longer be
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
an accident and injury. portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
G WARNING the special seat belt retractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
vehicle. retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
slacken once the child seat is secured.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
Children in the vehicle 63
Installing a child restraint system: always resting completely on the seat cush-
X Make sure you observe the child restraint ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
system manufacturer's installation instruc- or behind the child restraint system. Only use
tions. child restraint systems with the original cover
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out- designed for them. Only replace damaged
let. covers with genuine covers.
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor: G WARNING
Safety
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia If the child restraint system is installed incor-
reel retract it again. rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
While the seat belt is retracting, you should the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt sudden change in direction. The child
retractor is enabled.
restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
X Push the child restraint system down so that
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat belt retractor: Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions. tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
X Press the release button of the seat belt
You will find further information on stowing
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
towards the belt sash guide. lines" (Y page 308).
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
Child restraint system tems which have been damaged or subjected
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems to a load in an accident can no longer protect
is required by law in: as intended. The child cannot then be
Rall 50 states
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
Rthe U.S. territories
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
Rthe District of Columbia
fatal.
Rall Canadian provinces
Replace child restraint systems which have
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any author- been damaged or subjected to a load in an
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ing systems on the child restraint system
G WARNING checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
If the child restraint system is installed incor- before you install a child restraint system
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as again.
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or The securing systems of child restraint systems
sudden changes of direction. There is an are:
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Rthe seat belt system
Make sure that you observe the child restraint Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
system manufacturer's installation instruc- Rthe Top Tether anchorages
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
that the base of the child restraint system is the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
Z
information on the "Occupant Classification

System (OCS)" (Y page 54). There you will also
find information on deactivating the front-
passenger front air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
Safety
213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-
responds to the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system. Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the
This confirmation can also be found in the instal- rear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
lation instructions that are included with the securing rings : for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system. child restraint system are accessible.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
rior and on the child restraint system. system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- specially designed child restraint systems on
ing system the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
G WARNING systems are installed on the left and right of the
rear seats.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
do not offer sufficient protective effect for be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs seat belt system. Install the child seat according
(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt to the manufacturer's instructions.
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be
restrained correctly. This poses an increased Top Tether
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Introduction
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint Top Tether provides an additional connection
systems with which the child is also secured between the child restraint system secured with
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
child restraint system with the Top Tether If the child restraint system is equipped with a
belt, if available. Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
lation and operating instructions for the child Important safety notes
restraint system used.
G WARNING
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
rings dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
! When installing the child restraint system,
make sure that the seat belt for the middle cannot perform their intended protective
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could function. Rear seat backrests that are not
otherwise be damaged. locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
Children in the vehicle 65
in the event of an accident. This poses an X Route Top Tether belt A under head
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal- X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri- A into Top Tether anchorage =.
fication indicator. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twis-
ted.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction with the child restraint system manufactur-
Safety
display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone er's installation instructions when doing so.
also sounds. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
=.
Top Tether anchorages X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 106). Make sure
that you do not interfere with the correct rout-
ing of Top Tether belt A.
Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Top Tether anchorage points = are installed in Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
the rear compartment behind the outer head the child restraint system on a rear seat.
restraints on the parcel shelf.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
X Move head restraint : upwards. restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. always observe the instructions and safety
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint notes on the "Occupant Classification System
system with Top Tether. Always comply with (OCS)" (Y page 54).
the child restraint system manufacturer's You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
installation instructions when doing so. a result of:
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-
passenger seat
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
passenger front air bag
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
board
Rearward-facing child restraint system

If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always make sure that the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is permanently lit (Y page 47) is the front-
passenger front air bag deactivated.
Z
Always observe the child restraint system man- Override feature for:
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- Rthe rear doors (Y page 67)
tions.
Rthe rear side windows (Y page 67)
Forward-facing child restraint system G WARNING
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward- If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
facing child restraint system on the front- cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
passenger seat, always move the front- Rrelease the parking brake.
passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully
Safety
retract the seat cushion length. The entire base Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
of the child restraint system must always rest on parking position P.
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. Rstart the engine.
The backrest of the child restraint system must
lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
front-passenger seat. The child restraint system ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load an accident and injury.
by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the When leaving the vehicle, always take the
seat backrest and the head restraint position
accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap G WARNING
must be routed forwards and downwards from If persons, particularly children are subjected
the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the
vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
accordingly. cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
Always observe the child restraint system man- fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- vehicle.
tions.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
Child-proof locks direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
Important safety notes dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
G WARNING restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
could: you, always ensure that the child restraint
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
or road users
restraint system has been exposed to direct
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
traffic child in it. Never leave children unattended in
Roperate vehicle equipment and become the vehicle.
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Driving safety systems 67
Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
Safety
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
You secure each door individually with the child- Unsecured animals could also be flung around
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,
the door can be opened from the outside. cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
up in the direction of arrow :. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are work- cle. Always secure animals properly during
ing properly. the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock port box.
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side win- Driving safety systems
dows
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 68)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 68)
RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake
Assist System PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist)
(Y page 69)
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
(Y page 70)
RESP (Electronic Stability Program)
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
(Y page 73)
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
possible using the switches in the driver's (Y page 76)
door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 76)
possible using the switches in the rear com- RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 77)
partment. RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 78)
Z
68 Driving safety systems
Important safety notes tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are ding and accidents.
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei- Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
responsible for maintaining the distance to the including driving safety systems, will also
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in become inoperative. Observe the information
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 289) and dis-
Safety
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and play messages which may be shown in the
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance instrument cluster (Y page 256).
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only work Braking
as effectively as possible when there is ade-
quate contact between the tires and the road X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
surface. Pay particular attention to the informa- brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
tion regarding tires, recommended minimum uation is over.
tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" X To make a full brake application: depress
section (Y page 360). the brake pedal with full force.
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. pulsing in the brake pedal.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectively as The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
possible. of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
braking. automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running. Important safety notes
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. tion (Y page 68).
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
only brake gently. G WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
Important safety notes in an emergency braking situation is
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- increased. There is a risk of an accident.
tion (Y page 68). In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
G WARNING
the wheels from locking.
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
Braking Important safety notes

X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until G WARNING
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
objects and complex traffic situations.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
Rintervene unnecessarily
Rnot intervene
Safety
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
General information uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and
reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS G WARNING
PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-
assisted when braking.
ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-
i Pay attention to the important safety notes ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these
in the "Driving safety systems" section cases. There is a risk of an accident.
(Y page 68).
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the uation and be ready to brake.
Driving Assistance package.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the G WARNING
radar sensor system and the camera system
must be operational. BAS PLUS does not react:
With the help of a sensor system and a camera Rto small people, e.g. children
system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rto animals
Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an
Rto oncoming vehicles
extended period of time
Rwhen cornering
Rthat cross the path of your vehicle
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
cle can be detected. critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical dent.
characteristics such as the body contours and Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
posture of a person standing upright. uation and be ready to brake.
If the radar sensor system or the camera system
is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
restricted or no longer available. The brake sys- ognition can be impaired.
tem is still available with complete brake boost- Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
ing effect and BAS. impaired if:
i Observe the restrictions described in the Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
"Important safety notes" sec- covering the sensors
tion (Y page 69). Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Z
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph

Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to:
system detection range Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
Recognition by the camera system is also e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
impaired in the event of: Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Robstacles crossing your path, which move in
Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun the detection range of the sensors and are
being low in the sky recognized by them
Safety
Rdarkness i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-

Ror if: ing force, preventative passenger protection
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simulta-
of the vehicle neously (Y page 60).
- the camera system no longer recognizes a X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- emergency braking situation is over.
ing or other objects ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
- the typical outline of a person is not distin- tion as usual again, if:
guishable from the background Ryou release the brake pedal.
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow cle.
speeds where there is no visible damage to the Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
front of the vehicle. Ryou activate kickdown.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS
Function
General information
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
brake force necessary if: i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Ryou approach an obstacle, and tion (Y page 68).
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists
When driving at a speed under 20 mph of a distance warning function with an autono-
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS mous braking function and adaptive Brake
PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pres- Assist.
sure will be carried out at the last possible COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help
moment. you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision
When driving at a speed above 20 mph with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal such a collision.
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
situation. be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz- react to the visual and audible collision warning,
ardous situations with vehicles in front within a autonomous braking can be initiated in critical
speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a
155 mph (250 km/h). critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.
Important safety notes Important safety notes

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
impaired if: tion for driving safety systems (Y page 68).
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else G WARNING
covering the sensors The distance warning function does not react:
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rto people or animals
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- Rto oncoming vehicles
Safety
ple in parking garages Rto crossing traffic
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a Rwhen cornering
motorbike
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
provide a warning in all critical situations.
Rthe vehicle is new or after a service on the
There is a risk of an accident.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS sys-
tem Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
Observe the important safety notes in the uation and be ready to brake.
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 145).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, G WARNING
have the configuration and operation of the The distance warning function cannot always
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist clearly identify objects and complex traffic
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the situations.
front of the vehicle. In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
Switching on/off Rgive an unnecessary warning
The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is Rnot give a warning
automatically active after switching on the igni- There is a risk of an accident.
tion.
You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com- uation and do not rely solely on the distance
puter (Y page 247). When deactivated, the dis- warning function.
tance warning function and the autonomous
braking function are also deactivated. Function
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph
deactivated, the symbol appears in the (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
assistance graphics display. you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound, and
Distance warning function the distance warning lamp will light up in
the instrument cluster.
General information X Brake immediately in order to increase the
The distance warning function can help you to distance from the vehicle in front.
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a or
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
collision. If the distance warning function so.
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
be warned visually and acoustically.
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the system to display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles
Z
that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten- If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-
ded period of time. sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake
also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop- Assist will automatically increase the braking
ped or parked vehicles. force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
Autonomous braking function tance in hazardous situations at speeds above
4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology
Safety
If the driver does not react to the distance warn- to assess the traffic situation.
ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE- Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph
VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of
autonomous braking function. reacting to moving objects that have already
The autonomous braking function: been detected as such at least once over the
Rgives the driver more time to react to critical
period of observation.
driving situations Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or
(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-
tionary obstacles.
Rreduces the effects of an accident
If Adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the high braking force, preventative passenger pro-
autonomous braking function is available in the tection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated
following speed ranges: simultaneously (Y page 60).
R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary emergency braking situation is over.
objects ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autono- The brakes will work normally again if:
mous braking function is available in the follow-
Ryou release the brake pedal.
ing speed ranges:
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
objects
cle.
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
objects Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly Important safety notes
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion to intervene. tion for driving safety systems (Y page 68).
If the autonomous braking function requires a G WARNING
particularly high braking force, preventative
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE)
are activated simultaneously (Y page 60). identify objects and complex traffic situa-
tions.
Adaptive Brake Assist In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
Rintervene unnecessarily
General information
Rnot intervene
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 68). There is a risk of an accident.
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
tance warning signal can detect obstacles that uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
are in the path of your vehicle for an extended intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
period of time.
G WARNING side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-

red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
Traction control remains active, even if you
Rto people or animals deactivate ESP.
Rto crossing traffic Important safety notes
Rwhen cornering i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not tion (Y page 68).
Safety
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a G WARNING
risk of an accident.
If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP is unable to
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
uation and be ready to brake. ing safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a
may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. qualified specialist workshop.
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a
malfunction in the radar sensor system, the When towing the vehicle with the rear axle
brake system remains available with full brake raised, observe the notes on ESP
boosting effect and BAS. (Y page 355).
If the ESP OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously, ESP is deactivated.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) If the ESP warning lamp lights up contin-
uously, ESP is not available due to a malfunc-
General notes tion.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Observe the information on warning lamps
tion (Y page 68). (Y page 290) and display messages which may
be shown in the instrument cluster
ESP monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. (Y page 256).
power transmission between the tires and the
road surface. Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP function properly.
If ESP detects that the vehicle is deviating from
the direction desired by the driver, one or more
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The Characteristics of ESP
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi-
cle on the desired course within physical limits. General information
ESP assists the driver when pulling away on If the ESP warning lamp goes out before
wet or slippery roads. ESP can also stabilize beginning the journey, ESP is automatically
the vehicle during braking. active.
If ESP intervenes, the ESP warning lamp
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) flashes in the instrument cluster.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- If ESP intervenes:
tion (Y page 68). X Do not deactivate ESP under any circum-
ETS traction control is part of ESP. On vehicles stances.
with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- necessary when pulling away.
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for road and weather conditions.
example if the road surface is slippery on one
Z
ECO start/stop function ESP activated:

The ECO start/stop function switches the The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instru-
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops ment cluster goes out.
moving. The engine starts automatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP Characteristics when ESP is deactivated
remains in its previously selected status. Exam- If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels
ple: if ESP was deactivated before the engine start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the
was switched off, ESP remains deactivated instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
when the engine is switched on again. ESP will not stabilize the vehicle.
Safety
If you deactivate ESP:

Deactivating/activating ESP (except RESP no longer improves driving stability.
MercedesAMG vehicles)
REngine torque is no longer limited and the
Important safety notes drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- action for better traction on loose surfaces.
tion (Y page 68).
RTraction control is still activated.
You can select between the following statuses RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer
of ESP: available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly
RESP is activated. with assistance from ESP.
RESP is deactivated. RPRE-SAFE is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP inter-
G WARNING venes.
If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- RPRE-SAFE Brake is no longer available, it is
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP
of skidding and an accident. intervenes.
RESP still provides support when you brake
Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri-
bed in the following. firmly.
It may be best to deactivate ESP in the follow- Deactivating/activating ESP

ing situations: (MercedesAMG vehicles)
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 68).
i Activate ESP as soon as the situations You can select between the following states of
described above no longer apply. ESP will
ESP:
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to RESP is activated.
spin. RSPORT handling mode is activated.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an RESP is deactivated.
extended period with ESP deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
Deactivating/activating ESP there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
You can deactivate or activate ESP via the on- dents.
board computer (Y page 247). Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-
ESP deactivated: uations described in the following.
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
G WARNING SPORT handling mode message appears in

the multifunction display.
If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk briefly press button :.
of skidding and an accident. The M SPORT handling mode warning
Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
bed in the following. X To deactivate ESP: press button : until
the ESP OFF warning lamp lights up in
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an the instrument cluster.
Safety
extended period with ESP deactivated. You The OFF message appears in the multi-
could otherwise damage the drivetrain. function display.
In the following situations, it may be better to X To activate ESP: briefly press button :.
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate The ESP OFF warning lamp in the
ESP: instrument cluster goes out. The ON
Rwhen using snow chains message appears in the multifunction display.
Rin deep snow
Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
Ron sand or gravel
dling mode
Ron specially designated roads when the vehi-
cle's own oversteering and understeering If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or
characteristics are desired more wheels start to spin, the ESP warn-
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP
ESP requires an extremely qualified and expe- only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.
rienced driver. When SPORT handling mode is activated:
RESP only improves driving stability to a limi-
i Activate ESP as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP will ted degree.
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if RTraction control is still activated.
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to REngine torque is no longer limited and the
spin. drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
Deactivating/activating ESP action for better traction on loose surfaces.
RESP still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Characteristics when ESP is deactivated
If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the
instrument cluster does not flash. In such situa-
tions, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP:
RESP no longer improves driving stability.
REngine torque is no longer limited and the
X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly drive wheels are able to spin.
press button :. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
The M SPORT handling mode warning action for better traction on loose surfaces.
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The RTraction control is still activated.
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer
available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly
with assistance from ESP.
Z
RPRE-SAFE is no longer available, nor is it ESP intervenes automatically according to the

activated if you brake firmly and ESP inter- direction and intensity of the crosswinds affect-
venes. ing your vehicle.
RPRE-SAFE Brake is no longer available, it is ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist
also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.
intervenes. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds
RESP still provides support when you brake above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight
firmly. ahead or cornering gently.
Safety

ESP trailer stabilization Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP is deac-
tivated or disabled because of a malfunction.
General information
ESP trailer stabilization is not available in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles. EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to tion)
swerve, ESP assists you in this situation. ESP
slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting General information
the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-
bination has stabilized. EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
Important safety notes while braking.
G WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- tion (Y page 68).
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can G WARNING
tip over before ESP can detect this. There is If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
a risk of an accident. lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- risk of skidding and an accident.
ing road and weather conditions. You should therefore adapt your driving style
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com- to the different handling characteristics. Have
bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing cialist workshop.
the brake firmly.
ESP trailer stabilization is active above speeds Observe information regarding indicator and
of about 65 km/h. warning lamps (Y page 289) as well as display
messages (Y page 258).
ESP trailer stabilization does not work if ESP
is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunc-
tion.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
Crosswind Assist ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
General information the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to the HOLD function (Y page 194) and hill start
deviate from a straight course. The crosswind assist (Y page 150).
driving assistance function integrated in ESP
noticeably reduces these impairments.
PRE-SAFE Brake G WARNING

PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden-
General information
tify objects and complex traffic conditions.
PRE-SAFE Brake can help you to minimize the In these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake may:
risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a
pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
collision. If PRE-SAFE Brake has detected a risk brake the vehicle
of collision, you will be warned visually and Rnot give a warning or intervene
Safety
acoustically as well as by automatic braking.
i Pay attention to the important safety notes Always pay particular attention to the traffic
in the "Driving safety systems" section
(Y page 68). situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE Brake warns you. Terminate the
PRESAFE Brake is only available in vehicles intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
with the Driving Assistance Plus package.
For PRE-SAFE Brake to assist you when driving, G WARNING
the radar sensor system and the camera system
must be switched on and be operational. PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden-
With the help of the radar sensor system and the tify people, especially if they are moving. In
camera system, PRE-SAFE Brake can detect these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake cannot inter-
obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an vene. There is a risk of an accident.
extended period of time.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-
situation and be ready to brake, especially if
cle can be detected.
PRE-SAFE Brake warns you.
PRE-SAFE Brake detects pedestrians using
typical characteristics such as the body con- In order to maintain the appropriate distance to
tours and posture of a person standing upright. the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,
i Observe the restrictions described in the you must apply the brakes yourself.
"Important safety notes" section
(Y page 77).
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE Brake does not react:
Important safety notes Rto small people, e.g. children
Rto animals
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE Brake will initially brake your vehi-
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a Rto crossing traffic
danger of collision is detected. There may be Rwhen cornering
a collision unless you brake yourself. Even As a result, PRE-SAFE Brake may neither
after subsequent full application of the brakes give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
a collision cannot always be avoided, partic- uations. There is a risk of an accident.
ularly when approaching at too high a speed.
uation and be ready to brake.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
so. ognition can be impaired.
In the event of a partial application of the brakes,

the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full
braking pressure.
Z
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
impaired if: or
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
covering the sensors so.
Rthere is interference by other radar sources PRE-SAFE Brake can also brake the vehicle
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- automatically under the following conditions:
ple in parking garages Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a belts fastened
motorbike
Safety
and
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately
relative to the center of your vehicle
4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
Recognition by the camera system is also
At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph
impaired in the event of:
(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE Brake can also detect:
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
being low in the sky
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
Rdarkness
Ror if: i If there is an increased risk of a collision,
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path preventive passenger protection measures
of the vehicle (PRE-SAFE) are triggered (Y page 60).
- the camera system no longer recognizes a If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- remains and you do not brake, take evasive
ing or other objects action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects may perform automatic emergency braking, up
- the typical outline of a person is not distin-
to the point of full brake application. Automatic
emergency braking is not performed until imme-
guishable from the background
diately prior to an imminent accident.
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist SAFE Brake at any time by:
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.
speeds where there is no visible damage to the Ractivating kickdown.
front of the vehicle. Rreleasing the brake pedal.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera sys- The braking action of PRE-SAFE Brake is ended
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop. automatically if:
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
Function Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti- front of your vehicle.
vate PRE-SAFE Brake in the on-board com-
puter (Y page 247).
If the PRE-SAFE Brake is not activated, the STEER CONTROL
symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play. General information
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
this function warns you if you rapidly approach a STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
will then sound and the distance warning in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
Protection against theft 79
This steering assistance is provided in particular ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake.
Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Safety
tion (Y page 68).
No steering support is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if:
RESP is deactivated
RESP
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
is malfunctioning.
KEYLESS-GO.
Rthe lighting is faulty.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted is armed after approximately 10 seconds.
further by the electrical power steering. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-
Key or KEYLESS-GO.
or
Protection against theft X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Immobilizer A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey. Ra door
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Rthe trunk lid
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func- Rthe hood
tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:
and open the driver's door. press the % or & button on the Smart-
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. Key.
The alarm is switched off.
or
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
left inside the vehicle. or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock (Y page 146).
i The immobilizer is always deactivated when X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
you start the engine. The alarm is switched off.
In the event that the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys- X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
tem is not operational. Contact an authorized grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
Mercedes-Benz Center or call must be outside the vehicle.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or The alarm is switched off.
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
Z
80 Protection against theft
i If the alarm continues for more than

30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-
tem automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center. This is done either by text
message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends a message
or establishes a data connection provided
that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.
Safety
Rthe mbrace service has been activated

properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
SmartKey 81
SmartKey Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do

not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf or in
Important safety notes the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be
detected, e.g. when starting the engine using
G WARNING the Start/Stop button.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, A check which periodically establishes a radio
they could: connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
people or road users. Rwhen starting the engine
Rget out and disrupt traffic. Rwhile driving
Opening and closing

Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Rwhen the external door handles are touched
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Rduring convenience closing
motion if, for example, they:
SmartKey functions
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G WARNING
: & To lock the vehicle
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
; F To open/close the trunk lid
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
= % To unlock the vehicle
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a X To unlock centrally: press the % button.
risk of an accident. If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before Rthe vehicle is locked again.
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the
function could be affected. following components:
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin- Rthe doors
ity of powerful electrical installations. Rthe trunk lid
Do not keep the SmartKey: Rthe fuel filler flap
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
or another SmartKey. three times when locking.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
signal can be activated and deactivated via the
This can affect the functionality of the Smart- multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Key. Manual).
Z
82 SmartKey
You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-

firmation if all components were able to be
locked.
When the locator lighting is activated via the
multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X To open the trunk lid automatically from
outside the vehicle: press and hold the F
button until the trunk lid opens.
X To open the trunk lid automatically from
Opening and closing
outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca- X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,
face of the door handle.
press the F button on the SmartKey.
When the trunk lid closes you can then X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :
release the button. or ;.
Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
KEYLESS-GO
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
General notes period.
Further information on the convenience clos-
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by ing feature (Y page 96).
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-
Key in the vehicle. X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on
the trunk lid.
Locking/unlocking centrally
Deactivating and activating
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the If you do not intend to use a key for an extended
SmartKey with you. You can combine the func- period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven- GO function of the SmartKey. The SmartKey will
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using then use very little power, thereby conserving
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the battery power. For the purposes of activation/
& button on the SmartKey. deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby.
The driver's door and the door at which the han- X To deactivate: press the & button on the
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then
between the SmartKey and the corresponding KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 84).
door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). X To activate: press any button on the Smart-
A brief radio connection between the vehicle Key.
and the key determines whether a valid Smart- or
Key is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the vehicle.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
This occurs, for example:
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
Rwhen starting the engine are available again.
Rwhile driving
Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Rwhen the external door handles are touched
Rduring convenience closing
SmartKey 83
KEYLESS-GO start function Mechanical key

General notes General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart- unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
Key in the vehicle. use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
Changing the settings of the locking tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
system (Y page 79).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
You can change the settings of the locking sys-
Opening and closing

key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-
tem. This means that only the driver's door and matically.
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel
on your own. SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To change the setting: press and hold down
the % and & buttons simultaneously Removing the mechanical key
for approximately six seconds until the bat-
tery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 84).
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X To unlock: press the % button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X To lock: press the & button. X Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as ical key ; from the SmartKey.
follows:
Further information:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the driver's RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 89)
door. RLocking the vehicle (Y page 89)
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
of the door handle on the front-passenger Inserting the mechanical key
door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
X Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
surface on one of the door handles.
catch : is back in its basic position.
X To restore the factory settings: press and
hold the % and & buttons simultane-
ously for approximately six seconds until the
battery check lamp flashes twice
(Y page 84).
Z
84 SmartKey
SmartKey battery Checking the battery

G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Opening and closing
immediately.
X Press the & or % button.
H Environmental note The battery is working properly if battery
Batteries contain dangerous check lamp : lights up briefly.
substances. It is against the The battery is discharged if battery check
law to dispose of them with lamp : does not light up briefly.
the household rubbish. They X Change the battery (Y page 84).
must be collected separately If the SmartKey battery is checked within the
and recycled to protect the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
environment. the & or % button:
Dispose of batteries in an Rlocks or
environmentally friendly Runlocks the vehicle
manner. Take discharged i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
batteries to a qualified specialist workshop.
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat- Replacing the battery
teries.
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
material, which may require special handling (Y page 83).
and regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-
tery compartment cover : opens. Do not
hold battery compartment cover : closed
while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
SmartKey 85
Opening and closing

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment
cover : into the housing first and then press
to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
(Y page 83).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
the vehicle.
Z
86 SmartKey
Problems with the SmartKey

You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necessary
the SmartKey. (Y page 84).
If this does not work:
X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
Opening and closing
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.

unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 82).
KEYLESS-GO.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 84).
mechanical key.
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Doors 87

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 350).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 352).
or
Opening and closing

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 84).
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

G WARNING Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, park position P
they could: RStart the engine.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other There is a risk of an accident and injury.
people or road users. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Rget out and disrupt traffic. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. leave children or animals unattended in the
reach of children.
Z
88 Doors
Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open the
rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not
secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 67). If
the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey
or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 79).
Opening and closing
X To unlock: press button :.

X To lock: press button ;.
When the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle is locked.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked
or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the
inside if the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
The doors can be opened from the inside. You
X To unlock and open a front door: pull door can only open the rear doors from inside the
handle ;. vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. locks (Y page 67).
The door is unlocked and opens. If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey
or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the
X To unlock a rear door: pull door handle ;. inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Locking knob : pops up and the door Switch off the alarm (Y page 79).
unlocks. When a locked door is opened from inside the
X To open a rear door: pull door handle ; vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be
again. acknowledged if the vehicle:
The door opens. Rhas been locked with the locking button for
the central locking or
Rhas been locked automatically
Centrally locking and unlocking the The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-
vehicle from the inside ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle door which has been opened from the inside is
from the inside. The switches are on the drivers unlocked.
door.
Trunk 89
Automatic locking feature
Opening and closing

X Insert the mechanical key into opening : in
the protective cap.
X To deactivate: press and hold button : for X Pull and hold the door handle.
approximately five seconds until a tone X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key
sounds.
as straight as possible away from the vehicle
X To activate: press and hold button ; for until it releases.
approximately five seconds until a tone X Release the door handle.
sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
ing.
You could therefore be locked out if:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
i You can also activate and deactivate the X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-
automatic locking function via COMAND or clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
Audio 20 (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as
far as it will go to position 1.
Unlocking/locking driver's door with If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
mechanical key open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using (Y page 79).
the mechanical key, begin by pressing the
locking button for the interior locking mech-
anism while the driver's door is open. Then Trunk
lock the driver's door using the mechanical
key. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
Z
90 Trunk
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a G WARNING

risk of poisoning. The reversing feature does not react:
Always switch off the engine before opening Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid gers
open.
Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
G WARNING
This means that the reversing feature cannot
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
uations. There is a risk of injury.
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
Make sure that no body parts are in close
Opening and closing
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-

larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- proximity during the closing procedure.
den change in direction. If somebody becomes trapped:
Always store objects so that they cannot be Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or Rpull or press the remote operating switch
loads against slipping or tipping before the on the driver's door or
journey. Rpress the closing or locking button on the
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. trunk lid, or

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient Rpull on the trunk lid handle
clearance above the trunk lid.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section It is also possible to stop the closing process by
(Y page 394). performing a kicking movement under the rear
You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid in bumper.
COMAND or Audio 20 (see the Digital Opera-
tor's Manual).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You Opening and closing manually
could otherwise lock yourself out.
Opening
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 308).
Obstruction recognition with trunk lid

reversing feature
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-
ture:
The trunk lid is equipped with automatic
obstruction detection with a reversing feature. If
a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid
when automatically opening, this procedure is X Press the F button on the SmartKey.
stopped. If a solid object blocks or restricts the
or
trunk lid when automatically closing, the trunk
lid opens again automatically. The automatic X Pull handle :.
obstruction detection with reversing feature is The trunk lid opens.
only an aid. It is not a substitute for your atten-
tiveness when opening and closing the trunk lid.
Trunk 91
Closing trunk lid is open when the engine is running,

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:

It is also possible to stop the closing process by
performing a kicking movement under the rear
bumper.
Opening and closing

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.
X Pull the trunk lid down using recess : and Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
push it closed. clearance above the trunk lid.
X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 82). (Y page 394).
Opening automatically
Opening/closing automatically from You can open the trunk lid automatically using
outside the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.
Important safety notes X Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
Key until the trunk lid opens.
G WARNING or
Parts of the body could become trapped dur- X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More- handle and let it go again immediately.
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area Closing automatically
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid. : Closing button
Rpull the trunk lid handle ; Locking button
X Press closing button : in the trunk lid.
G WARNING
Z
92 Trunk
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea- Observe the following points:
ture and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's door RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-
is closed you can simultaneously close the trunk son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear
lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key detection range of the vehicle.
must be in the rear detection range of the vehi-
RWhen making the kicking movement, make
cle.
sure that you are standing firmly on the
X Press locking button ; in the trunk lid. ground and that there is sufficient clearance
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outside to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise
the vehicle, the trunk lid closes. The vehicle is lose your balance e.g. on ice.
locked.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk,
the trunk lid opens again after it is closed.
Opening and closing
If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-

side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk
before the closing procedure starts, the trunk lid
remains open.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Important safety notes RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking
movement within the detection range of sen-
G WARNING sors :.
The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
You could burn yourself by touching the rear area while doing so.
exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE RDo not come into contact with the bumper
ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always while making the kicking movement. Other-
wise, the sensors may not function correctly.
ensure that you only make the kicking move-
RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function
ment within the detection range of sensors.
when the engine is started.
RDirt caused by road salt around sensors :
! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- may restrict functionality.
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-
tional opening of the trunk: thetic leg may restrict functionality.
Rusing a car wash RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec-
Rusing a power washer
tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE
ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft could thus be opened or closed unintention-
(3 m) away from the vehicle. ally, for example, if you:
- sit on the edge of the trunk.
General notes - set something down or lift something up
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, behind the vehicle.
you can open or close the trunk lid or stop the - polish the rear of the vehicle.
procedure without using your hands. This is use- Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your
ful if you have your hands full. To do this, make person in these situations or in situations sim-
a kicking movement under the bumper with your ilar to these. This will prevent the uninten-
foot. tional opening/closing of the trunk.
Trunk 93
Operation Opening/closing automatically from

inside
G WARNING
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
Opening and closing

risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
X To open/close: kick into sensor detection
range : under the bumper with your foot. the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
A warning tone will sound while the trunk lid is open.
opening or closing.
X If the trunk lid does not open/close after G WARNING
several attempts: wait at least ten seconds Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
and then using your foot kick under the ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-
bumper again. over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too the closing area or may enter the closing area
long, the trunk lid does not open or close. during the closing process. There is a risk of
Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this injury.
occurs.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
To stop the opening or closing procedure: closing area during the closing process.
Rkick with your leg in the sensor detection
Use one of the following options to stop the
range : under the bumper or
closing process:
Rpress the closing button on the trunk lid, or
Rpull the handle on the outside of the trunk lid Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
or Rpull or press the remote operating switch
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey on the driver's door.
If the trunk lid closing procedure has been stop- Rpress the closing or locking button on the
ped: trunk lid.
Rmove your foot under the bumper again and Rpull the trunk lid handle
the trunk lid will open
If the trunk lid opening procedure has been Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
stopped: It is also possible to stop the closing process by
Rmove your foot under the bumper again and performing a kicking movement under the rear
the trunk lid will close bumper.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 394).
Z
94 Side windows
Opening and closing Deactivating the function to lock the trunk sep-
arately:
X Open the glove box.
X Push the switch to position ;.
If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk
will also be unlocked.
Trunk emergency release

You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with
the emergency release button.
Opening and closing
X To open: pull remote operating switch : for

the trunk lid until the trunk lid opens.
X To close: press and hold remote operating
switch : for the trunk lid until the trunk lid is
completely closed.
When the vehicle is stationary, you can close the
trunk lid from the driver's seat. When the vehicle
is also unlocked, you can also open the trunk lid
from inside.
X Press emergency release button : briefly.

Locking the trunk separately The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
You can lock the trunk separately. If you then The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lid
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains emergency release when the vehicle is station-
locked and cannot be opened. ary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock
the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or
discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
Remergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
Remergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed
Side windows
Activating the function to lock the trunk sepa-
rately: Important safety notes
X Close the trunk lid. G WARNING
X Open the glove box. While opening the side windows, body parts
X Push the switch to position :. could become trapped between the side win-
If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk dow and the door frame as the side window
remains locked. moves. There is a risk of injury.
i You can also lock the glove box Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
(Y page 309).
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
Side windows 95
body becomes trapped, release the switch or someone becomes trapped, press the switch
pull the switch to close the side window again. to open the side window again.
G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in Opening and closing the side win-
the closing area could become trapped. There dows
is a risk of injury. The switches for all side windows are located on
When closing make sure that no parts of the the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
body are in the closing area. If somebody door for the corresponding side window.
becomes trapped, release the switch or press The switches on the driver's door take prece-
Opening and closing

the switch to open the side window again. dence.
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
: Front left
; Front right
Side window reversing feature = Rear right
The side windows are equipped with an auto- ? Rear left
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
or restricts a side window from traveling ignition lock.
upwards during the automatic closing process, X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
the side window opens again automatically. Dur-
responding switch.
ing the manual closing process, the side window
only opens again automatically after the corre- X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
sponding switch is released. The automatic point of resistance and release it.
reversing feature is only an aid and is no substi- Automatic operation is started.
tute for your attention when closing a side win- X To close manually: pull the corresponding
dow. switch and hold it.
X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
G WARNING
point of resistance and release it.
The reversing feature does not react: Automatic operation is started.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- X To interrupt automatic operation: press/
gers pull the corresponding switch again.
Rwhile resetting If you press the switch beyond the point of
resistance and release, automatic operation is
This means that the reversing feature cannot started in the corresponding direction. You can
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling
uations. There is a risk of injury. the switch again.
Make sure that no body parts are in close You can continue to operate the side windows
proximity during the closing procedure. If after you switch off the engine or remove the
SmartKey. This function remains active for five
minutes or until you open a front door.
Z
96 Side windows
The side windows cannot be operated from the Convenience closing feature
rear when the override feature for the side win-
dows is activated (Y page 67). Important safety notes
Information on opening and closing the roller
sunblinds on the rear side windows G WARNING
(Y page 317). When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
Convenience opening sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
General notes Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
Opening and closing
If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi-

ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
cle, the convenience opening function is availa-
ble. close proximity during the closing procedure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
start function: you can ventilate the vehicle start function: if the SmartKey is in close prox-
before you start driving. imity to the vehicle, the convenience closing
To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the function is available.
following functions simultaneously: When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-
Runlock the vehicle ously:
Ropen the side windows Rclose the side windows
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller with power tilt/sliding panel
sunblind On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
seat sunblinds.
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail- Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:
able when the vehicle is unlocked.
Rthe side window (Y page 95)
Rthe sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with
Convenience opening power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 99)
X Press and hold the % button on the Smart-
Key until the side windows and the sliding Using the SmartKey
sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel are in the desired position. X Press and hold the & button until the side
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof windows and the sliding sunroof or the pano-
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are
roller sunblinds are opened first. fully closed.
X Press and hold the % button once more X Make sure that all the side windows and the
until the panorama roof with power tilt/slid- sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
ing panel reaches the desired position. tilt/sliding panel are closed.
X To interrupt convenience opening: release X Vehicles with panorama roof with power
the % button. tilt/sliding panel: press and hold the &
button once more until the roller sunblinds of
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel close.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.
Side windows 97
Using KEYLESS-GO If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey the door control panel until the side window is
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between completely closed (Y page 95).
the SmartKey and the corresponding door han- X Hold the switch for an additional second.
dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). X If the respective side window remains closed
after the button is released, then it has been
set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
steps above.
Opening and closing

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel are closed.
X Vehicles with panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel: touch recessed sensor
surface : on the door handle again until the
roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel close.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
dle.
Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 95).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
Z
98 Sliding sunroof
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Opening and closing
A side window cannot be X Remove the objects.

closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot slightly:
see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side windows are closed without the automatic reversing fea-
ture.
Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped:

Important safety notes Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid- switch briefly in any direction
ing panel. In this section, the term "sliding sun- The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
roof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. ped.
G WARNING
G WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become If children operate the sliding sunroof they
trapped. There is a risk of injury. could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
proximity during the opening and closing pro- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
cedures. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Sliding sunroof 99
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of G WARNING

snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur. The reversing feature does not react:
Do not allow anything to protrude from the Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be gers
damaged. Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
! The weather can change abruptly. It could movement
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid- Rduring resetting
ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-
cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
water enters the vehicle interior. ually immediately after automatic reversing
Opening and closing

Resonance noises can occur in addition to the This means that the reversing feature cannot
usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
open. They are caused by minor pressure fluc- uations. There is a risk of injury.
tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-
tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side window
slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. proximity during the closing procedure.
Only for vehicles with panorama roof with If somebody becomes trapped:
power tilt/sliding panel: Rrelease the switch immediately, or
G WARNING Rpress the switch in any direction during the
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto- automatic closing process
matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could The closing process is stopped.
trap you or other persons. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into
the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the Operating the sliding sunroof
vehicle is in motion.
If somebody becomes trapped, immediately Opening and closing
pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-
ing sunroof lifts during opening.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel. In this section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing : To raise
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto- ; To open
matically. The automatic reversing feature is = To close/lower
only an aid and is no substitute for your attention
when closing the sliding roof. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
Z
100 Sliding sunroof
automatic operation by pressing or pulling Operating the panorama roof with

again. power tilt/sliding panel
When opening and raising the roof, automatic
operation is only available if the sliding sunroof Opening and closing
is in the closed position.
The sun protection cover automatically opens
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or
close the sun protection cover manually when
the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
after switching off the engine or removing the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is
Opening and closing
available for up to five minutes or until the driv-

er's or front-passenger door is opened.
Resetting
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened : To raise
or closed fully after resetting, contact a quali- ; To open
fied specialist workshop. = To close/lower
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
smoothly. can only be operated when the roller sunblind is
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the open.
ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear ignition lock.
(Y page 99). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another sponding direction.
second. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
opened and closed again (Y page 99). ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above. automatic operation by pressing or pulling
again.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is raised at the rear, it automatically low-
ers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in
the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low
speeds it raises again automatically.
You can also temporarily deactivate automatic
lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel rai-
ses again automatically.
You can continue to operate the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel after you switch off
the engine or remove the SmartKey. This func-
tion remains active for five minutes or until you
open a front door.
When a roof carrier is mounted the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be
opened. The panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel can still be raised to allow ventilation
of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a
Sliding sunroof 101
roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the opened and closed when the panorama roof
sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
the rear.
Roller sunblind reversing feature
Rain-closing feature
The roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto-
The raised panorama roof with power tilt/sliding matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
panel automatically lowers when driving if it or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing
starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered process, the roller sunblind opens again auto-
depending on: matically. However, the automatic reversing
Rthe road speed and feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
the responsibility of paying attention when clos-
Rthe intensity of the rain
ing the roller sunblinds.
Opening and closing

You can manually cancel the automatic closing
procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch in any G WARNING
direction. The reversing feature does not react in par-
To raise the panorama roof with power tilt/slid- ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
ing panel again, press the 3 switch in direc- fingers. This means that the reversing feature
tion :.
cannot prevent someone being trapped in
The rain-closing feature is then deactivated until these situations. There is a risk of injury.
you:
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
Rpress or pull the 3 switch in any direction
that no body parts are in the sweep area.
or
Rturn the SmartKey to another position in the If somebody becomes trapped:
ignition lock (Y page 146) Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process
Operating the roller sunblinds for the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding The closing process is stopped.
panel
Opening and closing the roller sun-
Important safety notes blinds
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
between the roller sunblind and frame or slid-
ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
ing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-
blind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
: To open
Rduring automatic operation, push the
; To open
switch briefly in any direction
= To close
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped. You can only close the roller sunblinds when the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
closed.
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be
Z
102 Sliding sunroof
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the X Pull the 3 switch several times in the
ignition lock. direction of arrow : until the roller sunblinds
X Press the 3 switch in direction :. are closed.
Both roller sunblinds open, then the pano- X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is second.
raised. X Make sure that the panorama roof with power
X Pull the 3 switch in direction ;. tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can
The sunblinds open. be fully opened and closed again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above
X Pull the 3 switch in direction =.
again.
The roller sunblinds close when the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
Opening and closing
If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the

point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing or pulling
again.
Resetting the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel or the front
roller sunblind
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully
opened or closed after resetting, contact a
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panel or the roller sunblinds if the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front
roller sunblind does not move smoothly.
ignition lock.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
Sliding sunroof 103
Problems with the sliding sunroof

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Opening and closing

If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
The sliding sunroof or If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
panorama roof with obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
power tilt/sliding panel X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
cannot be closed and point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
you cannot see the power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
cause. The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
closed with more force.
If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Z
104 Seats
Correct driver's seat position Ryou should have a good overview of traffic
conditions.
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
G WARNING and is routed across the center of your shoul-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do der and across your hips in the pelvic area.
the following while driving: Further related subjects:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, R
steering wheel or mirrors RElectrical seat adjustment (Y page 106)
Rfasten the seat belt RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically
(Y page 110) or electrically (Y page 111).
RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 50).
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt mirrors (Y page 113).
before starting the engine. RYou can store the seat, steering wheel, exte-
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
rior mirror and head-up display settings with

the memory function (Y page 116).
Seats
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no

SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: G WARNING
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
possible. occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
cushion. has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level (Y page 51) and "Children in the Vehicle"
by the center of the head restraint. (Y page 62).
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
G WARNING
Ryou can move your legs freely. If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
cluster clearly. motion. This could cause you to lose control of
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Seats 105
Always make sure that the driver's seat is poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
engaged before starting the vehicle. injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
G WARNING your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do is in an almost vertical position and that the
the following while driving: shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, across the center of your shoulder.
steering wheel or mirrors
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
Rfasten the seat belt heating, observe the following information:
There is a risk of an accident. Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt soon as possible.

before starting the engine. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-
ing should also not be used to dry the seats.
G WARNING
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or see "Interior care".
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
thereby injured. Children in particular could Do not place sharp objects on the seat
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a seats should only be occupied by passen-
risk of injury. gers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
While moving the seats, make sure that your
not cover the seats with insulating materi-
hands or other body parts do not get under the als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- child seats or booster seats.
tem.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
G WARNING ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
If the head restraints are not installed or not seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
i The rear-compartment head restraints can
tection as intended. There is an increased risk be removed (Y page 107).
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the Vehicles without the through-loading feature:
event of an accident or when braking. the head restraints cannot be removed from
Always drive with the head restraints instal- the rear compartment seats.
led. Before driving off, make sure for every For more information, contact a qualified spe-
vehicle occupant that the center of the head cialist workshop.
restraint supports the back of the head at i Related topic:
about eye level. RRear bench seat through-loading feature
(Y page 311)
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
Z
106 Seats
Adjusting the seats electrically Adjusting the head restraints

G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
Rfasten the seat belt
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
Electrically adjustable seats with mem-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
ory function
before starting the engine.
: Head restraint height
; Backrest angle
G WARNING
= Seat height
? Seat cushion length If the head restraints are not installed or not
A Seat cushion angle adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
B Seat fore-and-aft adjustment tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
i Further related subjects: event of an accident or when braking.
RYou can store the seat settings using the Always drive with the head restraints instal-
memory function (Y page 116). led. Before driving off, make sure for every
RIf PRE-SAFE is triggered, the front-
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
passenger seat will be moved to a better restraint supports the back of the head at
position if it was previously in an unfavora-
ble position (Y page 60). about eye level.
Vehicles with AMG Performance Seat: the
height of the head restraints cannot be adjus- General notes
ted.
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 104).
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and
rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the
height and angle of the head restraints to the
correct position.
Electrically adjustable seats without

memory function
: Backrest angle
; Seat height
= Seat cushion length
? Seat cushion angle
A Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Seats 107
Adjusting the head restraint height Adjusting the height of the head
manually restraints electrically
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 106) up or down in the direction of the
arrow.
Vehicles with AMG Performance Seat: the
height of the head restraints cannot be adjus-
ted.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint

height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-

aft position manually
X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press

release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Installing and removing rear head

With this function you can adjust the distance restraints
between the head restraint and the back of the
seat occupant's head. X Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
slightly forwards (Y page 311).
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the
forwards in the direction of the arrow until it stop.
engages in the desired position.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
X To move backwards: press and hold release
restraint out of the guides.
button :.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that
X Push the head restraint back.
the notches on the bar are on the left when
X Release the release button once the head viewed in the direction of travel.
restraint is in the desired position. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it
X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged engage in position.
properly. X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it
engages.
Z
108 Seats
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Seat heating and seat ventilation
Switching the seat heating on/off
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
: Raises the backrest contour Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
; Softens the backrest contour

= Lowers the backrest contour
? Hardens the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.
Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat

To adjust the contour of the seat and for
improved lateral support, you can individually
adjust the front seats.
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-
cate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cush- ignition lock (Y page 146).
ion X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To narrow: press button :.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
X To broaden: press button ;. until all the indicator lamps go out.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat back- i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
rest heating may switch off.
X To narrow: press button =. i If drive program E (Y page 159) is selected,
X To broaden: press button ?. the power of the seat heating is reduced.
Seats 109
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons

indicate the ventilation level you have selected.
ignition lock (Y page 146).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the slid-
ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"
feature (Y page 96). The seat ventilation of
the driver's seat automatically switches to the
highest level.
i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan
speed can be reduced automatically. This
reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.
Z
110 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation

Seat heating or seat ven- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
tilation has been ers are switched on.
switched off prematurely X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
or cannot be switched rear window defroster or interior lighting.
on. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat
ventilation can be switched back on manually.
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel man-

ually
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
Rfasten the seat belt
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine. : Release lever
; To adjust the steering wheel height
G WARNING = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
X Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
injury.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the tion.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Push release lever : up completely.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. When
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
still be adjusted when there is no key in the igni- down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
tion lock. direction.
Steering wheel 111
Adjusting the steering wheel electri-

cally

: To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
; To adjust the steering wheel height
i Further related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 112)
RStoringsettings (Y page 116)
ROperating the on-board computer
(Y page 236).
Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition

lock (Y page 146).
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-
tion of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off
the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Z
112 Steering wheel
Problems with the steering wheel heating

The steering wheel heat- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ing has switched off pre- ers are switched on.
maturely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in

and out of your vehicle easier.
Important safety notes You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys-
G WARNING tem (see the separate operating instructions).
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts

the steering wheel, you and other vehicle Position of the steering wheel when the
occupants particularly children could EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. The steering wheel swings upwards when you:
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;
any body parts in the sweep of the steering KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1
wheel. Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door;
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the
there is a risk of entrapment by the steering ignition lock (Y page 146)
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is
switched off
Press one of the memory function position but-
tons. The adjustment process is stopped. This i The steering wheel only tilts upwards if the
function is only available on vehicles with mem- driving position is stored after the steering
ory function. column adjustment has been adjusted
(Y page 116).
G WARNING The most recent driving position of the steering
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- wheel is stored if:
ture, they can become trapped, particularly Rthe ignition is switched off
when unattended. There is a risk of injury. Rthe setting is stored with the memory function
When leaving the vehicle, always take the (Y page 116).
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. has not already reached the upper steering
limiter.
G WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
complete before driving off.
Mirrors 113
Position of the steering wheel for driv- X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for-
ing wards or back.
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected
position when:
Exterior mirrors
Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock Important safety notes
Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on G WARNING
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehi- You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
cles with KEYLESS-GO the following while driving:
i The steering wheel only returns to the last Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
set position if the driving position is stored steering wheel or mirrors
after the seat or steering column has been

adjusted (Y page 116). Rfasten the seat belt
The most recent driving position of the steering There is a risk of an accident.
wheel is stored if: Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
Rthe ignition is switched off ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
Rthe setting is stored with the memory function before starting the engine.
(Y page 116).
G WARNING
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig- side reduces the size of the image. Visible
gered in an accident, the steering column will objects are actually closer than they appear.
move upwards when the driver's door is opened This means that you could misjudge the dis-
or the SmartKey is removed from the ignition tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
rescue the occupants. dent.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only
For this reason, always make sure of the
operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is
activated in the multimedia system (see the sep- actual distance from the road users traveling
arate operating instructions). behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
Z
114 Mirrors
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Setting the exterior mirrors

X Press button ; for the right-hand exterior
If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
mirror or button = for the left-hand exterior
reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
mirror.
fold in when you select the Automatic Mirror
The indicator lamp lights up in the button that
Folding function in the multimedia system.
has been pressed.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some
time. You can adjust the selected mirror using ignition lock (Y page 146).
adjustment button : as long as the indicator X Briefly press :.
lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button : up, down, or to Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
the left or right until you have adjusted the automatically
exterior mirror to the correct position. You
should have a good overview of traffic condi- When the Automatic Mirror Folding func-
tions. tion is activated in the multimedia system (see

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field the separate operating instructions):
of vision. Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
After the engine has been started, the exterior soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win- Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automatically
dow defroster is switched on and the outside again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.
temperature is low.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into
the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
mirrors: press and hold button : until you
hear a click and then the mirror engaging in
position (Y page 114).
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 113).
X Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. Automatic anti-glare mirrors
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are G WARNING
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate. Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-
rior mirrors. come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
Mirrors 115
If you come into contact with the electrolyte, Using reverse gear
observe the following:
RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately. : Memory button M

RImmediately change out of clothing which ; Adjustment button
has come into contact with electrolyte. = Button for the front-passenger side exterior
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
mirror
? Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
attention immediately.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on lock (Y page 146).
the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the
mode if the following conditions are met simul- front-passenger side.
taneously: X Engage reverse gear.
Rthe ignition is switched on The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen- side moves to the preset parking position.
sor in the rear-view mirror X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exte-
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if rior mirror to a position that allows you to see
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting the rear wheel and the curb.
is switched on. The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to another posi-
tion, the exterior mirror on the front-
Parking position for the exterior mir- passenger side returns to the driving position.
ror on the front-passenger side
Using the memory button
Storing the parking position
You can store the parking position of the exte-
You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using
rior mirror in such a way that you can see the memory button M :. The reverse gear must not
rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage be engaged.
reverse gear. You can store this position. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 146).
X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the
front-passenger side.
X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exte-
rior mirror to a position that allows you to see
the rear wheel and the curb.
X Press memory button M : and one of the
arrows on adjustment button ; within three
seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
Z
116 Memory function
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the G WARNING

steps.
Children could become trapped if they acti-
X After successfully storing, reset the driving
position of the exterior mirror. vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Calling up a stored parking position set- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ting SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
lock (Y page 146). The memory function can be used at any time,
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- e.g. even when the key is not in the ignition lock.
passenger side using button =.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger Storing settings
side moves to the stored parking position.

With the memory function, you can store up to
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side three different settings, e.g. for three different
moves back to its original position: people.
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph The following settings are stored as a single
(15 km/h) memory preset:
Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
reverse gear restraint
Rif you press button ? for the exterior mirror
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's side on the driver's and front-passenger sides
Rposition of the head-up display
Memory function
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 106).
G WARNING X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel
When the memory function adjusts the seat or (Y page 111) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 113).
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
X Press memory button M and one of the stor-
pants particularly children could become
age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three
trapped. There is a risk of injury. seconds.
While the memory function is making adjust- The settings are stored in the selected preset
ments, make sure that no one has any body position. A tone sounds when the settings
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering have been completed.
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
diately release the memory function position
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
Memory function 117
Calling up a stored setting

XPress and hold the corresponding storage
position button 1, 2 or 3 until:
Rseat
Rsteering wheel
Rexterior mirrors
Rhead-up display
are in the stored position.
i If you release the storage position button,
the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting
functions stop immediately. The adjustment
of the head-up display is still carried out.
Z
118 Exterior lighting
Exterior lighting Automatic headlamp mode

is the favored light switch setting. The light
General notes setting is automatically selected according to
If you wish to drive during the daytime without the brightness of the ambient light (exception:
lights, switch off the daytime running lamps poor visibility due to weather conditions such as
function in the on-board computer fog, snow or spray):
(Y page 250). RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
parking lamps are switched on or off auto-
matically depending on the brightness of the
Setting the exterior lighting ambient light.
RWith the engine running (USA only): if you
Setting options have switched on the Daytime Running
Lights function in the on-board computer,
Exterior lighting can be set using the: the daytime running lamps or the parking
Rlight switch lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched
Rcombination switch (Y page 119) on or off automatically depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
Ron-board computer (Y page 250)
Lights and windshield wipers
RWith the engine running (Canada only):

depending on the ambient light, the daytime
Light switch running lamps or the parking and low-beam
headlamps are switched on or off automati-
Operation cally.
X To switch on the automatic headlamps:
turn the light switch to the position.
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to , the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
1 W Left-hand standing lamps L.
2 X Right-hand standing lamps
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.
instrument cluster lighting The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
4 Automatic headlamp mode, controlled ing at all times.
by the light sensor Canada only:
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
B R Rear fog lamp of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-
ning lamps function is required by law in Can-
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
X Turn the light switch to the position. stationary: if you move the selector lever from a
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/
ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: low-beam headlamps go out after three
minutes.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
position 0 in the ignition lock
Exterior lighting 119
light switch to the T position, the daytime Parking lamps

running lamps and parking lamps switch on. ! If the battery has been excessively dis-
If the engine is running and you turn the light charged, the parking lamps or standing lamps
switch to the L position, the manual settings are automatically switched off to enable the
take precedence over the daytime running next engine start. Always park your vehicle
lamps. safely and sufficiently lit according to legal
USA only: standards. Avoid the continuous use of the
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility T parking lamps for several hours. If pos-
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the sible, switch on the X right or the W left
daytime running lamps function must be standing lamp.
switched on using the on-board computer X To switch on: turn the light switch to the
(Y page 250). T position.
If the engine is running and you turn the light The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
switch to the T or L position, the manual ment cluster lights up.
settings take precedence over the daytime run-
ning lamps. Standing lamps
Low-beam headlamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the

corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or
and the light switch is set to the L position. it should be in position 0.
This is a particularly useful function in the event X Turn the light switch to the W (left-hand
of rain and fog. side of the vehicle) or X ((right-hand side
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: of the vehicle) position.
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-
tion 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to the L position. Combination switch
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. Please take note of the country-specific
regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or
start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to the L or
position. : High-beam headlamps
X Press the R button. ; Turn signal, right
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- = High-beam flasher
ment cluster lights up. ? Turn signal, left
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Z
120 Exterior lighting
X To indicate briefly: press the combination Cornering light function

switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?. The cornering light function improves the illu-
The corresponding turn signal flashes three mination of the road over a wide angle in the
times. direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
X To indicate: press the combination switch bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
beyond the pressure point in the direction of activated when the low-beam headlamps are
arrow ; or ?. switched on.
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
Active:
turn the light switch to L or . Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
X Press the combination switch beyond the (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
pressure point in the direction of arrow :. turn the steering wheel
In the position, the high-beam head- Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
lamps are only switched on when it is dark and (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
the engine is running. the steering wheel
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam time, but is automatically switched off after no
headlamps are switched on. more than three minutes.
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:

move the combination switch back to its nor-
mal position. Adaptive Highbeam Assist
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out. General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to change between low beam and high beam
Hazard warning lamps automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
lamps from high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-beam
headlamp range depending on the distance to
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the
high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: Important safety notes

press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a G WARNING
turn signal using the combination switch, only Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
the turn signal lamp on the corresponding road users:
side of the vehicle will flash.
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :. Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
ignition is switched off. In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
may fail to recognize other road users that
have lights, or may recognize them too late. In
this or similar situations, the automatic high-
Interior lighting 121
beam headlamps will not be deactivated or cator lamp in the multifunction display
activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci- remains lit.
X To switch off: move the combination switch
dent.
back to its normal position or move the light
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions switch to another position.
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
good time. cluster goes out.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting Certain climatic and physical conditions may
to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con- cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
ditions. moisture does not affect the functionality of the
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be headlamp.
restricted if there is:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow Interior lighting

Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
X To switch on: turn the light switch to .
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up if it is dark and the light sen-
sor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h:
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically : p To switch the left-hand front reading
depending on the distance between the vehi- lamp on/off
cle and other road users.
; | To switch the automatic interior light-
If you are driving at speeds above approx- ing control on/off
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road
= c To switch the front interior lighting on/
users have been detected:
off
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
? u To switch the rear interior lighting on/
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
off
instrument cluster also lights up.
A p To switch the right-hand front reading
If you are driving at speeds below approx- lamp on/off
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
have been detected or the roads are ade-
quately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-
Z
122 Replacing bulbs
Control panel in the grab handle (rear Replacing bulbs

compartment)
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its

glass tube has been scratched.
: Reading lamp The bulb may explode if:
; p To switch the reading lamp on/off
Ryou touch it
Rit is hot
Interior lighting control Ryou drop it
Ryou scratch it
General notes Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from for that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the
discharging, the interior lighting functions are same type and the specified voltage.
automatically deactivated after some time Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
ignition lock. your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
The color, brightness and display lighting for the
off with a lint-free cloth.
ambient lighting are set using the multimedia
system (see the separate operating instruc- Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
tions). Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
liquids.
Automatic interior lighting control Only replace the bulbs listed (Y page 123).
Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself
X To switch on/off: press the | button. replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
When the automatic interior lighting control is If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
activated, the button is flush with the over- sult a qualified specialist workshop.
head control panel. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
The interior lighting automatically switches on if qualified specialist workshop.
you: Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
Runlock the vehicle vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times. Have
Ropen a door
the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and
The interior light is activated for a short while rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs
lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via yourself. Contact a qualified specialist work-
the multimedia system (see the separate oper- shop which has the necessary specialist knowl-
ating instructions). edge and tools to carry out the work required.
Replacing bulbs 123
Overview of bulb types Replacing front bulbs (vehicles with

You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
halogen headlamps)
type can be found in the legend. Removing and installing the cover in the
front wheel housing
Vehicles with halogen headlamps

: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W You must remove the cover of the front wheel
= Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W housing before you can change the front turn
signal lamp.
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Turn rotary knob : 180 outwards until it
stops using a suitable object.
Cover ; is released.
X Fold cover ; upwards.
X To install: insert cover ; into the left, right
and two lower catches.
X Turn rotary knob : 180 inwards until it
stops using a suitable object.
Cover ; is locked.
Tail lamp (halogen headlamps)
: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
; Backup lamp: W 16 W
Low-beam headlamps
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
Z
124 Replacing bulbs
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
pull out. (Y page 123).
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. remove it.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise,
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
unlock it and pull out.
right. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
High-beam headlamps X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.

X Press on housing cover : turn clockwise and
lock.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 123).
Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-

els

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it clock- Example: right-hand side paneling
wise.
You must open the side paneling in the trunk
before you can replace the bulbs in the tail
Turn signal lamps.
X To open: release right or left side paneling :
at the top and fold it down in the direction of
the arrow.
X To close: insert side paneling :.
Tail lamps
X Open the trunk.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 124).
Windshield wipers 125
if wiping takes place when the windshield is

dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
X Pull out the plug.
X Turn fender nut : 90 counter-clockwise ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
and remove the bulb holder. optical influences and the windshield becom-
ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-
shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.
This could then damage the windshield wiper

blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch off
the windshield wipers in dry weather.
X Turn signal ;: press the bulb into the bulb

holder gently, turn it counter-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder and turn it
clockwise.
X Backup lamp =: remove the bulb from the 1 $ Windshield wiper off
bulb holder. 2 Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. to low sensitivity)
X Re-install bulb holder. 3 Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
X Turn fender nut : 90 clockwise.
set to high sensitivity)
4 Continuous wipe, slow
X Insert the connector.
5 Continuous wipe, fast
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 124).
B Single wipe
To wipe with washer fluid
Windshield wipers X Switch on the ignition.
X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
Switching the windshield wiper sponding position.
on/off Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the or
position, the appropriate wiping frequency
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when is automatically set according to the intensity of
the windshield is dry, as this could damage
the rain. In the position, the rain sensor is
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-
more sensitive than in the position, caus-
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass
ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre-
quently.
Z
126 Windshield wipers
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent X Switch off the engine.
you from observing the traffic conditions.
X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X Set the windshield wiper to the position.
Replacing the wiper blades X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windshield wiper starts.
Important safety notes X When the wiper arms have reached the verti-
cal position, press the Start/Stop button.
G WARNING X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could Removing the wiper blades
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm

has been folded away from the windshield/
rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With
you change the wiper blade. If you release the the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction
wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as
onto the windshield/rear window, the wind- it will go.
shield/rear window may be damaged by the
X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
force of the impact.
until it engages in the removal position with a
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have noticeable click.
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
Changing the windshield wiper blades

Adjusting the wiper blades so that they
are vertical
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
ignition lock (Y page 146). X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
X Set the windshield wiper to position .
arrow ? away from the wiper arm.
X When the wiper arms have reached the verti-
cal position, turn the SmartKey to position 0
and remove it from the ignition lock.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
Windshield wipers 127
Installing the wiper blades i The duration of the color change varies
depending on the terms of use.
X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm

in the direction of arrow :.

X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
until it engages in the locking position with a
noticeable click.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
X Remove protective film : of the service indi-

cator on the tip of the wiper blade.
If the color of the service indicator changes from
black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
Z
128 Windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
are jammed. movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.
fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.
Overview of climate control systems 129
Overview of climate control systems

General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog
up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Climate control
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and
air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior
filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior
climate.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is only available when the engine is running.
Optimum climate control is only achieved with
the side windows and roof closed.
If you start the engine using your smartphone,
the last selected climate control setting is reac-
tivated (Y page 149).
The residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched off
(Y page 137).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
opening feature (Y page 96). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
rior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
i The integrated filter filters out most parti-
cles of dust and soot and completely filters
out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
For this reason, you should always observe
the interval for replacing the filter, which is
specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
let.
i It is possible that the blower may be activa-
ted automatically 60 minutes after the Smart-
Key has been removed depending on various
factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The
vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry
the climate control system.
130 Overview of climate control systems
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
Example
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 134)
; Sets the air distribution (Y page 134)
= Sets the airflow (Y page 135)
Switches off climate control (Y page 132)
? Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 133)
A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 135)
B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 302)
PLUG-IN HYBRID: switch ! residual heat on/off (Y page 137)
C Switches the rear window defroster on or off (Y page 136)
D All vehicles except PLUGIN HYBRID: switch 0 synchronization on/off (Y page 135)
PLUG-IN HYBRID: activate or deactivate the & "immediate pre-entry climate control"
(Y page 143)
E Switches air-recirculation mode manually on or off (Y page 137)
F Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133)
G Sets the temperature, right (Y page 134)
Overview of climate control systems 131
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
Example
Front control panel
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 134)
; Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 134)
= Sets the airflow (Y page 135)
Switches off climate control (Y page 132)
? Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 133)
A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 135)
B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 302)
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 137)
C Switches the rear window defroster on or off (Y page 136)
D All vehicles except PLUGIN HYBRID (Canada only): switch cooling with dehumidification
on/off (Y page 133)
PLUG-IN HYBRID: activate or deactivate & "immediate pre-entry climate control"
(Y page 143)
E Switches air-recirculation mode manually on or off (Y page 137)
F Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 134)
G Sets the temperature, right (Y page 134)
Rear control panel
H Sets the temperature (Y page 134)
I Display
J Sets the airflow (Y page 135)
132 Operating the climate control systems
Notes on using automatic climate ECO start/stop function

control During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at a reduced capa-
Optimum use of the automatic climate city. If you require the full climate control output,
control you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
The following contains notes and recommenda- by pressing the ECO button (Y page 151).
tions on optimum use of the dual-zone or 3-zone
automatic climate control.
Climate control
RActivate climate control using the Operating the climate control sys-
rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the tems
rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling
with air dehumidification" function is not acti- Activating/deactivating climate con-
vated automatically in automatic mode. If trol
necessary, activate this function
(Y page 133). General notes
RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ).
When the climate control is switched off, the air
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function supply and air circulation are also switched off.
briefly until the windshield is clear again. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if climate control only briefly
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in Switch on climate control primarily using the
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, rocker switch (Y page 133).
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode. Switching on/off
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate con-
trol or PLUG-IN HYBRID: use the "residual X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
heat" function if you want to heat or ventilate lock (Y page 146).
the vehicle interior when the ignition is X To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
switched off. The residual heat function can higher using the H rocker switch.
only be activated or deactivated with the igni- X To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
tion switched off. The residual heat function is
switched off when the ignition is switched on. the H rocker switch.
i 3-zone automatic climate control: when cli-
DYNAMIC SELECT switch (except mate control is switched off, "OFF" appears in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) the rear-compartment display.
You can choose between various drive programs
with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
(Y page 154).
If you have selected drive program E:
Rthe cooling output is reduced when cooling
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is
deactivated and heat output is reduced as a
result
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
reduced
If you have selected drive program C, S or S+,
the current climate settings are maintained.
Operating the climate control systems 133
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not
be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more
quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.
For vehicles without a hybrid drive system, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is avail-
able when the engine is running. For hybrid vehicles, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Climate control
is also available via the electric refrigerant compressor when the engine is not running. The air inside
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal
and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Activating/deactivating
X Press the rocker switch up or down.
The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out.
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp over Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
the rocker switch function.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The cooling
with air dehumidification
function cannot be acti-
vated via the multimedia
system any longer
(Y page 303).
Setting climate control to automatic Automatic control
General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition

lock (Y page 146).
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main- X Set the desired temperature using the w
tained automatically at a constant level. The rocker switch on the front control unit.
system automatically regulates the temperature X To activate: press rocker switch up or
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis- down.
tribution. The indicator lamp above the rocker
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function switch lights up.
is activated automatically in automatic mode. X To switch to manual operation: press the
H rocker switch up or down.
or
X Press the upper or lower section of the _
rocker switch.
The indicator lamp above the rocker
switch goes out.
In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or
air distribution manually, the indicator lamp
above the rocker switch goes out. The Only change the temperature setting in small
function which has not been changed manually, increments. Start at 72 (22 ).
however, continues to be controlled automati-
cally. When the manually set function switches Setting the temperature in the rear com-
back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp partment using the rear control panel
above the rocker switch lights up again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 146).
X To increase or reduce: press the upper or
Adjusting the climate mode settings
Climate control
lower section of the w rocker switch on

This function is only available with dual-zone the rear control panel (Y page 131).
automatic climate control on vehicles for Can- Only change the temperature setting in small
ada. increments. Start at 72 (22 ).
In automatic mode you can select the following The set temperature appears on the rear-
airflow settings for the driver's and front- compartment display.
passenger areas:
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting Setting the air distribution
DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft- Air distribution settings
free setting
X To set: set the climate mode using the mul- Directs air through the defroster vents
timedia system (Y page 303). P Directs air through the center and side air
vents
O Directs air through the footwell air vents
Setting the temperature S Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
Dual-zone automatic climate control a Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem- _ Directs air through the defroster, center,
perature for the driver's and front-passenger side and footwell vents
side can be set individually.
b Directs air through the defroster, center
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition and side air vents
lock (Y page 146).
W Sets the air distribution to automatic
X To increase or reduce: press the w
rocker switch up or down.
Only change the temperature setting in small
Setting
increments. Start at 72 (22 ). 3-zone automatic climate control: you can set
the air distribution separately for the driver's
3-zone automatic climate control and front-passenger side.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2
General notes (Y page 146).
You can select different temperature settings X Press the _ rocker switch up or down.
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well The various air distribution settings appear in
as for the rear compartment. the multimedia system.
Setting the temperature in the front com-
partment using the front control panel
lock (Y page 146).
X To increase or reduce: press the w
rocker switch up or down.
Setting the airflow 3-zone automatic climate control

X Activate or deactivate the "Synchronization"
Adjusting the front-compartment air- function using the multimedia system
flow (Y page 304).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition The synchronization function is deactivated:
lock (Y page 146). Rif the settings for the front-passenger side are
X To increase or reduce: press the H changed
Climate control
rocker switch up or down. Rif the settings for the rear compartment are
changed
Setting the rear compartment airflow
using the rear control panel
Defrosting the windshield
It is only possible to set the airflow using the rear
control panel on vehicles with 3-zone automatic General notes
climate control. You can set the airflow sepa-
rately for the front and rear compartment. You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front
side windows on the inside.
lock (Y page 146).
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
X To increase or reduce: press the upper or as soon as the windshield is clear again.
lower section of the K or I rocker
switch on the rear control panel.
The selected airflow level appears in the rear Switching the "Windshield defrosting"
display. function on or off
lock (Y page 146).
Activating or deactivating the syn- X To activate: press the rocker switch on
chronization function the front control unit up or down.
General notes switch lights up. The current climate control
settings are deactivated.
The "Synchronization" function is only available
with dual-zone automatic climate control and 3- The climate control system switches to the
zone automatic climate control. following functions:
Climate control can be set centrally using the Rhigh airflow
synchronization function. The temperature set- Rhigh temperature
ting is adopted for the front-passenger side. For Rair distribution to the windshield and front
3-zone automatic climate control, the tempera- side windows
ture setting is adopted for the front-passenger Rair-recirculation mode off
side and rear compartment.
i If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumid-
ification" function is activated. In this case,
Activating/deactivating the indicator lamp above the rocker
switch remains switched off.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X To switch off: press the rocker switch
X Press the upper or lower section of the 0 up or down.
rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the rocker
The indicator lamp above the 0 rocker switch goes out. The previously selected set-
switch lights up or goes out. tings are restored. Air-recirculation mode
The synchronization function deactivates if the remains deactivated.
settings for the front-passenger side are
changed.
Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside
X Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion" function with the rocker switch.
X Switch on automatic mode using the
rocker switch.
Climate control
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the

"Windshield defrosting" function using the
rocker switch.
i You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside

XActivate the windshield wipers.
XSwitch on automatic mode using the
rocker switch.
i If you clean the windows regularly, they do
not fog up so quickly.
Rear window defroster

General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
defroster may switch off.
Switching on/off
lock (Y page 146).
X Press the rocker switch up or down.
switch lights up or goes out.
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
ted prematurely or can- interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Climate control
Switching air-recirculation mode Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-
on/off cally:
Rafter approximately five minutes at outside
General notes temperatures below approximately 41
(5 )
You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of
Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling
fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter-
ing the vehicle from outside. The air already with air dehumidification is deactivated
inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- temperatures above approximately 41
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at (5 ) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation tion" function is activated
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
Switching the residual heat on or off
Switching on/off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available with
lock (Y page 146).
3-zone automatic climate control on vehicles for
X To activate: press the g rocker switch up Canada.
or down. Once the engine is switched off, it is possible to
The indicator lamp above the g rocker make use of the residual heat of the engine to
switch lights up. continue heating or ventilating the front com-
Air-recirculation mode switches on automati- partment of the vehicle for approximately
cally: 30 minutes. The heating or ventilation time
Rat high outside temperatures depends on the interior temperature that has
been set.
Rat high levels of pollution (3-zone automatic
climate control only)
Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation system
Switching on/off
only) X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
The indicator lamp above the g rocker lock or remove it (Y page 146).
switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation X To switch on: press the ! rocker switch
mode is activated. Outside air is added after up or down.
about 30 minutes. The indicator lamp above the ! rocker
X To deactivate: press the g rocker switch switch lights up.
up or down. The blower will run at a low speed regardless of
The indicator lamp above the g rocker the airflow setting.
switch goes out.
If you activate the residual heat function at high
temperatures, only the ventilation will be acti-
vated. The blower runs at medium speed.
X To switch off: press the ! rocker switch

up or down.
The indicator lamp above the ! rocker
switch goes out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Climate control
Perfume atomizer
: Vial lid
Operating the perfume atomizer ; Vial
G WARNING The perfume atomizer helps to improve driving

comfort.
If children open the vial, they could drink the Via the multimedia system you can:
perfume or it could come into contact with
Rswitch the perfume atomizer on or off
their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not
(Y page 303)
Rregulate the perfume intensity (Y page 303).
If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult The following conditions can affect your percep-
a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with tion of the perfume intensity:
your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean Roperating mode of the climate control system
water. If you continue to experience difficul-
Rinterior temperature
ties, consult a doctor.
Rtime of year or day
Rair humidity
Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fati-
Full vials must not be dis- gue or hunger
posed of with household The perfume atomizer can only be operated
waste. They must be collec- when the climate control system is switched on
ted separately and recycled and is only active when the glove box is closed.
to protect the environment. The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-fil-
Dispose of full vials in an led vial. You can also choose from a variety of
filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you
environmentally responsible can fill yourself.
manner and take them to a If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the
harmful substance collec- separate information sheet attached to the vial.
tion point.
! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz
interior perfumes, observe the manufactur-
ers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.
Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is
empty. Dispose of the used vial after use.
X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove
box (Y page 309).
X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as
it will go.
X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the
perfume vial.
X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of

the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.
X Refill the vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.
(15 ml) of the desired liquid perfume.
X Screw the lid back on to the vial.
! Only refill the vial when you are outside the

vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip
Climate control
into the interior and contaminate it.
Always refill the empty refillable vial with the
same perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach-
ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-
izer.
Z
Problems with the perfume atomizer

The vehicle interior is not The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will
perfumed although the go.
perfume atomizer is acti- X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.
vated.
The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently.
Climate control
X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.

X Use a new pre-filled vial.
X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml)
of the same perfume.
The perfume atomizer is faulty.

X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Ionization
Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle
interior and attain an improved interior climate.
The ionization of the interior air is odorless and
cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte-
rior.
You can switch ionization on or off using the
multimedia system (Y page 303).
Ionization can only be operated when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. The side air
vent on the driver's side must be open.
Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey

General notes
The "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" function is only available in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles.
Before getting in, the driver's seat area or the whole interior can be briefly warmed or ventilated in
advance with the air from the air vents being pre-cooled.
The high-voltage battery must be sufficiently charged before "Pre-entry climate control via Smart-
Climate control
Key" can be activated.
When the vehicle is pre-cooled, the following functions are activated if required:
RClimate control system
RBlower
RSeat ventilation
When the vehicle is pre-heated, the following functions are activated if required:
RClimate control system
RBlower
RSeat heating
RSteering wheel heating
RExterior mirror heating
RRear window defroster
If you have switched on the perfume atomizer or ionization using the multimedia system, these will
be activated together with pre-entry climate control.
Activate the perfume atomizer (Y page 303).
Activate ionization (Y page 303).
Activating or deactivating "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey"

Before "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" can be activated, you must activate the function via
the multimedia system (Y page 303).
X To activate pre-entry climate control via SmartKey: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO.
The climate control functions are activated for up to 5 minutes for pre-heating and pre-cooling.
To deactivate "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey": "Pre-entry climate control via Smart-
Key" switches off automatically when the engine is started.
The following functions remain active after the engine is started:
RSeat heating (heating)
RSeat ventilation (ventilation)
RPerfume atomizer
RIonization
An activated "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" function can be deactivated using the rocker
switch (Y page 143).
Z
Problems with "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey"

"Pre-entry climate con- The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is under the speci-
trol via SmartKey" can- fied minimum condition of charge.
not be switched on or X Start the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill.
has switched itself off. The engine powers the electric motor. The electric motor operates
as a generator. The high-voltage battery is being charged.
Climate control
Further information on charging the high-voltage battery via:

Ra mains socket (Y page 171)
Ra charging station (Y page 174)
Ra wallbox (Y page 173)
"Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" has been started more than
twice with the engine switched off.
X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds.
X Try again to switch on "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey".
Pre-entry climate control at time of charge. "Pre-entry climate control at departure

departure time" is only activated subsequently.
The running time of the "Pre-entry climate con-
Important safety notes trol at departure time" function may be reduced
if:
G WARNING Rthe vehicle is not connected to an electric
If persons, particularly children are subjected power supply and
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or Rthe high-voltage battery is not fully charged
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even With active "Pre-entry climate control at depar-
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the ture time" the condition of charge of the high-
vehicle. voltage battery can be reduced, even if the
charge cable connector is connected.
When the vehicle is cooled, the following func-
General notes tions are activated if required:
The "Pre-entry climate control at departure RClimate control system
time" function is only available in PLUG-IN RBlower
HYBRID vehicles. RSeat ventilation
You can use the "Pre-entry climate control at
When the vehicle is heated, the following func-
departure time" function to cool or heat the
tions are activated if required:
vehicle interior if the engine is not running.
The "Pre-entry climate control at departure RClimate control system
time" function can be activated regardless of RBlower
whether or not the vehicle is connected to an RSeat heating
electric power supply. The condition of charge of RSteering wheel heating
the high-voltage battery must be higher than the
RExterior mirror heating
specified minimum condition of charge, how-
ever. RRear window defroster
When the vehicle is connected to an electric If you have switched on the perfume atomizer or
power supply, priority is given to charging the the ionization using the multimedia system,
high-voltage battery to the specified minimum these will be activated together with the "Pre-
entry climate control at departure time".
Air vents 143
Activate the perfume atomizer (Y page 303). the desired temperature. This means, for exam-
Activate ionization (Y page 303). ple, that the vehicle interior continues to be
cooled or heated if the journey is interrupted for
up to 50 minutes and the interior temperature is
Setting the departure time kept constant.
You can set the departure time using the on-
board computer or via the online access to the
vehicle. The activation of the "Pre-entry climate
control at departure time" function can be linked
Climate control
to this departure time. Your vehicle will then be
cooled or heated until the desired temperature
is reached in time for the set departure time.
"Pre-entry climate control at departure time" will
be activated a maximum of 55 minutes before
departure. If the departure is delayed, the vehi-
cle will be heated or cooled for another five
minutes.
X To set the departure time: set the departure
X To activate or deactivate "Immediate pre-
time using the on-board computer entry climate control": press rocker
(Y page 249). Set the departure time via the
switch : up or down.
online access to the vehicle (Y page 176).
The blue or red indicator lamp above the
X To activate or deactivate "Pre-entry cli- rocker switch lights up or goes out.
mate control at departure time": activate
The colors of the indicator lamps in rocker
or deactivate "Pre-entry climate control at switch : have the following meanings:
departure time" via the multimedia system
(Y page 303). Set the "Pre-entry climate con- Rblue: cooling activated
trol at departure time" via the online access to Rred: heating activated
the vehicle (Y page 176). Ryellow: departure time is preselected
When activating the "Pre-entry climate control
at departure time" function: you can select
whether only the driver's area or also the front- Air vents
passenger area should be heated or cooled.
The "Pre-entry climate control at departure Important safety notes
time" function switches off automatically when
the vehicle is started. The following functions G WARNING
remain active: Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
RSeat heating vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
RSeat ventilation the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
RSteering wheel heating is a risk of injury.
RPerfume atomizer Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
RIonization maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
Switching off "Pre-entry climate control at lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
departure time": the activated "Pre-entry cli- another area of the vehicle interior.
mate control at departure time" can be switched
off using the rocker switch (Y page 143). In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
Activating or deactivating "Immediate please observe the following notes:
pre-entry climate control" using the Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and
rocker switch the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
or leaves.
You can activate "Immediate pre-entry climate Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
control" even if the vehicle interior is already at the vehicle interior.
Z
144 Air vents
Setting the air vents

Climate control
Example
: Side window defroster vent
; Side air vent, left
= Control for left side air vent
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel = to the
left or right as far as it will go.
X To adjust the air direction: hold side air
vent ; by thumbwheel = and move it up or
down or to the left or right.
Driving 145
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Always observe the maximum permissible

speed.
The sensor system of some driving and driving
safety systems adjusts automatically while a Self-locking rear axle differential
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this ferential on the rear axle.
Driving and parking

teach-in procedure.
Change the oil to improve protection of the rear
New and replaced brake pads and discs only axle differential:
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. (3,000 km)
Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 years
These oil changes prolong the service life of the
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) differential. Have the oil change carried out at a
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-
formance in the future.
Driving
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles Important safety notes
(1500 km).
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, G WARNING
during this period. Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
RWhen changing gears manually, change up in pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
good time, before the tachometer needle rea- The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
ches of the way to the red area of the tach- jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
ometer.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
the vehicle. stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). securely and as specified in order to ensure
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
cles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles loose floormats and do not place floormats on
(1,500 km), drive in drive program E. top of one another.
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles: G WARNING
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). of the pedals, e.g.:
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
Rshoes with thick soles
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
RChange gear in good time. Rshoes with high heels
RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), Rslippers
drive in program C. There is a risk of an accident.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the
usage of the pedals.
vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on break-
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on
your vehicle have been replaced.
Z
146 Driving
G WARNING SmartKey positions

If you switch off the ignition while driving,
SmartKey
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Driving and parking
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat and cause a fire g To remove the SmartKey
Rlose its hold function. 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
the windshield wipers
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
the parking brake fully before driving off. and drive position
3 To start the engine
! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle
stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
engine speeds and driving at full throttle until lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the engine has reached its operating temper- the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
ature. The engine cannot be started.
Only shift the automatic transmission to the Vehicles with AIRPANEL: you can open the
desired drive position when the vehicle is sta- shutters in the radiator trim by turning the
tionary. SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. After
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive approximately 120 seconds the shutters open
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. automatically. Further information on opening
You could otherwise damage the drive train. and cleaning the shutters (Y page 339).
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil
temperatures below 68 (+20 ), the max- Start/Stop button
imum engine speed is restricted in order to
protect the engine. To protect the engine and General notes
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv- When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ing at full throttle when the engine is cold. ignition lock, the system needs approximately
Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-IN two seconds recognition time. You can then use
HYBRID vehicles (Y page 44). the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different key
positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
Driving 147
To start the vehicle without actively using the the engine or lights up while driving
SmartKey: (Y page 288).
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
ignition lock. pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. being removed from the ignition.
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the X To switch on the power supply: press
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 82). Start/Stop button : once.
Do not keep the SmartKey: The power supply is switched on. You can now
activate the windshield wipers, for example.
Driving and parking

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
The power supply is switched off again if:
or another SmartKey.
Rthe driver's door is opened and
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
this position
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
Key.
button : twice.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's
The ignition is switched on.
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
short time: The ignition is switched off again if:
Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition Ryou do not start the engine from this position
with the Start/Stop button. within 15 minutes
Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
Start/Stop button until the vehicle is this position
unlocked again. The power supply is switched off again if:
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button Rthe driver's door is opened and
on the front door (Y page 88), you can continue Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button. this position
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Removing the Start/Stop button
Stop button for three seconds. This function You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
operates independently of the ECO start/stop ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
automatic engine switch-off function. using the SmartKey.
Key positions with the Start/Stop button It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop
button mode and SmartKey operation when the
transmission is in position P.
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
: Start/Stop button operated
; Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Further information on situations where an
indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting
Z
148 Driving
Starting the engine General notes

Important safety notes The catalytic converter is preheated for up to
30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the
G WARNING engine may change during this time.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
Automatic transmission
they could:
Ropen
X Shift the transmission to position P
the doors, thus endangering other
Driving and parking
(Y page 156).
people or road users. The transmission position display in the mul-
Rget out and disrupt traffic. tifunction display shows P (Y page 157).
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
i You can start the engine in transmission
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in position P and N.
Rrelease the parking brake. Starting procedure with the SmartKey
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of To start the engine using the SmartKey instead
park position P of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop
RStart the engine. button out of the ignition lock.
lock and release it as soon as the engine is
When leaving the vehicle, always take the running (Y page 146).
If the engine will not start:
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
reach of children. X Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
after a short waiting period.
G WARNING
lock (Y page 146).
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling light up (Y page 286).
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave lock (Y page 146) and release it as soon as the
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- engine is running.
out sufficient ventilation.
Starting procedure with the Start/Stop
G WARNING button
Flammable materials introduced through
The Start/Stop button is only available on vehi-
environmental influence or by animals can cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or function.
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
of fire. vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey
Carry out regular checks to make sure that into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button
there are no flammable foreign materials in must be inserted in the ignition lock and the
SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for
the engine compartment or in the exhaust starting the engine operates independently of
system. the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-
tion.
! Do not depress the accelerator when start- You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in
ing the engine. the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always
take the SmartKey with you when leaving the
Driving 149
vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of
Pay attention to the important safety notes. injury.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
Always secure the engine against uninten-
depressed.
tional starting before carrying out mainte-
X Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 146). nance or repair work.
The engine starts.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started via
your smartphone before carrying out mainte-
Driving and parking

Starting procedure via smartphone nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via your smartphone, for example, if you:
Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (Y page 148). Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps
You can also start your engine via your smart- Rdo not lock the doors
phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the Ropen the hood.
previously selected climate control setting is
activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
interior of the vehicle before starting the jour- Pulling away
ney.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is General notes
safe to start and run the engine where your vehi-
cle is parked. G WARNING
Observe the legal stipulations in the area where If the engine speed is above the idling speed
your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart- and you engage transmission position D or R,
phone may be limited to certain countries or
regions. the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
You can execute a maximum of two consecutive a risk of an accident.
starting attempts via your smartphone. If you When engaging transmission position D or R,
insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
can carry out two more starting attempts. not simultaneously accelerate.
Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via your smartphone at any Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
time. away.
You can only start the engine via your smart- The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
phone if: away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock You can open the doors from the inside at any
Rpark position P is selected time.
Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual.
Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated
It is only possible to shift the transmission from
Rthe panic alarm is not activated
position P to the desired position if you depress
Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock
Rthe hood is closed. released. If you do not depress the brake pedal,
Rthe doors are closed and locked the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but
Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed the parking lock remains engaged.
Also make sure that: i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
more quickly.
G WARNING Information on the automatic release of the
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the electric parking brake (Y page 178).
engine is started unintentionally during ser-
Z
150 Driving
Hill start assist automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for- There is a risk of accident and injury.
wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the vehicle for a short time after you have the ignition and secure the vehicle against
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This rolling away.
gives you enough time to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. General notes
Driving and parking
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start : ECO start/stop display
assist.
The ECO start/stop function is activated when-
Hill start assist is not active if: ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or
the Start/Stop button.
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
If the engine has been switched off automati-
downhill gradient.
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the
Rthe transmission is in position N. ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-
Rthe electric parking brake is applied. play.
RESP is malfunctioning. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
function is only available in drive program C.
ECO start/stop function (all vehicles Automatic engine switch-off

except PLUGIN HYBRID)
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
Introduction the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically.
This section describes the ECO start/stop func- The ECO start/stop function is operational
tion for all vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRID when:
vehicles. Information on the ECO start/stop
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
function on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles
(Y page 231). green.
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped that is suitable for the system.
under certain conditions. Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-
The engine starts automatically when the driver ture.
wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel has been reached.
consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is not
Important safety notes fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
G WARNING Rthe hood is closed.
If the engine is switched off automatically and Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted seat belt is fastened.
All of the vehicle's systems remain active when
the engine is stopped automatically.
Driving 151
The HOLD function can also be activated if the Deactivating or activating the ECO
engine has been switched off automatically. It is start/stop function
then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine cles)
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): automatic engine switch-off can take
Driving and parking

place a maximum of four times in a row (initial
stop, then three subsequent stops).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-
secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-
ted.
Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by
X To deactivate: press ECO button :.
pressing the ECO button Indicator lamp ; goes out.
Ryou X To activate: press ECO button :.
switch to drive program S+ (all vehicles
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Indicator lamp ; lights up.
Ryou switch to drive program RACE If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
(SMODEL), S+ or S (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) function has been deactivated manually or as
Ryou permanently activate manual gearshifting
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
(Y page 161) (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
cle stops.
Rin transmission position D or N the brake
Selecting drive program S+ deactivates the ECO
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
active start/stop function. If you press ECO button :,
the ECO start/stop function is activated.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
Ryou engage reverse gear R Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Ryou move the transmission out of position P
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
er's door
Rthe vehicle starts to roll
Rthe brake system requires this
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
Shifting the transmission to position P does not X To deactivate: press ECO button :.
start the engine. Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
Z
152 Driving
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-

cle stops.
The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if:
Ryou switch to drive program RACE
(SMODEL), S+ or S (Y page 154)
Ryou permanently activate manual gearshifting
(Y page 161)
If you have permanently activated manual gear-
Driving and parking
shifting and then press ECO button :, the ECO

start/stop function is activated.
AMG sports exhaust system

(Mercedes AMG vehicles)
You can choose between different AMG sports
exhaust system volumes using the position of
the exhaust flap.
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-
ting is activated.
Setting the volume:

X Press button :.
If you select the loudest setting, indicator
lamp lights up ;.
You can also adjust the position of the exhaust
flap using the:
RDYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 154)
Rmultimedia system
Driving 153
Problems with the engine

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.
Driving and parking

or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 148). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 352).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 148).
If the engine still does not start:
The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
smoothly and is misfir- component of the engine management system.
ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 (120 ). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 333). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Z
154 DYNAMIC SELECT switch
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Available drive programs:
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG I Individual Individual settings

vehicles and PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi- S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
cles) characteristics
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
drive program. Depending on the drive program tics
selected the following vehicle characteristics
Driving and parking
will change: C Comfort Comfortable and economi-

cal driving characteristics
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment) E Economy Particularly economical
Rthe suspension driving characteristics
Rthe steering
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Additional information for drive programs
Rthe climate control: (Y page 159).
- the climate control settings You can also change gear yourself using the
- the rear window defroster operation period
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
mation on the manual drive program
- the performance of the seat heating
(Y page 161).
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
activated. For further information about starting PLUGIN HYBRID
the engine, see (Y page 148).
Information on the DYNAMIC SELECT switch on
PLUGIN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 229).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
General information
Select the drive program using the DYNAMIC
SELECT switch.
Available drive programs:
RACE Driving characteristics suit-
XPush DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forward or (SMODEL) able for the racetrack
back until the desired drive program is selec-
ted. S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
The status icon of the selected drive program characteristics
is shown in the multifunction display.
S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
In addition, the current drive program settings tics
are displayed briefly in the multimedia system
display. C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func- cal driving characteristics
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the I Individual Individual settings
available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available in any
drive program, regardless of the display in the Depending on the drive program selected the
multimedia system display. following vehicle characteristics will change:
Rthe drive (engine management)
Rthe transmission management
Automatic transmission 155
RESP Additional settings

Rthe suspension
Rthe position of the exhaust flap
Rthe steering
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Rthe driver assistance systems
Rthe availability of gliding mode
Further information for automatic drive program
Driving and parking

characteristics (Y page 159).
Additionally, in drive program I you can config-
ure the respective vehicle characteristics using
the multimedia system. You can find informa-
tion about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. : Position of the exhaust flap (Y page 152)
Each time you start the engine with the Smart- ; ECO start/stop function (Y page 150)
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is = ESP (Y page 73)
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (Y page 148). ? Suspension (Y page 197)
A Permanent activation of manual gearshifting
(Y page 161)
Selecting the drive program
When you press buttons : - A the corre-
sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC
SELECT switch setting is overwritten.
These settings will also be maintained if you
change with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch in
drive program RACE (S-MODEL), S+, S or C.
If you switch to drive program I, all stored char-
acteristics will be accepted. This is also the case
if you have previously pressed one of buttons :
- A.
Automatic transmission
X Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forward or
back until the desired drive program is selec- Important safety notes
ted.
The status icon of the selected drive program G WARNING
is shown in the multifunction display.
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayed briefly in the multimedia system and you engage transmission position D or R,
display. the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor- When engaging transmission position D or R,
mation on the manual drive program always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
(Y page 161). not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
Z
156 Automatic transmission
After switching off the engine, always switch Engaging park position P automatically
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- Park position P is automatically engaged if:
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey
brake. and remove the SmartKey
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey
Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-IN
HYBRID vehicles (Y page 44). or using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door or front-passenger door
Rthe driver's door is opened when the vehicle is
Driving and parking
stationary or driving at very low speed and the

DIRECT SELECT lever transmission is in position D or R
Overview of transmission positions Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission
position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC
PLUS is activated. Observe the information on
the HOLD function (Y page 195) and on
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 189).
Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
X If the transmission is in position D or N: push
the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first
point of resistance.
j Park position with parking lock
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
k Reverse gear
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
i Neutral lever up past the first point of resistance.
h Drive
The ECO start/stop function is not available
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-
steering column. tion on the ECO start/stop function
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its (Y page 150).
original position. The current transmission posi-
tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmission Shifting to neutral N
position display in the multifunction display
(Y page 157). G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
Engaging park position P they could:
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
is moving, do not shift the automatic trans- people or road users.
mission directly from D to R, from R to D or
directly to P. The automatic transmission Rget out and disrupt traffic.
could otherwise be damaged. Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
of arrow P. motion if, for example, they:
Rshiftingthe automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Transmission position and drive pro-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the gram display
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The current transmission position and drive pro-
leave children or animals unattended in the gram appear in the multifunction display.
reach of children.
X If the transmission is in position D or R: push
Driving and parking

the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the
first point of resistance.
lever up or down to the first point of resist- : Status symbol drive program
ance. ; Transmission position
If you switch the engine off with the transmis- = Gear
sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis- The arrows in the transmission position display
sion shifts to N automatically. show how and into which transmission positions
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv- you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove If the transmission position display in the mul-
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic tifunction display is not working, you should pull
transmission shifts to P automatically. away carefully to check whether the desired
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open transmission position is engaged. For this pur-
the driver's door or the front-passenger door, pose, we recommend selecting transmission
the automatic transmission shifts to P automat- position D and drive program E (drive program C
ically. in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) or S.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle
cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing
system:
X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-
tion lock.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
depressed.
X Shift to neutral N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D

X If the transmission is in position R or N: push
the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first
point of resistance.
lever down past the first point of resistance.
Z
Transmission positions A Neutral

Do not shift the transmission to N
B Park position while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
This prevents the vehicle from rolling matic transmission could be dam-
away when stopped. aged.
Only shift the transmission into posi- No power is transmitted from the
tion P when the vehicle is stationary engine to the drive wheels.
(Y page 156). The parking lock Releasing the brake pedal will allow
Driving and parking
should not be used as a brake when you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
parking. Always apply the electronic push it or tow it.
parking brake in addition to the park-
ing lock in order to secure the vehi- If ESP is deactivated or faulty: shift
cle. the transmission to position N if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
Park position P is automatically on icy roads.
engaged if:
If you switch the engine off with the
Ryou switch off the engine using the transmission in position R or D, the
SmartKey and remove the Smart- automatic transmission shifts to N
Key automatically.
Ryou switch off the engine using the
key or using the Start/Stop button ! Rolling in neutral N can damage
and open the driver's door or front- the drive train.
passenger door 7 Drive
Rthe driver's door is opened when
The automatic transmission changes
the vehicle is stationary or driving gear automatically. All forward gears
at very low speed and the trans- are available.
mission is in position D or R
If the vehicle electronics are malfunc-
tioning, the transmission may be
locked in position P. Have the vehicle Driving tips
electronics checked immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop. Changing gear
C Reverse gear The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
Only shift the transmission into posi- mission position D. This automatic gear shifting
tion R when the vehicle is stationary.
behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
Double-clutch function
When shifting down, the double-clutch function
is active regardless of the currently selected
drive program. The double-clutch function
reduces load change reactions and is conducive Gliding mode can be activated under the follow-
to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by ing conditions:
the double-clutch function depends on the drive Rthe speed is within a suitable range.
program selected.
Rthe course of the road is suitable, e.g. there
are no steep up or downhill gradients.
Kickdown Ryou are no longer depressing the accelerator
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. pedal.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Gliding mode is deactivated under the following
Driving and parking

pressure point. conditions:
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
gear depending on the engine speed. Ryou depress the brake pedal.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the Ryou use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch
desired speed is reached. the transmission position (Y page 156).
The automatic transmission shifts back up. Ryou switch to drive program RACE
(SMODEL), S+ or S (Y page 154).
Rocking the vehicle free Ryou activate manual gearshifting
Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and (Y page 161).

forth between transmission positions D and R Ryou leave the suitable speed range.
can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck i If you have selected the "Comfort" setting
in mud or snow. for the drive (engine management) in drive
The vehicle's engine management restricts program I, you can also activate gliding mode.
switching between transmission positions D You can find information about this in the Dig-
and R to speeds up to a maximum of 5 mph ital Operator's Manual.
(9 km/h).
To shift back and forth between transmission
positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT Drive programs
lever up and down past the point of resistance.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
Gliding mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) vehicles)
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of the
drive program can be selected:
ment)
Rthe suspension
Rthe steering
Gliding mode is characterized by the following:
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Rthe combustion engine is disconnected from Rthe climate control:
the drive train.
Information about configuring drive program I
Rthe engine speed corresponds to the idling
with the multimedia system can be found in the
speed. Digital Operator's Manual.
Rstatus icon C goes out and status icon : is
displayed in the multifunction display i To permanently select the gears in drive
(Y page 157). program I using the steering wheel paddle
In drive program C, you can deactivate and acti- shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the
vate gliding mode using the ECO button drive.
(Y page 151).
Z
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program E (Economy)

Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol- Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
lowing: ing:
Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical
characteristics. handling characteristics.
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as erator pedal is depressed fully.
Driving and parking
a result of the later automatic transmission Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability,
shift points. for example on slippery road surfaces.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
springing and damping settings (vehicles with automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
AIRMATIC). The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnec-
Drive program S (Sport) ted from the drive train. The vehicle uses
Drive program S is characterized by the follow- kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (over-
ing: run mode).
Rthe Rthe performance of air-conditioning system
vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
istics. and heating are reduced.
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission Drive program RACE (SMODEL)
shift points. The RACE drive program is characterized by the
Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing and following:
damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics
suitable for the racetrack.
Drive program C (Comfort)
Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum
Drive program C is characterized by the follow- sportiness.
ing: Rthe gearshift recommendation gives you
Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical information for slowly warming up the drive
handling characteristics. assemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficient
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in driving style (Y page 161). You can follow the
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel- gearshift recommendations at all times and
erator pedal is depressed fully. shift gear accordingly using the steering
Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability, wheel paddle shifters. On the basis of the
for example on slippery road surfaces. gearshift recommendation, using the steering
wheel paddle shifters, you can optimize the
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
drive train and engine operating mode at any
automatic transmission shifting up sooner. time.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
Rif you have selected a gear manually, this will
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
be maintained until the vehicle speed increa-
ses or decreases dramatically.
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
springing and damping settings (vehicles with range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
AIRMATIC). Rgliding mode is available.
Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is available.
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.
Drive program I (Individual)
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) In drive program I the following properties of the
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol- drive program can be selected:
lowing:
Driving and parking

Rthe drive (engine management)
Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving Rthe transmission management
characteristics. RESP (Y page 73)
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. Rthe suspension
Ractivation of the exhaust flap
a result of the later automatic transmission Information about configuring drive program I
shift points. with the multimedia system can be found in the
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff
Digital Operator's Manual.
springing and damping settings (vehicles with i To permanently select the gears in drive
AIRMATIC). program I using the steering wheel paddles,
Rgliding mode is not available. select the M (manual) setting for the trans-
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. mission.
Drive program S (Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the follow- Manual gear shifting
ing:
Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character- General notes
istics. You can change gear yourself using the steering
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. in position D.
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled, the
a result of the later automatic transmission automatic transmission immediately shifts into
shift points. the next gear down or up, if permitted.
Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing and Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shift-
damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). ing, you have two options:
Rgliding mode is not available.
Rtemporary setting
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.
Rpermanent setting
Drive program C (Comfort) If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-
function display will show the current gear
Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
instead of transmission position D.
ing:
If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical will be selected automatically.
handling characteristics.
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability,
for example on slippery road surfaces.
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
Z
Temporary setting X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to

position D.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X To deactivate: press button :.
or
X If position D (automatic transmission) is
selected for the transmission in drive pro-
Driving and parking
gram I: shift to drive program I with the

DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to Shifting gears

position D. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic
X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;. transmission does not shift up automatically
Further information on activating manual gear- even when the engine limiting speed for the
shifting on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles current gear is reached. When the engine lim-
(Y page 229). iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
Temporary setting will be active for a certain make sure that the engine speed does not
amount of time. Under certain conditions the reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the otherwise a risk of engine damage.
case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun
phase or when driving on steep terrain.
X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ; and hold it in place.
or
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
the drive program.
Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles) X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): if the maximum engine speed on the
currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts up in order to
prevent engine damage.
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine Kickdown

speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protects against engine damage X For maximum acceleration, depress the
by not shifting down. accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
Shift recommendation X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
Driving and parking

the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
possible in the temporary setting.
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X Shift to recommended gear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown in
the multifunction display of the instrument
cluster.
Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

! The automatic transmission does not shift
up automatically even when the engine limit-
ing speed for the current gear is reached.
When the engine limiting speed is reached,
the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine
from overrevving. Always make sure that the
engine speed does not reach the red area of
the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of
engine damage.
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,

an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-
function display.
X When message : appears in the multifunc-
tion display, pull on the right-hand steering
wheel paddle shifter.
Z
164 Refueling
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.
Driving and parking
is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no lon- X Stop the vehicle.
ger changes gear.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation (Y page 233).
Transfer case Refueling

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- Important safety notes
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-
mitted to both axles. G WARNING
! Performance tests may only be carried out Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. sion.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a
performance test. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
! Since ESP engages automatically, the igni- and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
tion must be switched off (the SmartKey or refueling.
Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1)
if:
G WARNING
Rthe electric parking brake is being tested
on a brake dynamometer Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one There is a risk of injury.
axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with You must make sure that fuel does not come
4MATIC). into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
The brake system could otherwise be dam- and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
aged. vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Refueling 165
If you or others come into contact with fuel, i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by
observe the following: the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
using soap and water. (Y page 388).
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- Refueling
Driving and parking

out delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
General information
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- Pay attention to the important safety notes
ing. (Y page 164).
RImmediately change out of clothing which PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: pressure in the fuel
has come into contact with fuel. tank must be released before refueling.
Except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if you
G WARNING unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, the
fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next
explosion. to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-
Always touch the vehicle body before opening cle.
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is Preparing to refuel
thereby discharged. X Switch off the engine.
X Open the driver's door.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu- The on-board electronics now have status 0.
eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge This is the same as the SmartKey having been
could build up again. removed.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition lock:
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the Opening the fuel filler flap (except
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection sys-
tem could be blocked by particles from the
fuel can.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out : To open the fuel filler flap
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. ; To insert the fuel filler cap
Z
166 Refueling
= Tire pressure table i From a speed of 2 km/h, the fuel filler cap
? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled can no longer be opened.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of i The opening process for the fuel filler cap
arrow :. may take up to 15 minutes.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the
Driving and parking
inside of the fuel filler flap.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may
leak out. : To open the fuel filler flap
; To insert the fuel filler cap
= Tire pressure table
Opening the fuel filler flap (PLUG-IN
? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
HYBRID vehicles)
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may
leak out.
X Pull switch :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes and the Please Closing the fuel filler flap
Wait Depressurizing Tank message
appears in the multifunction display. X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
If the fuel filler cap is open, indicator lamp ;
X Close the fuel filler flap.
lights up.
The Tank is Depressurized Ready for If you drive at speeds above 2 km/h with the fuel
Refueling message appears in the multi- filler flap open, the Fuel Filler Flap Open
function display. message is shown in the multifunction display.
Please be sure to observe the information on Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
refueling on the fuel filler flap. cle.
There is a malfunction if: i For further information on warning and indi-
Rindicator lamp ; first flashes and then goes
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
out (Y page 293).
Rthe yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open,
lights up the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A
message appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 271).
Refueling 167
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning

lamp may light up (Y page 293).
For further information on warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(Y page 293).
Driving and parking
Z
168 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G WARNING
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
Driving and parking

or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESSGO
X Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the
SmartKey having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81).
X PLUG-IN HYBRID Vehicles: depressurize the fuel tank

(Y page 165).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 83).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
Charging the high-voltage battery the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system

(PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) checked by a qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes G WARNING
G DANGER In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-
The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed a
under high voltage. If you modify components critical value. In this case flammable gas
in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system escapes through a ventilation valve on the
or touch damaged components, you may be underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk
electrocuted. The components in the vehi- of injury.
cle's high-voltage electrical system may be Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure
damaged in an accident, although the damage the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst
is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. observing legal requirements.
Following an accident, do not touch any high-
voltage components and never modify the G DANGER
vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have If you use incorrectly installed mains sockets
the vehicle towed away after an accident and or adapters, extension cables or similar to
connect the charging cable to a mains socket,
Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 169
this could lead to fires or an electric shock. RNever use damaged charging cables.
There is a risk of fatal injury. RDo not extend the charging cable.
To avoid hazardous situations, observe the RDo not use an adapter.
following: RAlways observe the safety notes in the wall-
ROnly connect the charging cable to mains box's operating instructions.
sockets that:
- are installed correctly and
The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is
under high voltage.
Driving and parking

- have been approved by an electrical spe-
RDo not tamper with the high-voltage compo-
cialist. nents or the orange cables of the high-voltage
RFor safety reasons, only use the charging electrical system.
cables supplied with the vehicle, or charg- RDo not touch high-voltage components or the
ing cables which have been approved for orange cables of the high-voltage electrical
use with this vehicle. system when a vehicle has been involved in a
crash.
RNever use a damaged charging cable.
RNever touch damaged components or the
RDo not use: damaged orange cables of the high-voltage
- Extension cables electrical system.
- Cable drums RDo not remove the covers of the high-voltage
electrical system components that are
- Multiple sockets marked with a warning sticker.
RDo not use a socket adapter to connect the
charging cable to the mains socket. The
only exception is if the adapter has been General notes
tested and approved by the manufacturer
for charging the high-voltage battery in an Method of operation
electric vehicle. The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage bat-
RAlways observe the safety notes in the tery for driving. The high-voltage battery stores
socket adapter's operating instructions. the energy needed to operate the electric motor
and releases it again.
The electric motor uses energy that has been
G DANGER stored in the high-voltage battery when pulling
Connecting the charging cable to the wallbox away, accelerating and during the journey.
via an incorrectly installed wallbox or adapter, In overrun mode, kinetic energy is converted by
extension cable or similar could cause a fire or means of energy recuperation into electrical
an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. energy and stored in the high-voltage battery.
Information on overrun mode (Y page 232).
To avoid hazardous situations, observe the
The high-voltage battery can be charged as fol-
following:
lows:
ROnly connect the charging cable to a wall- Rthrough energy recuperation while the vehicle
box that: is in motion
- is installed correctly and Rthrough the combustion engine while driving
- has been approved by an electrical spe- in CHARGE operating mode (Y page 226)
cialist. Rwith the relevant charging cable at an electri-
cal outlet while the vehicle is stationary
RFor safety reasons, only use charging
Rwith the relevant charging cable at a wallbox
cables that have been tested and approved while the vehicle is stationary
by the manufacturer for charging the high- Rwith the relevant charging cable at a charging
voltage battery in an electric vehicle. station while the vehicle is stationary
Z
The high-voltage battery can be charged in a Terms of use

nominal voltage range from 100 V to 240 V.
You can view the condition of charge of the high- Please note the information on exceptions and
voltage battery in the multifunction display. You limitations in warranty documentation and in
can find information in "PLUG-IN HYBRID oper- the Maintenance Booklet.
ation", section "Menus and submenus" under
"Energy flow display" (Y page 227). Handling the charging cable and charg-
ing cable controls
High and low outside temperatures
Driving and parking
Do not leave the charging cable controls

Low outside temperatures (Y page 171) hanging loose from an electrical
outlet. Otherwise, this could result in a poor
At very low outside temperatures the maximum
contact with the electrical outlet and malfunc-
power output of the high-voltage battery may be
tions when charging the vehicle.
reduced. The high-voltage battery is then no
longer able to provide the normal electrical To ensure that the brackets within the charging
power output. cable controls are not subjected to incorrect
High outside temperatures loads, observe the following:
To prevent damage to the high-voltage battery RNever lift or carry the controls by the charging
due to very high outside temperatures, the max- cable connector or the mains plug.
imum power output of the high-voltage battery RTo transport the charging cable, the coiled
is reduced by the vehicle. part can be:
- wrapped around the controls or
Energy consumption and electrical - secured to the housing of the controls
range
Heat generated by the charging cable
The maximum electrical range is generally
reduced by: and charging cable connector
Rhigh and low outside temperatures Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
Roperating the climate control system (Y page 168).
Rswitching on consumers During the charging process, the charging cable
and charging cable connector may heat up.
The battery's physical characteristics are such
that leaving the vehicle parked for long periods The charging cable and charging cable connec-
at low outdoor temperatures without charging it tor will only heat up within the permissible lim-
can lead to: iting values, provided that:
Ra reduction in battery performance Rthe power supply and the charging cable are
Rlonger charge times

not damaged
Rthe instructions for handling the charging
cable and controls on the charging cable are
Notes on battery care observed
Avoid storing or transporting the vehicle at If the charging cable or plug get too hot, have the
excessively high or low temperatures over a long mains power supply checked.
period.
If you park the vehicle and leave it stationary for Protection device against overvoltage
long periods:
! Overvoltage in the mains supply may dam-
Rcheck the condition of charge of the high-
age the vehicle. For this reason, the vehicle is
voltage battery more often equipped with a protection device against
Rconnect the vehicle to a power supply overvoltage in the mains supply. This device
This prevents self-discharge and damage to the may be triggered during severe thunder-
high-voltage battery. storms, for example, and may lead to the buil-
ding's fuse being tripped and an interruption
in the power supply. These functions protect
the vehicle. After the building fuse is switched
on again, the charging process resumes auto- Information on charging at a charging station
matically. Following an interruption in the (Y page 174).
power supply or tripping of the building's fuse,
it may take up to 10 minutes for charging to Stowing the charging cable
resume automatically. The charging cable can be stowed in the bag
Switch on the building protection system again supplied in the trunk/cargo compartment of the
after it has been triggered. Otherwise, the vehicle and held in place with the Velcro fas-
charging process cannot be continued. tener.
Driving and parking

Controls on the charging cable
General information about the charging
procedure
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 168).
The vehicle socket is located in the rear bumper
on the right below the tail lamp.
The charge socket flap and the vehicle are cen-
trally locked or unlocked simultaneously.
Charging the high-voltage battery via

the electrical outlet : Alternating current status indicator
; Control/protection system indicator
Charging cable for electrical outlets
= Charge current indicator
Important safety notes ? Charge current setting button
! Only use the charging cable to charge the When displays : and ; on the charging cable
high-voltage battery. Do not use the charging light up, this means the following:
cable for other purposes. It may otherwise be
damaged. Display :
A charging cable for connection to the electrical Lights up The external power supply
outlet is included with the vehicle. Only use the green connection is working prop-
charging cable included with the vehicle or erly. The high-voltage battery
charging cables that have been approved for the can be charged.
vehicle.
Flashes red A malfunction has been
i If you use the supplied 12 A charging cable detected in the external
to charge a high-voltage battery: power supply. The high-volt-
Rthe charge time increases considerably
age battery is recharged as
soon as the electricity signal
Relectrical consumption increases consider-
registers normal values.
ably
Where possible, charge the high-voltage bat- Lights up red There is a malfunction. The
tery at a charging station (Y page 174). Only charging cable must be
then can certified electrical energy consump- removed from the mains
tion levels be reached. socket and then reinserted.
i The charging process can vary depending on
the power supply. Therefore, always observe
the local information.
Information about charging from a wallbox
(Y page 173).
Z
Display ; i The value of the maximum setting and the

adjustment value may vary depending on the
Lights up There are no malfunctions. country.
green The high-voltage battery can Before charging the high-voltage battery, check
be charged. the maximum permissible charge current for the
Lights up red An impermissible current is relevant power socket.
being supplied to the control X To adjust the setting: press button ?
unit. The high-voltage battery repeatedly until the desired setting is selec-
Driving and parking
cannot be charged. ted in display =.

RTwo LEDs are flashing: minimum setting
i For information on problems relating to the RAll LEDs are flashing: maximum setting
charging process, see (Y page 175). If, after the charging process, the charging cable
is:
Setting the maximum charge current
Rleft connected to the power socket, the cur-
G WARNING rently selected values will be used for the next
If the charge current draw via a mains socket charging process.
is too high during the charging process, the Rremoved from the power socket, the values
external electrical system may overheat. will be reset to the minimum setting for the
There is a risk of fire. next charging process. You may then need to
reset the values of the maximum charge cur-
Before beginning the charging process, check rent.
the maximum permissible charge current
locally. Consult a qualified expert to do so i If the vehicle requires more time than usual
when charging, check the maximum charge
where necessary.
current settings using the controls on the
If necessary, adjust your vehicle's settings. charging cable or in the on-board computer's
menu.
! An excessive charge current can blow a fuse
or lead to overheating of the external power Indicator lamp on the vehicle socket
supply. Check whether the external power When the indicator lamp on the vehicle socket
supply is compatible with the set charge cur- lights up, this means the following:
rent. If necessary, lower the set charge cur-
rent or use another power socket. Indicator
lamp
You can set a limit for the values of the charge
current used in charging the high-voltage bat- Flashes The connection between the
tery. This acts as a means of preventing the orange vehicle and the current
power supply from overloading. You can set this source is being established
limit by using the controls on the charging cable before charging begins.
or in the on-board computer's menu. Only set
the maximum charge current in the on-board Flashes The high-voltage battery is
computer menu if there are no charge current green being charged.
settings on the charging cable.
Flashes red A malfunction has occurred
The default standard value in the vehicle corre- while charging.
sponds to the maximum charge current value.
The indicator lamp goes out
The default standard value on the charging cable after approximately
is the minimum charge current setting. This cor- 90 seconds.
responds to the minimum available charge cur-
rent from the power supply. The value on the
charging cable can be increased and is descri-
bed in the following section.
Indicator X Press fastener ; to the left.

lamp Socket cap = is open.
X Insert the power supply plug into the electri-
Lights up A charging break for the high- cal outlet to the stop.
orange voltage battery is taking X Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-
place. cle socket ? to the stop.
The indicator lamp goes out Indicator lamp A first flashes orange and
after approximately then green.
90 seconds. The high-voltage battery is being charged.
Driving and parking

Lights up The high-voltage battery is i If the charging cable is plugged in, you can-
green fully charged. not start the engine or move the vehicle.
The indicator lamp goes out
after approximately i Depending on the temperature, the fan and
90 seconds. battery cooling system may audibly switch on
during the charging process.
i If the indicator lamp is off, lock or unlock the
vehicle. The indicator lamp then displays the Removing the charging cable
current status of the charging process again. The high-voltage battery is fully charged when:
Rthe charge level display reaches 100% in the
Connecting the charging cable multifunction display (Y page 227)
Rthe indicator lamp in the vehicle socket lights
up green after unlocking or locking the vehicle
X Unlock the vehicle.
X Press and hold button B on the charging
cable connector and remove the charging
cable connector from the vehicle socket.
X Close socket cap =.
X Close charge socket flap :.
X Remove the mains plug from the mains
socket and safely stow away the charging
cable inside the vehicle (Y page 171).
Charging the high-voltage battery

from the wallbox
General notes
It is recommended that you charge your vehicle
using a wallbox or at a charging station.
Only use charging cables that have been tested
and approved by the manufacturer for charging
the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
X Shift the transmission to position P. Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
X Switch the ignition off. (Y page 168).
X Press the charge socket flap in the direction
of arrow :.
The charge socket flap swings up.
Z
Connecting the charging cable X Unlock the vehicle.

X Press and hold button B on the charging
cable connector and remove the charging
cable connector from the vehicle socket.
X Close socket cap =.
X Close charge socket flap :.
Driving and parking
Charging the high-voltage battery at

the charging station
Before beginning the charging process at a
charging station without communication capa-
bilities, you must first activate the station, e.g.
using an RFID card. Observe the on-site opera-
tor instructions for the charging station.
The connection for the vehicle at a charging sta-
tion is identical to the connection on a wallbox
(Y page 173).

X Press the charge socket flap in direction of
arrow :.
The charge socket flap swings up.
X Press fastener ; to the left.
Socket cap = is open.
X Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-
cle socket ? to the stop.
Indicator lamp A first flashes orange and
then green.
The high-voltage battery is being charged.
i If the charging cable is plugged in, you can-
not start the engine or move the vehicle.
i Depending on the temperature, the fan and
battery cooling system may audibly switch on
during the charging process.
Removing the charging cable

The high-voltage battery is fully charged when:
Rthe charge level display reaches 100% in the
multifunction display (Y page 227)
Rthe indicator lamp in the vehicle socket lights
up green after unlocking or locking the vehicle
Problems with the charging process

The charge socket flap The charge socket flap is not unlocked.
cannot be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81).
If the key battery is discharged:
X Unlock the driver's door using the mechanical key (Y page 83).
Driving and parking

or
X Unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside (Y page 88).
The charge socket flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.
X Lock the vehicle and unlock it again.
If, after that, the opening mechanism is still jammed:

The high-voltage battery The indicator lamp on the vehicle socket does not light up or flashes
is not being charged. red.
A malfunction has occurred during the initialization of the charging
process or during charging.
X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket
and plug it back into the vehicle socket.
If the problem persists:
X Use a different charging station.
or
The high-voltage battery The electrical outlet is faulty.

is not charged during the X Have the electrical outlet checked to test if it is functioning prop-
charging process when erly.
connected to a power
or
socket.
X Use a different electrical outlet.
The charging cable con- The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked.
nector cannot be X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector. The
removed from the vehi- snap fastener on the vehicle socket is unlocked.
cle socket.
X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.
If the snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked:

X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector and try
to release the lock.
Z
Online access to the vehicle Every person who has access to the informa-
tion stated can use the functions of the online
General information access to the vehicle.
G WARNING i Information when selling a vehicle or

buying a used vehicle:
If you operate information systems and com-
RIf you sell your vehicle, you are obliged to
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- delete the vehicle from your personal area
cle while driving, you will be distracted from on the online access to the vehicle.
Driving and parking
traffic conditions. You could also lose control RIf you have bought a used vehicle, it is pos-
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. sible that the previous owner still has
Only operate the equipment when the traffic access to the online access to the vehicle.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Calling up functions
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- The online access to the vehicle allows you
ment when the vehicle is stationary. access to your vehicle's information and func-
tions using remote query and remote configu-
i Operation of integrated information sys- ration.
tems and communications equipment in The following functions can be accessed:
the vehicle: you must observe the legal
Rrequest the current condition of charge of the
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving. high-voltage battery
Rprogram the departure time (Y page 249)
You can call up remote query and remote con-
Rset or activate the "Pre-entry climate control
figuration functions for your vehicle using online
access to the vehicle. This is possible from an at departure time" function (see the Digital
Internet-enabled computer, as well as many Operator's Manual)
modern smartphones. Information on additional functions and operat-
Please call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- ing instructions can be found within the online
tance Center (USA) at the hotline number access to the vehicle.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) to
obtain the relevant Internet address. Connecting the vehicle to the Internet
Online access to the vehicle is restricted to the i This function is not available in all countries
contractual periods of mbrace. Activated and requires activated access to the mbrace
access to the mbrace emergency call system is emergency call system.
required for use.
In order to be able to use online access to the You can use the online access to the vehicle if
vehicle, you must agree to the local terms of the vehicle has a connection to the Internet via a
use. mobile phone network. The necessary data is
transmitted by radio. The vehicle automatically
Further information on supported devices, avail- recognizes whether a connection to the Internet
able languages and contractual periods can be is possible or not. No presets are necessary.
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. i Restrictions in reception are possible if the
In order to be able to call up online access to the vehicle is in an underground car park, for
vehicle, the vehicle must be connected to the example. Restrictions may also occur in areas
Internet (Y page 176). with poor mobile network coverage.
Notes on data protection

Remember that online access to the vehicle
offers access to your data.
i Prevent unauthorized persons from
accessing this data.
Parking 177
Parking Switching off the engine

Important safety notes Important safety notes
G WARNING G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or The automatic transmission switches to neu-
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with tral position N when you switch off the engine.
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
Driving and parking

gas flow. There is a risk of fire. accident.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- After switching off the engine, always switch
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to cle from rolling away by applying the parking
park on dry grassland or harvested grain brake.
fields.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- X Apply the electric parking brake.
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: X Shift the transmission to position P.
X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to
Rrelease the parking brake. position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the The immobilizer is activated.
parking position P. X With the Start/Stop button: press the
Rstart the engine. Start/Stop button (Y page 146).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- the instrument cluster go out.
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
When the driver's door is closed, this corre-
an accident and injury. sponds to SmartKey position 1. When the
When leaving the vehicle, always take the driver's door is open, this corresponds to
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never SmartKey position 0: "SmartKey removed".
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-
! Always secure the vehicle correctly against sion shifts to N automatically.
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv- With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
etrain could be damaged. er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic
rolling away unintentionally: transmission shifts to P automatically.
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
Rthe transmission must be in position P and the the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
SmartKey must be removed from the ignition the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-
lock. ically.
Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the If you want the automatic transmission to
curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle
Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the
cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing
system:
front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
example, on uphill or downhill gradients. X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-
rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for tion lock.
example, on uphill or downhill gradients. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
Z
178 Parking
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it switched off. The sounds that can be heard while
depressed. this is occurring are normal.
X Release the brake pedal. Applying or releasing manually
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in an emergency
Driving and parking
while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and

holding the Start/Stop button for three sec-
onds. This function operates independently of
the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off
function.
Electric parking brake

X To apply: push handle :.
General notes When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
G WARNING only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- ment cluster.
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: The electric parking brake can also be applied
when the SmartKey is removed.
X To release: pull handle :.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
parking position P. only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
Rstart the engine. goes out.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- The electric parking brake can only be released:
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the
an accident and injury. ignition lock (Y page 146) or
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Rif the ignition was switched on using the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Start/Stop button
Applying automatically
The function of the electric parking brake is The electric parking brake is automatically
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- applied when the transmission is in position P
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in and:
the system, it may not be possible to apply the
released parking brake. Rthe engine is switched off or
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling driver's door is opened.
away. To prevent the electric parking brake from being
X Shift the automatic transmission to position automatically applied, pull handle :.
P.
It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
The electric parking brake performs a function
test at regular intervals while the engine is
Driving tips 179
The electric parking brake is also engaged auto- Emergency braking

matically if:
The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-
RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a
gency by using the electric parking brake.
standstill or
X While driving, push handle : of the electric
Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
parking brake (Y page 178).
tionary The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle handle : of the electric parking brake
stationary depressed. The longer electric parking brake
Driving and parking

In addition, at least one of the following condi- handle : is depressed, the greater the brak-
tions must be fulfilled: ing force.
Rthe engine is switched off During braking:
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the Ra warning tone sounds
driver's door is opened Rthe Please Release Parking Brake mes-
Rthere is a system malfunction sage appears
Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) flashes
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
out. still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function. Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
Releasing automatically four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto- exhaustive discharging.
matically released if all of the following condi- If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
tions are met: weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
Rthe engine is running. result of lack of use.
Rthe transmission is in position D or R. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
Rthe seat belt has been fastened. advice.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. i You can obtain information about trickle
If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid chargers from a qualified specialist work-
must be closed. shop.
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: observe the impor-
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically tant safety notes for the high-voltage battery
release the electric parking brake: (Y page 349).
Rthe driver's door is closed.
Ryou have shifted out of transmission position
P or you have previously driven faster than Driving tips
2 mph (3 km/h).
Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator General driving tips
pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking
brake will be released and the vehicle will start Important safety notes
to move.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
Z
180 Driving tips
for example, the power steering and the brake Drinking and driving
boosting effect. You will require considerably
G WARNING
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
G WARNING
ment.
Driving and parking
If you operate mobile communication equip-

The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
take drugs and drive.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
is stationary.
ing drugs.
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro- Emission control
hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while
driving a vehicle. G WARNING
If you make a call while driving, always use Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
before operating the telephone. is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a out sufficient ventilation.
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
ond. Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
Drive sensibly save fuel fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
Observe the following tips to save fuel: they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
X The tires should always be inflated to the rec- manufacturer's specifications. Always have
ommended tire pressure. work on the engine carried out at a qualified
X Remove unnecessary loads.
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. must be carried out at a qualified specialist
X Have all maintenance work carried out as workshop.
indicated by the service intervals in the Main- The engine settings must not be changed under
tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis- any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
play. service work must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in Benz service requirements. Details can be found
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter- in the Maintenance Booklet.
rain.
ECO display
The ECO display shows you how economical
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
in achieving the most economical driving style
Driving tips 181
for the selected settings and prevailing condi- The ECO display consists of three sections, with
tions. Your driving style can significantly influ- an inner and outer area. The sections corre-
ence the vehicle's consumption. spond to the following three categories:
: Acceleration (evaluation of all accel-
eration processes):
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: moderate
acceleration, especially at higher
Driving and parking

speeds
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
ation
; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-
tion processes):
: Acceleration
; Coasting Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
= Constant area lights up green: anticipatory
driving, keeping your distance and
? Additional range achieved early release of the accelerator.
Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and The vehicle can coast without use
represents the additional range achieved since of the brakes.
the beginning of the journey as a result of an Rthe outer area empties and the
adapted driving style. inner area is gray: frequent heavy
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve braking
range, the Reserve Fuel display message is
shown instead of range ? in the multifunction = Constant (continuous evaluation
display. The 8 warning lamp in the instru- over the entire journey):
ment cluster also lights up (Y page 293). Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: constant
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and deceleration
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed
The three inner areas display the current driving

style and light up green as a result of a particu-
larly economical driving style. Depending on the
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. The ECO display border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
consumption. The additionally achieved range
displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
Z
182 Driving tips
In addition to driving style, the actual consump- When you take advantage of the engine brak-
tion is affected by other factors, such as: ing effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some
Rload time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This
could cause damage to the drive train. This
Rtire pressure
type of damage is not covered by the
Rcold start Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Rchoice of route
Relectrical consumers switched on Heavy and light loads
These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
Driving and parking
play. G WARNING
An economical driving style specially requires If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving at moderate engine speeds. driving, the braking system can overheat. This
Achieving a higher value in the categories increases the stopping distance and can even
"Acceleration" and "Constant": cause the braking system to fail. There is a
Robserve the gearshift recommendations. risk of an accident.
Rdrive in drive program E. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
highway, only the outer area for "constant" will pedal at the same time.
change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving style ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
from the start of the journey to its completion. results in excessive and premature wear to
Therefore, there are more marked changes in the brake pads.
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon-
ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
marked changes, perform a manual rest load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
(Y page 241). on for a short while. This allows the airflow to
cool the brakes more quickly.
For further information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 240).
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
Braking without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
Important safety notes time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
G WARNING You have to depress the brake pedal more
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
an attempt to increase the engine's braking vehicle in front.
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
There is an increased danger of skidding and washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
accidents. the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- and protecting them against corrosion.
ing on a slippery road surface.
Limited braking performance on salt-
Downhill gradients treated roads
! On long and steep gradients, you must If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early due may form on the brake discs and brake
to a lower gear. This allows you to take pads. This can result in a significantly longer
advantage of the engine braking effect and braking distance.
helps avoid overheating and excessive wear
of the brakes.
Driving tips 183
RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
brakes occasionally while paying attention to mends only installing the following brake disks
the traffic conditions. and brake pads/linings:
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the Rbrake disks that have been approved by
beginning and end of a journey. Mercedes-Benz
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved
ahead. by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent
standard of quality
Servicing the brakes
Driving and parking

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can
compromise the safety of your vehicle.
! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/
Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in linings on an axle at the same time. Always
the instrument cluster and install new brake pads/linings when replacing
Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is brake disks.
running The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake
Observe additional warning messages in the disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and
multifunction display. threaded connection is matched.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to The use of brake disks other than those
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the
Have the brake system checked immediately. track width and is subject to approval, if appli-
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to cable.
arrange this. Shock-type loads when handling the brake
disks, such as when changing wheels, can lead
! A function or performance test should only to a reduction in comfort when driving with light-
be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If weight brake disks. Avoid shock-type loads on
you wish to operate the vehicle on such a the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the
dynamometer, please consult a qualified spe- brake plate.
cialist workshop in advance. You could oth- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
erwise damage the drive train or the brake brake fluid that has been specially approved for
system. your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-
! The ESP system operates automatically. sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
The engine and the ignition must therefore be fluid which has not been approved for
switched off (the SmartKey must be in posi- Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/ equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if the operating safety.
electric parking brake is tested on a brake
dynamometer. High-performance and ceramic brakes
Braking triggered automatically by ESP may (Mercedes AMG vehicles)
cause severe damage to the brake system.
The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy
All checks and maintenance work on the brake loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This
system must be carried out at a qualified spe- will depend on:
cialist workshop.
RSpeed
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
RBraking force
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
REnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the functional- ture and humidity
ity of your brakes at regular intervals. The wear of individual components of the brake
Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 68) system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake
and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 69). discs, depends on the individual driving style
and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-
age that will be valid under all circumstances. An
Z
184 Driving tips
aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. Winter driving

You can obtain more information on this from a
qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING
New and replaced brake pads and discs only If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
reach their optimum braking effect after several
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and There is an increased danger of skidding and
braking accordingly during this break-in period. accidents.
Driving and parking
Excessive heavy braking results in correspond- Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear ing on a slippery road surface.
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note
any brake status messages in the multifunction
display. Especially for high performance driving, G DANGER
it is important to maintain and have the brake If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
system checked regularly. ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
Driving on wet roads becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
Hydroplaning
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
planing occurring, even if:
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
Ryou drive at low speeds.
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
facing into the wind.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
you must drive in the following manner: specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Rlower your speed. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-
Ravoid ruts. faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
Ravoid sudden steering movements.
braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con-
trol or DISTRONIC PLUS.
Rbrake carefully.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
Driving on flooded roads
X Shift the transmission to position N.
! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front The outside temperature indicator is not
or in the opposite direction create waves. This designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
may cause the maximum permissible water is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
depth to be exceeded. Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
Failure to observe these notes may result in played after a short delay.
damage to the engine, electrical systems and Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
transmission. point do not guarantee that the road surface is
If you have to drive on stretches of road on which free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
water has collected, please bear in mind that: wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could
Rin the case of standing water, the water level
skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always
may be no higher than the lower edge of the adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to
vehicle body suit the prevailing weather conditions.
Ryou should drive no faster than at a walking
You should pay special attention to road condi-
pace tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Driving systems 185
For more information on driving with snow vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
chains, see (Y page 363). good time and for staying in your lane.
For more information on driving with summer Do not use cruise control:
tires, see (Y page 362). Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec- allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
tion (Y page 362). heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
Driving systems
Driving and parking

traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive heavy rain or snow
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno- If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
vative driver assistance and safety systems driver of the speed stored.
which enhance comfort and support the driver in
critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi- i The speed indicated in the speedometer
nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile- may differ slightly from the speed stored.
stone on the path towards autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all Cruise control lever
elements of active and passive safety in one well
thought out system for the safety of the vehi-
cle occupants and that of other road users.
Further information on driving safety systems
(Y page 67).
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower : Activates or increases speed
gear in good time on long and steep downhill ; Activates or reduces speed
gradients. This is especially important if the = Deactivates cruise control
vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use ? Activates at the current speed/last stored
of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves speed
the load on the brake system and prevents the When you activate cruise control, the stored
brakes from overheating and wearing too speed is shown in the multifunction display for
quickly. five seconds. In addition, the symbol
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con- appears in the multifunction display.
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady Speedometer with segments: when cruise
speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
control is activated, the segments from the
road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
stored speed to the maximum permitted speed
light up.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con- Storing and maintaining the current
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident speed
nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
cannot take into account the road, traffic and You can store the current speed if you are driv-
weather conditions. Cruise control is only an ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
Z
186 Driving systems
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or the pressure point.
down ;. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto- increased or reduced.
matically maintains the stored speed. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The the pressure point.
Driving and parking
stored speed is resumed when the gradient Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
evens out. Cruise control maintains the up : or down ; the last speed stored is
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto- increased or reduced.
matically applying the brakes. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-
Storing the current speed or calling up ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the
the last stored speed vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after
you have finished overtaking.
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower Deactivating cruise control
than the current speed, the vehicle deceler- There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-
ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the trol:
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards
is a risk of an accident. =.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- or
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you X Brake.
do not know the stored speed, store the Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
desired speed again.
Ryou engage the electric parking brake
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
you ?. RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Ryou shift the transmission to position N while
The first time cruise control is activated, it driving
stores the current speed or regulates the If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con
speed. trol Off message in the multifunction display
for approximately five seconds.
Setting a speed i When you switch off the engine, the last
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment speed stored is cleared.
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a DISTRONIC PLUS
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
General notes
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-
matically helps you maintain the distance to the
vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected
with the aid of the radar sensor system.
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that
the set speed is not exceeded.
Driving systems 187
Change into a lower gear in good time on long Important safety notes
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you G WARNING
will make use of the braking effect of the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
This relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and wear- Rpeople or animals
ing too quickly. Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of ped or parked vehicles
a collision, you will be warned visually and
Driving and parking

Roncoming and crossing traffic
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a
collision without your intervention. An intermit- As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
tent warning tone will then sound and the dis- warnings nor intervene in such situations.
tance warning lamp will light up in the instru- There is a risk of an accident.
ment cluster. Brake immediately in order to
increase the distance to the vehicle in front or Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. uation and be ready to brake.
DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). G WARNING
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-
roads with steep gradients. tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it uations.
can resemble the radar detectors of the respon-
sible authorities. You can refer to the relevant In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
are asked about this. brake the vehicle
i USA only: This device has been approved by Rneither give a warning nor intervene
the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper- There is a risk of an accident.
ing, or altering of the device will void any war- Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do brake, in particular when warned to do so by
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
DISTRONIC PLUS.
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the G WARNING
equipment. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC
subject to the following two conditions: PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is
1. This device may not cause harmful inter- a risk of an accident.
ference, and In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
2. This device must accept any interference try to take evasive action.
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in
will void any warranties, and is not permitted. certain situations.
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
approved way. DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
Any unauthorized modification to this device the following or other similar situations:
could void the user's authority to operate the Rwhen towing the vehicle
equipment.
Rin the car wash
Z
188 Driving systems
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC Cruise control lever
PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS
cannot take into account the road, traffic and
weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Driving and parking
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose : To activate or increase speed
traction and the vehicle could then skid ; To activate or reduce speed
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
heavy rain or snow
? To activate at the current speed/last stored
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi- speed
cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi- A To set the specified minimum distance
cles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if: Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else Activation conditions
covering the sensors
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
lowing conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
two minutes after pulling away before
ple, in parking garages DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly
RESP must be active, but not intervening.
accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.
RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.
This speed may:
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or
an exit lane Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-

shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun- fastened.
tries) Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must
Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-
be closed.
cles driving on the right (right-hand drive Switching on
countries)
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new you ?, up : or down ;.
driver of the speed stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Suspended mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display. The
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in
Driving systems 189
front will then not be maintained. You will be If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS
driving at the speed you determine by the operates in the same way as cruise control.
position of the accelerator pedal. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In
stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is this way, the distance you have selected is main-
20 mph (30 km/h). tained.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
you ?, up : or down ;. vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to
Driving and parking

the speed you have stored.
Activating at the current speed/last Selecting the drive program
stored speed
DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style
G WARNING when you have selected the S or S+ driving pro-
If you call up the stored speed and it differs gram (Y page 159). Acceleration behind the
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- vehicle in front or to the set speed is then notice-
ably more dynamic. If you have selected the C or
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or gently. This setting is recommended in stop-
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- and-start traffic.
dent.
Changing lanes
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when:
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again. Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of
you ?. collision
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
is activated, the current speed is stored. Oth- changing lanes takes too long or if the distance
erwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
previously stored value. becomes too small.
i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi-
cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-
Pulling away and driving cles.
X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC
PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. Stopping
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards G WARNING
you ?. When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
or only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
X Accelerate briefly.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is the voltage supply.
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
the set speed. with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
brakes automatically.
Z
190 Driving systems
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
partment, the battery or the fuses have the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
been tampered with. up : or down ; the last speed stored is
Rthe battery is disconnected. increased or reduced.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
e.g. by a vehicle occupant. ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
There is a risk of an accident. the pressure point.
Driving and parking
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
against rolling away. increased or reduced.
For further information on deactivating i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC

DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191). PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished overtak-
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in ing.
front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is
stationary.
Setting a specified minimum distance
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
tionary and you do not need to depress the You can set the specified minimum distance for
brake. DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this func-
i After a time, the electric parking brake tion, you can set the minimum distance that
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,
brake.
dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this
i Depending on the specified minimum dis- distance in the multifunction display
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at (Y page 191).
a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
front. The specified minimum distance is set
i Make sure that you maintain the minimum
distance to the vehicle in front as required by
using the control on the cruise control lever.
law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans- if necessary.
mission is shifted automatically to position P if:
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may X To increase: turn control ; in direction =.
also shift into position P automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
Setting a speed in front.
X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
in front.
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
Driving systems 191
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru- Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-
ment cluster ted
Displays in the speedometer
Driving and parking

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears
when the cruise control lever is actuated)
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, ; Vehicle in front, if detected
segments between the speed of the vehicle in = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
front : and stored speed ; light up. in front; adjustable
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus ? Own vehicle
package: the segments likewise light up if a In the Assistance menu (Y page 247) of the on-
vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane. board computer, you can select the assistance
i For design reasons, the speed displayed in graphics display.
the speedometer may differ slightly from the X Select the Assistance Graphic function
speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. using the on-board computer (Y page 246).
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti- You will see the stored speed for about five sec-
onds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
vated
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
: Vehicle in front, if detected

; Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front There are several ways to deactivate
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle DISTRONIC PLUS:
in front; adjustable X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
? Own vehicle wards :.
In the Assistance menu (Y page 247) of the on- or
board computer, you can select the assistance X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
graphics display.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will
X Select the Assistance Graphic function see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the
using the on-board computer (Y page 246).
Z
192 Driving systems
multifunction display for approximately five sec- obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
onds. PLUS will not brake for these.
RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS may mis-
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine. takenly detect vehicles that are crossing your
lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you lights with crossing traffic, for example, could
depress the accelerator pedal. cause your vehicle to pull away unintention-
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated ally.
if: In such situations, brake if necessary.
Driving and parking
DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the
vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-
tric parking brake DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist
RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP and Stop&Go Pilot
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
General notes
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the rear doors is open
Rthe vehicle is skidding
Ryou activate Active Parking Assist
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear
a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC
PLUS Off message in the multifunction display
for approximately five seconds.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Pay particular attention in the following traffic Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in
situations: the center of the driving lane by means of mod-
erate steering interventions at speeds of
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).
ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles
when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
brake unexpectedly or late. means of multifunction camera :, at the top of
the windshield.
RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUS
may not detect vehicles which are not driving In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),
in the middle of their lane. The distance to the Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front,
vehicle in front will be too short. taking into account lane markings, e.g. when
following vehicles in a traffic jam.
ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONIC
PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),
yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings
short. (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in
front if clear lane markings are not present.
RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not
detect the vehicle in front on the edge of the Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-
road because of its narrow width. The dis- vide any support if these conditions do not exist.
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short. DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the
RObstacles and stationary vehicles: function to be available.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta- Important safety notes
cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC
PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
Driving systems 193
override the laws of physics. It cannot take The system is switched to passive and no longer
account of road, weather and traffic conditions. assists you by performing steering interventions
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and if:
Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible Ryou actively change lane
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
Ryou switch on the turn signal
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
ing in your lane. Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and not steer for a prolonged period of time
Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic i Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti-
Driving and parking

conditions. If you are following a vehicle which is vated again automatically after a lane change
driving towards the edge of the road, your vehi- is completed.
cle could come into contact with the curb or
other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-
other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly vide any support:
next to your vehicle. Ron very sharp corners
Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
projecting out into the lane are not detected. has been detected and displayed
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after Pay attention also to the important safety notes
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 187).
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the The steering interventions are carried out with a
opposite direction. limited steering moment. The system requires
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and the driver to keep his hands on the steering
Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your wheel and to steer himself.
vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer period of time, the system will first alert you with
the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
leave the lane. appears in the multifunction display. If you have
The system may be impaired or may not function still not started to steer and have not taken hold
if: of the steering wheel after five seconds at the
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist
fog or spray and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.
sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
is wet) Pilot
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings
for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction
work
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
ted
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge X Press button ;.
Rthe road is narrow and winding Indicator lamp : lights up. The DTR+:
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road Steering Assist. On message appears in
Z
194 Driving systems
the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Important safety notes

Stop&Go Pilot are activated.
G WARNING
Information in the multifunction display When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
Driving and parking
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake

pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected
If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa- There is a risk of an accident.
ted but is not ready for a steering intervention,
steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
system provides you with support by means of the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
steering interventions, symbol : is shown in against rolling away.
green.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is
Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in
Pilot certain situations.
X Press button ;. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Indicator lamp : goes out. The DTR+: DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
Steering Assist. Off message appears in the following or other similar situations:
the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Rwhen towing the vehicle
Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated.
Rin the car wash
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not
available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 195).
deactivated automatically.
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if all of the
HOLD function following conditions are fulfilled:
General notes Rthe vehicle is stationary.
Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
following situations: function.
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes fastened.
Rwhen waiting in traffic Rthe electric parking brake is released.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.
having to depress the brake pedal. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Driving systems 195
Activating the HOLD function The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission
may be shifted into position P automatically.
Driving and parking

RACE START
X Make sure that the activation conditions are i RACE START must not be used on normal
met. roads. RACE START must only be activated
and used on dedicated road circuits, outside
X Depress the brake pedal.
of public road use.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction display. i RACE START is only available in
The HOLD function is activated. You can MercedesAMG vehicles.
release the brake pedal. RACE START enables optimal acceleration from
a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip
i If depressing the brake pedal the first time road surface is required, along with the tires and
does not activate the HOLD function, wait vehicle being in proper operating condition.
briefly and then try again.
G WARNING
Deactivating the HOLD function If you use RACE START, individual tires may
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically start to spin and the vehicle could skid.
if: Depending on the selected ESP mode, there
Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in is an increased risk of skidding and having an
position D or R. accident. Make sure that no persons, animals
Rthe transmission is in position P. or obstacles are within range of the vehicle.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-
tain amount of pressure until : disappears i Observe the safety notes on driving safety
from the multifunction display. systems (Y page 68).
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-
Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-
ing brake. tion on ESP (Y page 73).
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
Conditions for activation
i After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service You can activate RACE START if:
brake. Rthe doors are closed.
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans- Rthe engine is running and it has reached an
mission is shifted automatically to position P if: operating temperature of approximately
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the 160 (71 ). This is the case when the oil
driver's door is open. temperature gauge in the multifunction dis-
play is shown in white.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
Rthe drive program S, S+ or Race is selected.
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function. (Y page 154)
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.
Z
196 Driving systems
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is RACE START Canceled message appears in
depressed (left foot). the multifunction display.
Rthe transmission is in position D. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
Activating RACE START The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation.
i When manual mode (Y page 161) is active, The RACE START Active message appears in
the transmission automatically shifts up to the multifunction display.
RACE START in the drive program. This func-
Driving and parking
tion supports maximum acceleration with RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
RACE START. After going through an acceler- reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-
ating process once from a stationary position, ada: 50 km/h).
this function is automatically deactivated. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
release the accelerator pedal during RACE
X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
START or if any of the activation conditions are
and keep it depressed. no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos
X Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle shift- sible See Operator's Manual or RACE
ers (Y page 161). START Canceled message appears in the mul-
The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP tifunction display.
Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in
the multifunction display. i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a
X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters short period of time, it is only available again
(Y page 161). after the vehicle has been driven a certain
distance.
i If the activation conditions are no longer ful-
filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE
START Canceled message appears in the
multifunction display. AIRMATIC
X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle General notes
shifter (Y page 161).
or AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable
damping for improved driving comfort. All-round
X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-
level control ensures the best possible suspen-
dle shifter (Y page 161).
sion and constant ground clearance, even with a
The RACE START Available Depress gas
laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is
pedal. message appears in the multifunction lowered automatically to improve driving safety
display. and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also
i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal the option to manually adjust the vehicle level.
fully within two seconds, RACE START is can- AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level control
celed. The RACE START Not Possible See and the Adaptive Damping System ADS.
Operator's Manual message appears in the
multifunction display. Important safety notes
X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The engine speed rises to approximately G WARNING
3,500 rpm. When the vehicle is being lowered, people
The RACE START Release brake to start could become trapped if their limbs are
message appears in the multifunction display.
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
i If you do not release the brake pedal within underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
five seconds, RACE START is canceled. The
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
Driving systems 197
i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not Suspension settings

lowered.
General notes
Vehicle level The Adaptive Damping System automatically
controls the calibration of the dampers.
Setting the raised vehicle level The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Driving and parking

Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-
fort
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Sports tuning
In the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive programs,
the firmer suspension setting ensures even bet-
ter contact with the road. Select this mode when
It is possible to choose between the "Normal" employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding
and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed of country roads.
50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" setting X The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) com-
for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving
pared to the normal level.
with snow chains or on particularly poor road
surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if
Comfort tuning
you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Start the engine.
In the "Economy" and "Comfort" drive programs,
the driving characteristics of your vehicle are
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if
X Press button :. you favor a more comfortable driving style.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is Select comfort mode also when driving fast on
raised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of high-
normal level. way.
X The vehicle is raised to the normal level.
The Vehicle Rising message appears in the
multifunction display. When driving at speeds above 80 mph
i The message disappears after ten seconds, (125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low-
irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, ered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the E and C drive pro-
the vehicle is raised further. grams. When driving at speeds below 50 mph
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: (80 km/h) the vehicle is raised again.
Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h).
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h). tem
The "Raised level" remains active when you are
not driving within these speed ranges. General notes
Setting the normal vehicle level The electronically controlled damping system
X Start the engine. works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X Press button :.
Z
198 Driving systems
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel Sport + mode

and depends on:
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps with the road. Select this mode only when driv-
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + or ing on race circuits.
Comfort If indicator lamps ; and = are off:
The suspension setting is adjusted using the X Press button : twice.
corresponding button in the center console. Indicator lamps ; and = light up. You have
Driving and parking
i The mode can also be set using the selected Sport + mode.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 154). The AMG Suspension System SPORT + mes-
This is only possible if: sage appears in the multifunction display .
Rusing the AMG adaptive sport suspension If indicator lamp = lights up:
system button on the center console, and X Press button : once.
Rusing the DYNAMIC SELECT switch, the Second indicator lamp ; lights up. You have
same mode is selected for the chassis. This selected Sport + mode.
is the case, for example, when both are set The AMG Suspension System SPORT + mes-
to Comfort mode. sage appears in the multifunction display .
Each time you start the engine with the ignition
key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is Comfort mode
the engine, see (Y page 148). In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of
your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this
Sport mode mode if you favor a more comfortable driving
style, but also when driving fast on straight
roads, e.g. highways.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamps ; and = go out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-
nently driven. Together with ESP, it improves
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive
Sport mode ensures even better contact with wheel spins due to insufficient grip.
the road. Select this mode when employing a
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
roads. neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
X Press button :. account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
Sport mode. the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes- speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
sage appears in the multifunction display . your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
RAccelerate less when driving.
Driving systems 199
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
This may damage the transfer case. Damage 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes- speeds.
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must
remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Range of the sensors
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-
cle with all wheels in full contact with the General notes
ground.
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum sideration that are:
Driving and parking

effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains mals or objects.
if necessary.
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.
PARKTRONIC
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around
your vehicle using six sensors in the front
bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.
PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the
distance between your vehicle and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
ment for your attention to your immediate sur-
roundings. You are always responsible for safe : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking (example)
space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling
out of a parking space, make sure that there are
no persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC
does not detect such objects when they are in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
could damage the vehicle or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck
or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC
to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
Z
200 Driving systems
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. area is located on the headliner in the rear com-
They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean partment.
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch The warning display for each side of the vehicle
or damage them (Y page 339). is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Front sensors PARKTRONIC is operational if operational read-
iness indicator = lights up.
Center Approx. 40 in (approx. The selected transmission position and the
100 cm) direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the
Driving and parking
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.

60 cm) engine is running.
Transmission posi- Warning display
Rear sensors tion
Center Approx. 48 in (approx. D Front area activated

120 cm) R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. rolling backwards activated
80 cm) P No areas activated
Minimum distance One or more segments light up as the vehicle

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
cle's distance from the obstacle.
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) From the:
Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel- mittent warning tone for approximately two
evant warning displays light up and a warning seconds.
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min- Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
imum, the distance may no longer be shown. warning tone for approximately two seconds.
This indicates that you have now reached the
Warning displays minimum distance.
: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is in the instru-
ment cluster. The warning display for the rear
Driving systems 201
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking

d Switch on the dashboard
e Switch in the center console
: Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC
; Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
deactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock.
Z
202 Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments in PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
the PARKTRONIC warn- X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-
ing displays are lit. You cialist workshop.
also hear a warning tone
for approximately two
Driving and parking
seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
the PARKTRONIC warn- X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 339).
ing displays are lit.
X Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist result in a collision with another road user.

General notes
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-
with ultrasound. It measures the road on both ing Assist parking procedure.
sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates
a suitable parking space. Active steering inter- ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-
vention and brake application can assist you cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp
during parking and when exiting a parking angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
space. You may also use PARKTRONIC wheels or tires.
(Y page 199).
Active Parking Assist may also display spaces
not suitable for parking, e.g.:
Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
Ron unsuitable surfaces
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a Parking tips:
parking space. Make sure that no persons, ani- ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking
mals or objects are in the maneuvering range. space as possible.
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park- RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown
ing Assist is also unavailable. might be identified or measured incorrectly.
G WARNING RParking spaces that are partially occupied by
trailer drawbars might not be identified as
While parking or pulling out of a parking such or be measured incorrectly.
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could space being measured inaccurately.
Driving systems 203
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
(Y page 200) warning messages during the ing in spaces at right angles to the direction of
parking procedure. travel if:
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist to one another
will then be canceled. Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes obstacle such as a low curb
from your vehicle, you should not use Active Ryou park forwards
Parking Assist.
Driving and parking

Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
ing in spaces that are parallel or at right angles
chains are installed. to the direction of travel if:
RMake sure that the tire pressures are always
Rthe parking space is on a curb
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle. Rthe system reads the parking space as being
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
ing blocks
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
travel ver into
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
on the pavement
Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the height range of Active
Parking Assist will not be detected when the
parking space is measured. These are not taken
into account when the parking procedure is cal-
culated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or
loading ramps of goods vehicles.
G WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range:
: Detected parking space on the left
RActive Park Assist may steer too early ; Parking symbol
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these = Detected parking space on the right
objects
Active Parking Assist is switched on automati-
You may cause a collision as a result. There is cally when driving forwards. The system is
a risk of an accident. operational at speeds of up to approximately
If objects are located above the detection 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-
tem independently locates and measures park-
range, stop and deactivate Active Parking ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Assist.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
For further information on the detection range
(Y page 199). Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Z
204 Driving systems
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi- Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
cle during the parking process. You are respon-
Rthat are at right angles to the direction of sible for braking in good time.
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
your vehicle bol shows the desired parking space in the
i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot instrument cluster.
measure the size of a parking space if it is at X Shift the transmission to position R.
Driving and parking
right angles to the direction of travel. You will The Start Park Assist?Yes: OKNo:%
need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into message appears in the multifunction display.
the parking space. X To cancel the procedure: press the %
When driving at speeds below 19 mph button on the multifunction steering wheel or
(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a pull away.
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When or
a parking space has been detected, an arrow X To park using Active Parking Assist: press
towards the right or the left also appears. By the a button on the multifunction steering
default, Active Parking Assist only displays park- wheel.
ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking The Park Assist Active Accelerate
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as and Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is sage appears in the multifunction display.
activated. When parking on the driver's side,
this must remain switched on until you acknowl- X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press- X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
ing the a button on the multifunction steer- times. When backing up, drive at a speed
ing wheel. The system automatically determines below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
whether the parking space is parallel or at right erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.
angles to the direction of travel. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
A parking space is displayed while you are driv- standstill when the vehicle approaches the
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft rear border of the parking space.
(15 m) away from it. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
Parking The Park Assist Active Select D Observe
Surroundingsmessage appears in the multi-
G WARNING function display.
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being X Shift the transmission to position D while the
braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll vehicle is stationary.
away if: Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in The Park Assist Active Accelerate
the voltage supply. and Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- sage appears in the multifunction display.
partment, the battery or the fuses have i You will achieve the best results by waiting
been tampered with. for the steering procedure to complete before
Rthe battery is disconnected.
pulling away.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
There is a risk of an accident. standstill when the vehicle approaches the
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it front border of the parking space.
against rolling away. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
Driving systems 205
The Park Assist Active Select R Observe vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
Surroundingsmessage appears in the multi- Active Parking Assist.
function display.
i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the
the Park Assist Switched Off message vehicle exits the parking space. You are
appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle responsible for braking in good time.
is now parked.
X Start the engine.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal. The braking X Release the electric parking brake.
Driving and parking

effect is canceled when you depress the accel- X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
erator pedal. are pulling away.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
with steering interventions and brake applica- The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%
tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished, message appears in the multifunction display.
you must steer and brake again yourself. X To cancel the procedure: press the %
PARKTRONIC is still available. button on the multifunction steering wheel or
Parking tips: pull away.
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park- or
ing space after parking is dependent on vari- X To exit a parking space using Active Park-
ous factors. These include the position and ing Assist: press the a button on the mul-
shape of the vehicles parked in front and tifunction steering wheel.
behind it and the conditions of the location. It The Park Assist Active Accelerate
may be the case that Active Parking Assist and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
guides you too far into a parking space, or not sage appears in the multifunction display.
far enough into it. In some cases, it may also X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,
X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
you should cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist. not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-
RYou can also select preselect transmission
ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist
position D. The vehicle redirects and does not will be canceled.
drive as far into the parking space. Should the
X Depending on the message or as required,
transmission change take place too early, the
parking procedure will be canceled. A sensi- shift the transmission to position D or R.
ble parking position can no longer be ach- Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
ieved from this position. the other direction. The Park Assist
Active Accelerate and Brake Observe
Surroundings message appears in the mul-
Exiting a parking space tifunction display.
In order that Active Parking Assist can support i You will achieve the best results by waiting
you when you exit the parking space: for the steering procedure to complete before
Rthe border of the parking space must be high
pulling away.
enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too If you back up after activation, the steering
small, for example. wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
Rthe border of the parking space must not be
tion.
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by
not exceed an angle of 45 to the starting the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several
position as it is maneuvering into the parking times if necessary.
space. Once you have exited the parking space com-
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
(1.0 m) must be available. straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with Park Assist Switched Off message appears
exiting a parking space if you have parked the in the multifunction display. You will then have
to steer and merge into traffic on your own.
Z
206 Driving systems
PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over Rear view camera
the steering, before the vehicle has exited the
parking space completely. This is useful, for General notes
example when you recognize that it is already
possible to pull out of the parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist

X Stop the movement of the multifunction
Driving and parking
steering wheel or steer yourself.

Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once.
The Park Assist Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display.
or
X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 201).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park-
ing Assist is immediately canceled. The Park Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
Assist Canceled message appears in the maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
multifunction display. vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically tem.
if: The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged
Rtransmission position P is selected i The text shown in the multimedia system
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-
depends on the language setting. The follow-
ger possible ing are examples of rear view camera displays
in the multimedia system.
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
Ra wheel spins, ESP intervenes or fails. The
warning lamp lights up in the instrument
cluster The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis- replacement for your attention to your immedi-
appears and the multifunction display shows the ate surroundings. You are always responsible
Park Assist Canceled message. for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneu-
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you vering or parking, make sure that there are no
must steer and brake again yourself. persons, animals or objects in the area in which
you are maneuvering.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the Under the following circumstances, the rear
accelerator again. view camera will not function, or will function in
a limited manner:
Rif the trunk lid is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
ter
Driving systems 207
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
Observe the notes on cleaning be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
(Y page 339) Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
The field of vision and other functions of the rear Rthe rear section of an HGV
view camera may be restricted due to additional Ra slanted post
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Driving and parking

license plate holder, bicycle rack). Approach objects no further than the bottom-
i The rear view camera is protected from rain- most guideline.
drops and dust by means of a flap. When the
rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.
The flap closes again when:
Ryou have finished the maneuvering process
Ryou switch off the engine
Ryou open the trunk
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 339).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
been deactivated.
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Activating/deactivating the rear view
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
camera vehicle
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is ; White guide line without turning the steering
in position 2 in the ignition lock. wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
mirrors (static)
function is selected in the multimedia system = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
(see the separate operating instructions). including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Engage reverse gear.
The rear view camera flap opens. The multi- ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering
media system shows the area behind the vehi- wheel angle (dynamic)
cle with guide lines.
The image from the rear view camera is avail-
able throughout the maneuvering process.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to P or after
driving forwards a short distance.
Multimedia display
The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions: A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
Rvery close to the rear bumper cle
Runder the rear bumper B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
Rin close range above the handle on the trunk
lid
Z
208 Driving systems
C Bumper "Reverse parking" function

D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle Backing up straight into a parking space
The guide lines are shown when the transmis- without turning the steering wheel
sion is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Driving and parking
: White guide line without turning the steering

wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors (static)
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
: Front warning display
including the exterior mirrors, for current
; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement steering wheel angle (dynamic)
operational readiness indicator
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
= Rear warning display imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if PARKTRONIC is cle
operational (Y page 200), an additional opera- ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
tional readiness indicator will appear in 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
COMAND display ;. If the PARKTRONIC warn- X Make sure that the rear view camera is
ing displays are active or light up, warning dis-
switched on (Y page 207).
plays : and = are also active or light up cor-
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
respondingly in the COMAND display.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
Driving systems 209
Reverse perpendicular parking with the

steering wheel at an angle
Driving and parking

: White guide line at current steering wheel
angle
; Parking space marking
: Parking space marking
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width X Turn the steering wheel to the center position
including the exterior mirrors, for current while the vehicle is stationary.
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 207).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the parking
space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-
ing space marking :.
X Keep the steering wheel in that position and
back up carefully.
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
; White guide line without turning the steering
wheel
= End of parking space
X Back up carefully until you have reached the
final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
Z
210 Driving systems
"Wide-angle" function The cameras capture the immediate surround-

ings of the vehicle. The system supports you, for
example when parking or if vision is restricted at
an exit.
You can show images from the 360 camera in
full-screen mode or in six different split-screen
views on the multimedia system. A split-screen
view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This
view is calculated from the data supplied by the
Driving and parking
installed cameras (virtual camera).

The six split-screen views are:
Rtop view and picture from the rear view cam-
era (130 viewing angle)
: Symbol for the wide-angle view function Rtop view and image from the front camera
; Own vehicle (130 viewing angle without displaying the

maximum steering wheel angle)
= PARKTRONIC warning displays
Rtop view and enlarged rear view
You can also use the rear view camera to select Rtop view and enlarged front view
a wide-angle view.
Rtop view and images from the rear-facing side
When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200), cameras (rear wheel view)
a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the
Rtop view and images from the forward-facing
display of the multimedia system. If the
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn- side cameras (front wheel view)
ing displays = light up in the multimedia system When the function is active and you shift the
display in yellow or red respectively. transmission from D or R to N, the guide lines
are hidden in the multimedia system.
Object detection When you change between transmission posi-
tions D and R, you see the previously selected
The rear view camera helps detect moving and front or rear view.
stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also
or other obstacle) is detected, this object is be optically displayed:
marked with a bar. Objects located some dis-
tance from the vehicle away are marked with a Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets
yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very around the vehicle icon in the top view, or
small, the bar is displayed in red. Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
Object detection only works in wide-angle view. around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
To ensure that you can use the function, it must The line thickness and color of the brackets
be switched on in the multimedia system (see show how far the vehicle is from an object.
the separate operating instructions). Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC
is active
Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is
360 camera present in close range of the vehicle
Rred line: an object is present in the immediate
General notes close range of the vehicle
The 360 camera is a system consisting of four
cameras. Important safety notes
The system processes images from the follow- The 360camera is only an aid and may show a
ing cameras: distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-
RRear view camera rectly or not at all. The 360camera is not a
RFront camera substitute for attentive driving.
RTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors You are always responsible for safe maneuver-
ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking,
Driving systems 211
make sure that there are no persons, animals or Activation conditions

objects in the area in which you are maneuver-
ing. The 360 camera image can be displayed if:
You are always responsible for safety, and must Rthe multimedia system is switched on
always pay attention to your surroundings when Rthe 360 Camera function is switched on
parking and maneuvering. This applies to the
areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. i If you are driving faster than at a moderate
You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth- speed and you turn on the 360 camera, a
ers. warning message appears.
Driving and parking

The 360 camera will not function or will func- The warning message disappears if:
tion in a limited manner: Ryou are again driving at a moderate speed
Rif the doors are open The 360 camera is then activated.
Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in Rthe message is confirmed with the %
Rif the trunk lid is open button.
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Switching the 360 camera on and off
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light
using the button
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving
into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid
change in temperature
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered
Rif the vehicle components in which the cam-
eras are installed are damaged. In this event,
have the camera position and setting checked
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use the 360 camera in this case. You
can otherwise injure others or cause damage to
objects or the vehicle. X To switch on: press button :.
The guide lines in the COMAND display show the Depending on whether position D or R is
distances to your vehicle. The distances only engaged, the following is shown:
apply to road level. Ra split screen with top view and the image
The camera in the rear area is protected by from the front camera or
means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360 Ra split screen with top view and the image
camera is activated. Observe the notes on from the rear view camera
cleaning (Y page 339). For technical reasons, X To switch off: press button :.
the flap may remain open briefly after the 360
camera has been deactivated.
Activating the 360 camera using
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
depending on technical conditions, leaving the reverse gear
standard height can result in: The 360 camera images can be automatically
Rinaccuracies in the guide lines displayed by engaging reverse gear.
Rinaccuracies in the display of generated
images (top view)
Z
212 Driving systems
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 Rthe rear section of an HGV
in the ignition lock. Ra slanted post
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear Use the guidelines only for orientation.
function is selected in the multimedia system Approach objects no further than the bottom-
(see the Digital Operator's Manual). most guideline.
X To show the 360 camera image: engage
reverse gear. Top view with picture from the rear view
The multimedia system shows the area camera
behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You
Driving and parking
see the top view of the vehicle and the image

from the rear view camera.
Selecting the split-screen view or full

screen mode
Switching between split screen views:
X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide 5 the controller.
X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.
Switching to full screen mode: : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

X 180 View Turn and press the controller. imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
i The full screen option is only available in the ; Symbol for the split screen setting with top
following views: view and rear view camera image
RTop view with picture from the rear view = Guide line for the maximum steering angle
camera ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering
RTop view with picture from the front camera wheel angle (dynamic)
A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
Multimedia display including the exterior mirrors, for current
The camera system may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
Obstacles are not shown by the system in the
following locations:
Runder the front and rear bumpers
Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Rin close range above the handle on the trunk
lid
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
Rin the transitional areas between the various
cameras in the virtual top view B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
! Objects not at ground level may appear to imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
be further away than they actually are, e.g.: cle
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle D Bumper
Rthe drawbar of a trailer E Red guide line at a distance of approximately
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
sion is in position R.
Driving systems 213
The distance specifications only apply to i This setting can also be selected as an
objects that are at ground level. enlarged front view.
Top view with picture from the front cam- Top view with image from the side cam-
era eras
Driving and parking

: Symbol for the split screen setting with top : Symbol for the top view and forward-facing
view and front camera image side camera setting
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the including the exterior mirrors (right side of
vehicle vehicle)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current including the exterior mirrors (left side of
steering wheel angle (dynamic) vehicle)
? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering
wheel angle (dynamic) i You can also select the side camera setting
for the rear-facing view.
A Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- 180 view
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear

view camera image
; Own vehicle
= PARKTRONIC warning displays
: Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image enlarged i 180 view can also be selected as front
; Red guide line at a distance of approximately view.
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle Select this view when you are driving out of an
This view assists you in estimating the distance exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
to the vehicle behind you. for example.
Z
214 Driving systems
i If you select the % symbol in the display Rif the time has been set incorrectly
and confirm with the controller, the split- Rin active driving situations, such as when you
screen view appears. change lanes or change your speed
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment
Exiting 360 camera display mode is deleted and restarted when continuing the
journey, if:
The 360 camera display is stopped
Ryou switch off the engine
Rwhen you select transmission position P, or Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv-
Driving and parking
Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
The view which was active before the 360 cam- take a break
era was displayed appears in the Audio 20 or
COMAND display. You can also stop the 360 Displaying the attention level
camera display split-screen view by selecting
the % symbol in the display and then con-
firming with the COMAND controller.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the You can have current status information dis-
driver, it suggests taking a break. played in the assistance menu (Y page 247) of
the on-board computer.
Important safety notes X Select the Assistance display for Attention
Assist using the on-board computer
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It (Y page 246).
might not always recognize fatigue or increasing The following information is displayed:
inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them
at all. The system is not a substitute for a well- Rlength of the journey since the last break.
rested and attentive driver. Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is ASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in a
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not bar display in five levels from high to low.
occur at all: RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
Rif the length of the journey is less than approx- the attention level and cannot issue a warn-
imately 30 minutes ing, the System Suspended message
appears. The bar display then changes the
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
is uneven or if there are potholes 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
Rif there is a strong side wind (200 km/h).
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
eration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower than X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph board computer (Y page 248).
(200 km/h) The system determines the attention level of
Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assist the driver depending on the setting selected:
of DISTRONIC PLUS
Driving systems 215
Selection Standard: the sensitivity with which Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, and
the system determines the attention level is set for this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily
to normal. (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected.
Selection Sensitive: the sensitivity is set If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is
higher. The attention level detected by Attention passed, the display of the speed limits is upda-
Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is ted.
warned earlier. Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also
symbol appears in the multifunction dis- shown.
Driving and parking

play in the assistance graphic display. The traffic signs are only displayed with the
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, restrictions if:
it is automatically reactivated after the engine Rthe regulation must be observed with the
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor- restriction, or
responds to the last selection activated (stand-
RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
ard/sensitive).
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
Warning in the multifunction display maximum permitted speed from any of the avail-
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration able sources, no speed limit is displayed in the
are detected, a warning appears in the multi- instrument cluster either.
function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a
Break!.
In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do
not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still
detects increasing lapses in concentration, you
will be warned again after 15 minutes at the Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN- tries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the
TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of assistance graphic display (Y page 246).
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
If a warning is output in the multifunction dis- Important safety notes
play, a service station search is performed in
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
COMAND. You can select a service station and
able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic
navigation to this service station will then begin.
signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign
This function can be activated and deactivated
Assist display.
in COMAND.
The system may be either functionally impaired
or temporarily unavailable if the information in
the digital street map of the navigation system is
Traffic Sign Assist incorrect or out of date.
General notes
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed
permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.
The data and general traffic regulations stored in
the navigation system are used to determine the
current speed limit.
Z
216 Driving systems
Instrument cluster display Blind Spot Assist

Displaying the assistance graphic General notes
X Call up the assistance graphics display func- Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
tion using the on-board computer side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
(Y page 246). driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display. sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
Detected traffic signs are displayed in the draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
instrument cluster. monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
Driving and parking
responding turn signal to change lane, you will

Speed limit with unknown restriction also receive an optical and audible warning.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
: Maximum permitted speed
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
which the restriction in the additional sign is an accident.
relevant Always observe the traffic conditions care-
= Additional sign for unknown restriction fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 km/h Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
(60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply. detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) sufficient distance to the side for other road
depends on the country in which you are driv- users and obstacles.
ing. It is generally neither shown on the traffic
sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be i USA only:
taken into account when observing the max- This device has been approved by the FCC as
imum permitted speed. a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
Lane Tracking package and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
General notes per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Any unauthorized modification to this device
Spot Assist (Y page 216) and Lane Keeping could void the users authority to operate the
Assist (Y page 218). equipment.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
sensors must not be covered, for example by
Driving systems 217
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a Due to the nature of the system:
severe impact or in the event of damage to the Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. borders.
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
Monitoring area extended period next to long vehicles, such as
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be trucks.
impaired if: Warning display
Driving and parking

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray
Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or
bicycles
Rthe road has very wide lanes
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated. : Warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist
is not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
roundings.
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft Collision warning
(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the sponding turn signal, a double warning tone
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- signal remains on, vehicles detected are indica-
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :.
case if there are vehicles driving at the inner There are no further warning tones.
edge of their lanes.
Z
218 Driving systems
Switching on Blind Spot Assist This function is available in the range between
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
(Y page 248) is activated in the on-board A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
computer. over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
lock. up to 1.5 seconds.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light Important safety notes
up red until the engine is started.
G WARNING
Driving and parking
Display in the assistance graphic Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
recognize lane markings.
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
G WARNING
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
waves propagating backwards appear next to
the vehicle in the assistance display in the mul- return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
tifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph a risk of an accident.
(30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the You should always steer, brake or accelerate
assistance display changes to green :. Blind yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
Spot Assist is then ready for use. ing Assist.
Lane Keeping Assist If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-
ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
General notes dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
ing in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-
cle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of fog or spray
your vehicle by means of multifunction cam- Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
era : which is attached behind the top of the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface
windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects is wet)
lane markings on the road and can warn you Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
before you leave your lane unintentionally. covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
Driving systems 219
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction the warnings are suppressed for a certain
work period of time.
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov- Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow ABS, BAS or ESP.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small Adaptive
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
ted tion occurs if:
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Driving and parking

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
branch off, cross one another or merge the warnings are suppressed for a certain
Rthe road is narrow and winding period of time.
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP.
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Assist
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when neces-
sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
X To activate: press button ;. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep The warning vibration occurs later if:
ing Assist On message appears in the mul-
tifunction display. If all conditions have been Rthe road has narrow lanes
satisfied, there may be a warning. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display Driving Assistance PLUS package
(Y page 246) are shown in green. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is ready for use. General notes
X To deactivate: press button ;.
The Driving Assistance PLUS package consists
Indicator lamp : goes out. Lane Keeping
of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186), Active Blind
Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping
Spot Assist (Y page 219) and Active Lane Keep-
Assist Off message appears in the multi-
ing Assist (Y page 222).
function display.
Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting Active Blind Spot Assist

X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board
computer, select the Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
function (Y page 248). Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
X Select Standard or Adaptive. system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle,
to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle
Standard which the driver is unable to see. A warning dis-
When Standard is selected, no warning vibra- play in the exterior mirrors draws your attention
tion occurs if: to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If
Z
220 Driving systems
you then switch on the corresponding turn sig- Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
nal to change lane, you will also receive an opti- approved way.
cal and audible warning. If a risk of lateral colli- Any unauthorized modification to this device
sion is detected, corrective braking may help could void the user's authority to operate the
you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting equipment.
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval-
uates the space in the direction of travel and at Radar sensors
the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen- integrated into the front and rear bumpers and
Driving and parking
sors. behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure

Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors
must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or
Important safety notes overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the
a substitute for attentive driving. function of the radar sensors checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot
G WARNING Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Monitoring area
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area G WARNING
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
differential and overtake your vehicle traffic situations and road users. There is a
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit- Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
uations. There is a risk of an accident. tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i USA only: This device has been approved by

the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to
ference, and
10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly
2. This device must accept any interference next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
Driving systems 221
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot
the case of: Assist is not operational.
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
covering the sensors matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray roundings.
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow
Driving and parking

vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of
your lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
radar waves propagating backwards appear
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane next to the vehicle in the assistance display in
borders. the multifunction display. Above a speed of
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. in the assistance display changes to green ;.
trucks, for a prolonged time. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.
Warning display Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring
range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision
warning. You will then hear a double warning
tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn
signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :.
There are no further warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-
eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-
: Warning display correcting brake application is carried out. This
is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at
speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). G WARNING
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not A course-correcting brake application cannot
indicated.
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot accident.
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond- Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
ing side lights up red. This warning is always especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
monitoring range from behind or from the side. cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only sides.
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
Z
222 Driving systems
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, Active Lane Keeping Assist

red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mir-
ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, General notes
display ; underlining the danger of a side col-
lision appears in the multifunction display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. A course-cor-
recting brake application may be interrupted at
any time if you steer slightly in the opposite
Driving and parking
direction or accelerate.
The course-correcting brake application is avail-
able in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a course-cor-
recting brake application adapted to the driving
situation occurs if:
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. camera : at the top of the windshield. Various
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the different areas to the front, rear and side of your
side. vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping
high cornering speeds. Assist detects lane markings on the road and
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. can warn you before you leave your lane unin-
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
lane-correcting application of the brakes can
or PRE-SAFE Brake. bring the vehicle back into the original lane.
RESP is switched off.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist accident nor override the laws of physics. Active
X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of
activated in the on-board computer road and weather conditions. It may not recog-
(Y page 248). nize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping
Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
lock. speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light your lane.
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Gray
radar waves propagating backwards appear Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously
next to the vehicle in the assistance display in keep your vehicle in its lane.
the multifunction display. G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
Driving systems 223
Always pay particular attention to the traffic G WARNING

situation and keep within the lane, especially A lane-correcting brake application cannot
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- always bring the vehicle back into the original
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv- lane. There is a risk of an accident.
ing situation. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
The system may be impaired or may not function especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
if: you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
Driving and parking

cation.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface
is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers
or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by
snow
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings
for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
work display : appears in the multifunction display.
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov- The brake application also slightly reduces vehi-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow cle speed.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small This function is available in the range between
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
ted A lane-correcting brake application can be made
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes after driving over a lane marking detected as
branch off, cross one another or merge being solid or broken. Before this, a warning
Rthe road is narrow and winding must be given by means of intermittent vibration
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with
lane markings on both sides must be recog-
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and nized.
broken lane markings are detected, no lane-cor-
recting brake application is made. In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
Warning vibration in the steering wheel can only be made if a vehicle has been detected
in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, over-
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
taking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
can be detected.
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds. i A further lane-correcting brake application
can only occur after your vehicle has returned
Lane-correcting brake application to the original lane.
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan- No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:
ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.
This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
back to the original lane. erate.
Ryou have switched on the turn signal.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP,
PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
Z
224 PLUGIN HYBRID operation
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with Keeping Assist Off message appears in
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- the multifunction display.
eration.
RESP is switched off. Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting
Rthe transmission is not in position D. X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
computer, select the Active Lane Keep
been detected and displayed. ing Assist function (Y page 248).
X Select Standard or Adaptive.
Ran obstacle in the lane in which you are driving
When Standard is selected, no warning vibra-
Driving and parking
has been detected.

tion occurs if:
Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate
brake application may be interrupted at any time the warnings are suppressed for a certain
if you: period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction
ABS, BAS or ESP.
Rswitch on the turn signal
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
Rclearly brake or accelerate tion occurs if:
A lane-correcting brake application is interrup- Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
ted automatically if: the warnings are suppressed for a certain
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP, period of time.
PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. ABS, BAS or ESP.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Ryou brake hard.
Keeping Assist Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
In order that you are warned only when neces-

sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
X To activate: press button ;. The warning vibration occurs later if:
Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
ing Assist On message appears in the mul-
tifunction display. If all conditions have been Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
satisfied, a warning or steering intervention
may be made.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph PLUGIN HYBRID operation
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display Points to remember
(Y page 246) are shown in green. Active Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use. General notes
X To deactivate: press button ;. Hybrid technology combines a fuel efficient
Indicator lamp : goes out. The Active Lane internal combustion engine with a powerful
Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane electric motor. In HYBRID mode, the hybrid
PLUGIN HYBRID operation 225
drive system automatically selects the most effi- If you remove your foot from the brake pedal
cient operating mode for every driving situation. while in transmission position D or R, the vehicle
Drive the vehicle in the usual manner. may pull away automatically.
To save fuel in HYBRID mode, the hybrid drive Observe the notes on the READY display of the
system switches off the combustion engine as ECO start/stop function (Y page 231).
often as possible during the journey when power Vehicles with an electric motor generate much
output requirements are low. When power out- less driving noise than vehicles with internal
put requirements are low, the electric motor combustion engines. As a result, your vehicle
powers the vehicle. When power output require- may not be heard by other road users in certain
Driving and parking

ments are high, the combustion engine is auto- situations. This is the case, for example, when
matically switched on. The engine is usually you are parking and your vehicle is not seen by
switched off when the vehicle is stationary. Con- other road users.
sequently, there is usually no engine idling as This requires you to adopt a particularly antici-
with combustion engine vehicles. patory driving style, as it is necessary to allow
For pulling away and accelerating, the electric for the possibility that other road users may
motor supports the internal combustion engine behave erratically.
using the power stored in the high-voltage bat-
tery. In addition, the power is used for partially
electric driving, operation of the electric coolant
compressor and to support the 12 V on-board
Displays and operation
electrical system. In this way the hybrid drive Electric motor performance display
system helps to reduce your vehicle's fuel con-
sumption.
Observe the driving tips on plug-in hybrid oper-
ation (Y page 230).
Recuperative Brake System

If you release the accelerator pedal when the
vehicle is in motion, overrun recuperation is ini-
tiated. The electric motor is operated as a gen-
erator when in overrun mode and when you
brake. Hybrid technology converts the kinetic
energy of the vehicle into electricity and stores
it in the high-voltage battery.
The power display for the electric motor is loca-
Observe the important safety notes for the ted on the right-hand side of the instrument
Recuperative Brake System (Y page 45). cluster.
RArea : to ; (E-DRIVE):
Important safety notes This shows the electric output from the elec-
tric motor, e.g. during electric operation or in
If the engine is switched off by the ECO start/ boost mode.
stop function and you open the driver's door: When the motor is switched on, the display is
Ra message appears in the multifunction dis- at limit :. With increasing pressure on the
play and accelerator pedal the display fills up from :
Ra warning tone sounds
to ;.
Driving with the electric motor: when the
Further information (Y page 272).
display reaches limit ;, the combustion
All of the vehicle's systems remain active, if: engine is switched on. If the display is
Rthe vehicle is stationary approaching limit ; and you remove your
Rthe combustion engine is switched off and foot from the accelerator pedal, the display
Rthe READY indicator in the instrument cluster
empties again. The combustion engine is not
switched on. At low speeds, you can thereby
lights up
Z
control the electric operation usage so that

you only drive in electric mode.
Driving with the combustion engine: the
electric motor supports the combustion
engine by providing additional torque (boost
mode) until the display reaches limit ;.
You can also select the operating mode of the
hybrid drive system (Y page 226).
RArea = to ? (CHARGE):
Driving and parking
This shows the recuperated energy which is

stored in the high-voltage battery as electrical
energy. : Operating mode selected
When the display reaches limit ?, the maxi- ; Operating mode unavailable
mum recuperative braking power has been
= Operating mode available
exhausted. The mechanical brake is activa-
ted. HYBRID RElectric mode or driving
with the internal combus-
Selecting the operating mode tion engine is possible
RAutomatic selection of
drive mode with electric
mode as often as possi-
ble
RThe high-voltage battery
is discharged to approx-
imately 20%
RTo subsequently main-
tain the condition of
charge of the high-volt-
age battery, the electric
output is reduced. All
vehicle functions such as
Button : allows you to choose between differ- electric operation mode,
ent operating modes. energy recuperation or
X Press button : to change the operating boost mode, for example,
mode. are still available.
The operating mode selected appears in the
instrument cluster. E-MODE RElectric-onlydrive
RElectricalpower output
If it is not possible to change operating
modes, the display message Change the allotted using the haptic
current drive program before chang accelerator pedal
ing the operating mode. or Exit man (Y page 230)
ual drive program M before changing RInternal combustion
the operating mode. appears in the multi- engine activation using
function display. Further information on "Dis- the haptic accelerator
play messages" (Y page 272). pedal
E-SAVE RElectricmode or driving Menus and submenus

with the internal combus-
tion engine is possible Selecting displays in the display of the
RAutomatic selection of multimedia system
drive mode with electric X Press the button on the controller.
mode as often as possi- The vehicle menu is displayed.
ble
X To select Energy Flow: turn and press the
RThe current condition of
controller.
Driving and parking

charge of the high-volt- The energy flow is displayed.
age battery is maintained
so the electrical energy or
can be used at a later X To select Consumption: turn and press the
time controller.
Fuel consumption and the generated electric
CHARGE RElectricdrive is not pos- energy are displayed.
sible X To exit the display: press the % button on
RCharging the high-volt- the controller.
age battery while driving
using the combustion
engine Selecting the energy flow display in the
multifunction display
In automatic drive program S (Y page 229) and X Use on the steering wheel to call up the
during manual gearshifting (Y page 229), only list of menus.
HYBRID operating mode is available. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
If you switch from automatic drive program S to wheel to select the Travel menu.
automatic drive program E, HYBRID operating X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
mode continues to be selected. wheel.
If manual drive program M is deactivated, the X Select Energy Flow with : or 9 .
automatic transmission shifts: The active hybrid components are highlighted
Rinto the automatic drive program that was last in the energy flow display.
selected
Rinto the driving mode that was last selected Energy flow display
Each time the engine is started, HYBRID mode
is automatically selected. Overview energy flow display
Operating the on-board computer

You can display the current operating condition
of the hybrid drive system in the multifunction
display and on the display of the multimedia
system (Y page 227).
In the multimedia system display, you can also
call up a graphic display of the fuel consumption
and generated electricity (Y page 228).
: Internal combustion engine

; Electric motor
= High-voltage battery condition of charge
? High-voltage battery
A Energy flow
Z
The active hybrid components are highlighted. To reset the values: the values are reset along
The energy flow is indicated by arrows. The with the From Start trip computer
arrows have a different color depending on the (Y page 240).
operating state. X To select Consumption: turn and press the
controller.
Displaying the total range and electrical The display of the multimedia system shows
range fuel consumption : and electrical energy
generated ; for the past 15 minutes of driv-
ing.
Driving and parking
Starting the engine

The vehicle starts in electric mode without the
internal combustion engine (noiseless start).
The internal combustion engine starts only after
the power demanded by the driver exceeds the
available power that the electric motor can cur-
rently provide.
Noiseless start operation is dependent on the
The approximate range is based on the current outside temperature and the operating temper-
driving style. ature of the internal combustion engine. If not all
X Use on the steering wheel to call up the
conditions for noiseless start operation are ful-
filled, the vehicle starts with the internal com-
list of menus.
bustion engine.
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the Travel menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select the approximate
total range and electrical range.
Displaying fuel consumption and gen-

erated electricity X Switch on the ignition.
X Observe the notes on starting the engine
(Y page 148).
X Start the vehicle (Y page 148).
The vehicle is operational when READY indi-
cator : lights up.
Pulling away
: Fuel consumption depressed.
; Electrical energy generated X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X If the Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'
Every bar of the graph displays the average
value for one minute. display message appears in the multifunction
display, depress the brake pedal more firmly
Fuel consumption indicator : may differ from and select the desired transmission position.
the indicator in the From Start trip computer in
the Trip menu.
X Release the brake pedal. available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. start/stop function is not available in any
drive program, regardless of the display in the
For further information on pulling away multimedia system display.
(Y page 149).
Available drive programs:
I Individual Individual settings

Driving
S+ Sport Plus RExtremely sporty driving
Driving and parking

DYNAMIC SELECT switch style with boost mode
RElectric-only operation is
Drive programs not possible
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the S Sport RSporty driving style with
drive program. Depending on the drive program boost mode
selected the following vehicle characteristics
RElectric-only operation is
will change:
not possible
ment) C Comfort RComfortable, economical
Rthe suspension driving style
Rthe steering RElectric-only drive is pos-
Rthe climate control:
sible
- the climate control settings E Economy RParticularly economical
- the rear window defroster operation period driving style
- the performance of the seat heating RElectric operation mode
Rthe availability of the Eco Assistant
is used as often as possi-
ble
Each time you start the engine using the Smart- RDouble pulses in the hap-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
tic accelerator pedal, as
an indication to release
the engine, see (Y page 148).
the accelerator pedal
(Y page 230)
RAfter the accelerator
pedal has been released,
the coasting characteris-
tics of the vehicle are
adapted to the traffic
conditions.
Additional information for drive programs

(Y page 159).
Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you
can temporarily change gears yourself. For fur-
XPress DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forwards ther information on the manual drive program
or backwards until the desired drive program (Y page 229).
is selected.
The status icon of the selected drive program Manual gear shifting
is shown in the multifunction display. Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you
In addition, the current drive program settings can temporarily change gears yourself. The
are displayed briefly in the multimedia system transmission must be in position D. During man-
display. ual gearshifting, the combustion engine is
i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func- always switched on.
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
Z
Activating when driving with the electric motor: disconnected from the power train (overrun
X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
mode).
shifter (Y page 161). The double pulse is available in drive program E
The combustion engine is switched on. Man- (Y page 229).
ual gearshifting is activated temporarily. The After the accelerator pedal has been released,
selected gear and M appear in the multifunc- the coasting characteristics of the vehicle are
tion display. adapted to the traffic conditions.
Activating when driving with the combustion To avoid getting too close to the vehicle in front,
you must apply the brakes manually when nec-
Driving and parking
engine:
essary.
X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 161).
Manual gearshifting is activated temporarily. Driving tips
The selected gear and M appear in the multi-
function display. General driving tips
Drive carefully and maintain a safe distance
The ECO start/stop function is not available
from the vehicle in front. Avoid frequent and
when manually changing gear.
sudden acceleration as well as abrupt braking.
For further information on the manual drive pro-
During partial electric driving, pulling away and
gram (Y page 161).
acceleration, the electric motor supports the
internal combustion engine.
Haptic accelerator pedal During overrun in transmission position D and
braking, the electric motor will operate as a gen-
General notes erator.
The haptic accelerator pedal helps you to Further information on the ECO start/stop func-
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of tion (Y page 231).
your vehicle. Additional driving tips (Y page 179).
There are two different functions available for
this purpose: Stationary vehicle
Ran additional point of resistance in E-MODE If the vehicle is stopped, the combustion engine
operating mode (Y page 226) is, for the most part, switched off. Automatic
Ra double pulse in drive program E climate control continues to function. The elec-
(Y page 229) tromechanically assisted steering gear allows
you to use the power steering without reduced
Additional point of resistance in the hap- comfort.
tic accelerator pedal Acceleration
The maximum available electric performance is
Depending on the operating mode, pulling away
indicated by a tangible point of resistance in the
and driving under low load conditions are per-
haptic accelerator pedal.
formed:
The additional point of resistance is available in
Rentirely by electric propulsion
E-MODE operating mode (Y page 226).
Rin combination with the internal combustion
If you depress the haptic accelerator pedal
beyond the pressure point, the combustion engine
engine is switched on. When accelerating at an increased or full load,
boost mode is utilized. The electric motor sup-
Double pulses in the haptic accelerator ports the internal combustion engine by provid-
pedal ing additional torque when the accelerator is
A tangible double pulse in the haptic accelerator depressed rapidly.
pedal gives you a recommendation to release
the accelerator pedal. By this means, in
HYBRID, E-MODE or E-SAVE operating mode
the combustion engine can be switched off and
Overrun mode or braking ECO start/stop function

There are three possible operating modes when
the hybrid vehicle is decelerating: General notes
Renergy recovery takes place even when the The ECO start/stop function switches the inter-
vehicle is decelerating purely in overrun mode nal combustion engine off automatically when
(Y page 225). The electric motor operates as the vehicle stops moving and at high speeds
a generator and stores the recovered energy (Y page 232).
in the high-voltage battery All vehicle systems remain active, e.g. the auto-
matic climate control.
Driving and parking

Rwhen the brakes are applied lightly, the vehi-
cle is slowed down further by the electric The ECO start/stop function is only available in
motor This increases the energy recovery tak- drive programs C and E. Electric-only operation
ing place (Y page 225) The electric motor is only possible in drive programs C and E. Addi-
operates as a generator and stores the recov- tional information for drive programs
ered energy in the high-voltage battery. (Y page 229).
Rwhen the brakes are applied with greater
force, the service brakes are also used to slow Automatic engine switch-off
the vehicle down. The two systems work The engine is switched off automatically, includ-
together ing when:
Rthe driver removes his foot from the acceler-
Urban driving
ator in drive program E and a speed of
Energy is recuperated during frequent deceler- 160 km/h is not exceeded (Y page 232)
ation and stopping in city traffic. Rthe engine has reached its operating temper-
The vehicle can be driven by the electric motor ature
alone up to a speed of approximately 120 km/h. Rthe drivers seat belt is fastened and the
The vehicle is driven by the electric motor alone drivers door is closed
only when all conditions for the automatic Rthe driver only slightly depresses the accel-
engine switch-off are fulfilled. erator pedal in order to, for example, maintain
Further information on the automatic engine the current speed for a limited distance
switch-off (Y page 231). Rthe hood is closed and engaged properly
Driving on inter-urban roads Rthe high-voltage battery is charged suffi-
The following phases are possible when driving ciently

on inter-urban roads: Rno malfunctions are present in the hybrid
drive system
Rrapid acceleration (boost mode)
The internal combustion engine will not be
Rconstant energy consumption
switched off automatically, if:
Renergy recuperation
Rthe self-diagnosis function of the engine con-
Relectric operation mode
trol unit is still active
A great deal of recovered energy may be avail- Rthere is a malfunction in the hybrid drive sys-
able, depending on the route profile. This tem
reduces consumption and emissions.
Rthe climate control of the vehicle requires it
Highway driving Rthe high-voltage battery is being charged
During highway driving, fuel consumption and (Y page 227)
emissions are favorably influenced in particular Rautomatic emissions tests are running
by reduced power losses.
If the driver removes his foot from the acceler-
ator pedal in drive program E and a speed of
160 km/h is not exceeded, the combustion
engine is automatically switched off.
Further information on the automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 231).
Z
Automatic engine start The condition of charge of the high-voltage bat-

The automatically switched-off internal combus- tery is thus systematically controlled. In addi-
tion engine starts automatically in certain situation, the control function takes into account
tions, if: that:
Rthe fuel savings through the use of electrical
Rthe power demand from the driver via the
accelerator pedal is greater than the electric energy can vary, depending on the route (e.g.
motor alone can provide urban, interurban or highway)
Rthe use of electrical energy is held available in
Rthe driver switches to drive program S or M
particular for electric operation (e.g. urban
Driving and parking
Rthe condition of charge of the high-voltage

routes)
battery has reached the lower limit
The vehicle thus automatically selects the opti-
Rthe settings of the automatic climate control
mum driving mode for the respective section of
require it, e.g. at external temperatures above the route.
30
Route-based energy management is available
Overrun mode under the following conditions:
In overrun mode, the combustion engine is Rdrive program E is selected
switched off and is disconnected from the drive RHYBRID driving mode is selected
train. The electric motor: Ractive route guidance is activated
Rgenerates low thrust, which corresponds to Rsuitable map data is available
the overrun mode of an active combustion When route-based energy management is in
engine operation, the area in front of the vehicle is
Rfunctions as a generator and produces the shown as green in the multifunction display.
necessary energy for the auxiliary consumers
and charges the high-voltage battery
Overrun mode is available in drive program E Parking
below 160 km/h.
In drive program E, after the accelerator pedal X Apply the electric parking brake.
has been released the coasting characteristics The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
of the vehicle are adapted to the traffic condi- cluster lights up.
tions. Further information about the haptic X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the
accelerator pedal (Y page 230). automatic transmission to P.
Route-based energy management The READY indicator in the instrument cluster
goes out.
For route-based energy management, the sys-
tem factors in information about the expected Further information on parking and switching off
route when route guidance is active. the internal combustion engine (Y page 177).
The information on the route is provided by the
multimedia system and includes the following:
Rroad categories
Rspeed limitations
Rdata on downhill gradients
The use of electric energy is automatically opti-
mally distributed from the beginning to the end
of the journey, using information about the
route. The distribution is pre-emptive and takes
into consideration:
Rthe sections of the journey ahead
Rthe energy consumption on the whole route
Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation

Internal combustion engine
You cannot start the For example, self-diagnosis is not yet complete or the hybrid drive
internal combustion system is malfunctioning.
engine. The multifunc- X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Driving and parking

tion display shows no
X Try to start the internal combustion engine again.
display messages. The
READY indicator in the If the internal combustion engine still does not start:
multifunction display is X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
off.
You wish to pull away, The ECO start/stop function has failed. The warning and indicator
but the ECO start/stop lamps in the instrument cluster light up.
function does not start X Shift the transmission to P.
the internal combustion
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
engine. The READY indi-
cator in the multifunc- X Start the engine.
tion display is off.
The hybrid drive system is malfunctioning.
Recuperative Brake System

Braking resistance is G Risk of accident
reduced and brake pedal
travel is longer than The Recuperative Brake System is malfunctioning.
usual. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-
play (Y page 255).
X Observe the information regarding indicator and warning lamps in
the instrument cluster (Y page 288) .
Z
Hybrid drive system

The hybrid drive system You have been in an accident.
has been switched off The hybrid drive system remains switched off if:
automatically.
Rthe internal combustion engine cannot be restarted after a few
seconds.
Driving and parking
Rthe red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument clus-

ter is lit.
The hybrid drive system An electrical short circuit has occurred in the hybrid drive system or an
has been switched off electrical connection has been disconnected.
automatically. The multi- X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-
function display also play (Y page 255).
shows a display mes-
sage.
Displays and operation 235
Important safety notes For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-
tration (Y page 36).
G WARNING
On-board computer and displays

If you operate information systems and com- Displays and operation
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from Instrument cluster lighting
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when
operating the on-board computer.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only:
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-
G WARNING plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can
be adjusted using brightness control knob :.
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
X Turn brightness control knob : up or down.
functioned, you may not recognize function
If you turn the light switch (Y page 118) to the
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The T, or L position, the brightness
operating safety of your vehicle may be will depend upon the brightness of the ambi-
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. ent light.
Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so and
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
consult a qualified specialist workshop. automatically controls the brightness of the
multifunction display.
All vehicles, except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-
cles: In daylight, the displays in the instrument
cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is
G WARNING not possible in daylight.
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
Speedometer with segments
operating safety of your vehicle may be The speedometer is divided into segments on
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Mercedes-AMG vehicles or vehicles with
DISTRONIC PLUS.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
ately.
RCruise control activated (Y page 185):
If the operating safety of your vehicle is The segments light up from the stored speed
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. to the type-tested maximum speed.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 186):
The on-board computer only shows messages or One or two segments in the set speed range
warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- light up.
tion display. You should therefore make sure RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front
your vehicle is operating safely at all times. that is driving at a slower speed than the
stored speed:
Z
236 Displays and operation
The segments between the speed of the vehi- PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the multifunction dis-
cle in front and the stored speed light up. play shows the coolant temperature in the
Coolant submenu (Y page 246).
Under normal operating conditions and with the
Tachometer specified coolant level, the coolant temperature

may rise to 248 (120 ).
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the Operating the on-board computer
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
play indicates the temperature measured and
does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the multi-
function display (Y page 237).
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
: Multifunction display
Coolant temperature display ; Right control panel
= Left control panel
G WARNING
X To activate the on-board computer: turn
Opening the hood when the engine is over- the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
You can control the multifunction display and
compartment could expose you to hot gases
the settings in the on-board computer using the
or other service products. There is a risk of buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
injury. Left control panel
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the ROpens the menu list
engine compartment, keep the hood closed 9 Press briefly:
and contact the fire department. : RScrolls in lists
RSelects a menu or function
! A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high. RIn the Radio or Media menu:
If the coolant temperature is over 248 opens the track or station list and
(120 ), do not continue driving. The engine selects a station, an audio track or
will otherwise be damaged. a video scene
RIn the Telephone menu: switches
All vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: to the phone book and selects a
the coolant temperature display is in the lower name or a telephone number
section of the tachometer (Y page 36).
Displays and operation 237
9 Press and hold: 8 RMute

: RScrolls quickly through all lists RVehicles with Audio 20:
RIn the Radio or Media menu: Switches on voice-operated con-

selects a station, audio track or trol for navigation (see manufac-
video scene using rapid scrolling turer's operating instructions)
RIn the Telephone menu: starts RVehicles with COMAND:
rapid scrolling if the phone book is Switches on the Voice Control Sys-
open tem (see the separate operating
a RIn all menus: confirms the selected instructions)
entry in the list
RIn the Radio or Media menu:
opens the list of available radio Multifunction display
sources or media
RIn the Telephone menu: switches
to the phone book and starts dial-
ing the selected number
RVehicles with Audio 20:
Switches off voice-operated con-
trol for navigation (see manufac-
turer's operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND:
Switches off the Voice Control
System (see the separate operat-
ing instructions)
% Press briefly:
RBack
RIn the Radio or Media menu: dese-
lects the track or station list or list
of available radio sources or media : Drive program (Y page 157)
RHides display messages ; Transmission position (Y page 158)
RExits the telephone book/redial = All vehicles, except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-
memory cles: additional speedometer
(Y page 251)
% Press and hold:
? Display
RCalls up the standard display in the
A Time
Trip menu
B PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: outside temper-
ature or additional speedometer
Right control panel (Y page 251)
~ RRejects or ends a call Display panel ? shows the selected menu or
submenu and display messages.
RExitsthe telephone book/redial
memory X To open the menu list: press the but-
ton on the steering wheel.
6 RMakes or accepts a call Display panel ? appears in the menu list.
RSwitches to the redial memory
W RAdjusts the volume
X
Z
238 Displays and operation
Possible displays in the multifunction dis- Rsunglasses with polarization filters

play: Rwet roads
RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display
manually (Y page 161) cover
Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 202) In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the
RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 185) display may fade. This can be reversed by
RPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: READY PLUG-IN
switching the head-up display off and on again.
HYBRID operation activated (see the Digital i Vehicles with the head-up display are equip-
Operator's Manual) ped with a special windshield. Should repairs
RPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: HYBRID operating be necessary, have the windshield replaced at
mode, additional operating mode displays a qualified specialist workshop.
(see the Digital Operator's Manual)
RPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: electric Displays and operation
range (see the Digital Operator's Manual)
R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Switching the head-up display on/off
(Y page 120)
R ECO start/stop function (Y page 150)
R HOLD function (Y page 194)
Ra DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 192)
Head-up display
General notes
The head-up display projects information from
the navigation system and the driver assistance X Press button :.
system above the dashboard into the driver's
When the head-up display is switched on, the
field of vision.
display appears in the driver's field of vision.
A requirement for the display of the contents is
that the following functions are available in the Standard displays in the head-up display
vehicle and are switched on:
RCruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
RTraffic Sign Assist
RNavigation
The head-up display allows the driver to see all
of the information without having to take his
eyes off the road.

The head-up display is only an aid and is not a
substitute for attentive driving. The head-up display shows the following
The visibility of the head-up display is influenced contents and information:
by the following conditions: : Navigation messages
Rthe driver's seat position
; Current speed
Rthe positioning of the display image
= Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS set
speed
Rthe general ambient light
? Detected traffic signs
Menus and submenus 239
AMG displays in the head-up display Menus and submenus

AMG displays are available in Mercedes-AMG
vehicles. Menu overview
Press the button on the steering wheel to

open the menu list.
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 236).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
select the following menu:
RTrip menu (Y page 239)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 241)
RRadio menu (Y page 243)
RMedia menu (Y page 243)
RTelephone menu (Y page 245)
The head-up display shows the following
RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 246)
contents and information:
RService menu (Y page 246)
: Current engine speed
; Current speed RSettings menu (Y page 247)
= Upshift indicator RAMG menu in Mercedes-AMG vehicles

? Currently selected gear, gearshift options (Y page 252)
when shifting manually
A RACETIMER
B Lap Trip menu
Setting options Standard display

You can adjust the following settings in the
head-up display submenu:
Radjust the position of the head-up display on
the windshield (Y page 250)
Radjust the brightness of the displays in the
head-up display (Y page 250)
Rselect desired displays in the head-up display
(Y page 249)
Using the Display Content function, you
can, depending on your vehicle's equipment,
choose between four standard displays. The
selected contents then appear in the head-up
display. X Press and hold the % button on the steer-
ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom-
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also
eter : and odometer ; appears.
choose between two AMG displays. If you
select an AMG display, the head-up display
shows AMG-specific contents.
If you select a display with traffic signs, detec-
ted traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist
appear in the head-up display.
Z
240 Menus and submenus
Displaying the range and current fuel X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
consumption wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select ECO
display.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer

than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 180).
Trip computer "From Start" or "From

Reset"
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-

plays approximate range :.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the menu displays
current fuel consumption ;. In the subsequent
message, the multifunction display shows the
approximate electrical range as well as the total
range (Y page 228).
X Press the button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Trip menu. : Odometer
X Press 9 or : to select the display with ; Driving time
approximate range : and current fuel con- = Average speed
sumption ;. ? PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: emission-free
Approximate range : that can be covered is trip distance
calculated according to your current driving
A Average fuel consumption
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If
there is only a small amount of fuel left in the X Press the button on the steering wheel
fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C to open the menu list.
appears instead of approximate range :. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
Recuperation display = shows you if energy select the Trip menu.
has been recuperated from the kinetic energy X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
in overrun mode and saved in the battery. wheel.
Recuperation display = depends on the X Press : or 9 to select From Start or
engine installed and is therefore not available From Reset.
in all vehicles.
The values in the From Start submenu are cal-
culated from the start of a journey, while the
ECO display values in the From Reset submenu are calcu-
The ECO display is not available in Mercedes- lated from the last time the submenu was reset
AMG vehicles. (Y page 241).
In the following cases the trip computer is auto-
X Press on the steering wheel to open the
matically reset From Start:
menu list.
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
wheel to select the Trip menu.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically rate operating instructions).
reset From Reset. X Press the button on the steering wheel

Digital speedometer X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Navi menu.
menu list.
wheel.
select the Trip menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering Route guidance not active
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
digital speedometer.
Resetting values
select the Trip menu.
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the : Direction of travel
function that you wish to reset. ; Current road
X Press the a button.
X Press : to select Yes and press a to Route guidance active
confirm.
No change of direction announced
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are also
reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
trip computer, the values in the ECO display are
also reset.
: Distance to the next destination

Navigation system menu ; Estimated arrival time
= Distance to the next change of direction
Displaying navigation instructions ? Current road
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. You can find fur-
ther information on navigation instructions in
the separate operating instructions.
Z
Change of direction announced with a Change of direction without lane recom-

lane recommendation mendation
: Road into which the change of direction : Road into which the change of direction
leads leads
; Distance to the change of direction ; Distance to change of direction and visual
= Change-of-direction symbol distance display
? Recommended lane and new lane during a = Change-of-direction symbol
change of direction (white) When a change of direction is to be made, you
A Possible lane will see symbol = for the change of direction
B Lane not recommended (dark gray) and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you
On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
approach the point of the announced change of
can be displayed for the next change of direction
direction. The change of direction starts once
if the digital map supports this data. During the
the distance display reaches zero.
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended B: you will not be able Change of direction with lane recommen-
to complete the next change of direction if you dation
stay in this lane.
Possible lane A: you will only be able to com-
plete the next change of direction in this lane.
Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next change of direction
and the one after that.
: Road into which the change of direction

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
? Lane recommendation
Other status indicators of the naviga- position is only displayed along with station ; if
tion system this has been stored. You can store TV chan-
nels ; in the multimedia system.
X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-

rate operating instructions).
select the Radio menu.
wheel.
Currently set station ; appears in the multi-
function display.
X To open the station list: press : or 9
: Additional information briefly.
Other possible additional information: X To select a station in the station list:
press : or 9 briefly.
RNew Route... or Calculating Route...
X To select a station in the station list using
A new route is calculated. rapid scroll: press and hold : or 9.
RRoad Not Mapped
X To select the frequency range or station
The vehicle position is inside the area of the memory: press a briefly.
digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. X Press : or 9 to select the frequency
newly built streets, car parks or private land. range or station memory.
RNo Route
X Press a to confirm the selection.
No route could be calculated to the selected
destination. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
RO normal radio.
You have reached the destination or an inter- Further information on radio operation can be
mediate destination. found in the multimedia system (see the sep-
arate operating instructions).
Radio menu
Media menu
Changing the media source
You can change the media source and playback
mode (audio or video) at any time in the Media
menu.
select the Media menu.
: Frequency range X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
; Station frequency with memory position wheel.
= Name of artist X To open/close the media sources list:
? Name of track press a briefly.
The multifunction display shows station ; with The list shows the following media sources,
station frequency or station name. The preset for example:
Z
RDisc (CD/DVD) (DVD COMAND only) X To select to next or previous track in the
RSD card track list: press : or 9 briefly.
RMedia Register (COMAND) X To select a track in the track list using
RUSB storage device rapid scroll: press and hold : or 9
RBluetooth capable audio device

until you reach the desired track.
If you press and hold the button, the speed of
Please observe further information on media rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not
support and media operation in the multimedia all audio drives or data carriers support this
system (see separate operating instructions). function.
If the corresponding track information is stored
Operating an audio player or audio on the audio drive or audio media, the multi-
media function display may display the following:
Rtrack number
Rtrack name
Rartist
Ralbum
The track information does not appear in audio
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
Video DVD operation
: Media source, e.g. name of USB memory

stick
; Current title
= Name of artist
? Name of album
A Folder name
Audio data from various audio devices or media
can be played, depending on the equipment
installed in the vehicle.
wheel.
wheel.
X To select an audio player or media: press
X To select a DVD single drive or disc: press
a briefly. The list containing the media
a briefly. The list containing the media
sources appears.
sources appears.
X Press : or 9 to select the correspond-
X Press : or 9 to select the correspond-
ing audio player or media.
ing DVD single drive or disc.
X Press a to confirm.
X To open the track list: press : or 9
X To open the scene list: press : or 9
briefly.
briefly.
X To select the next or previous scene in the Accepting a call

scene list: press : or 9 briefly.
X To select a scene in the scene list using
If someone calls you when you are in the Tele
phone menu, a display message appears in the
rapid scroll: press and hold : or 9

until desired scene : has been reached.
You can accept a call at any time, even if you are
X Press a to confirm your selection.
not in the Telephone menu.
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
Telephone menu
Introduction Rejecting or ending a call
G WARNING You can end or reject a call at any time even if

you are not in the Telephone menu.
If you operate information systems and com- X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- to reject or end a call.
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
Selecting an entry in the phone book
Only operate the equipment when the traffic X Press the button on the steering wheel
situation permits. If you are not sure that this to open the menu list.
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
wheel to select the Telephone menu.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
wheel.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal X Press the :, 9 or a button to
requirements for the country in which you are switch to the phone book.
currently driving. X Using : or 9, select the names one
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu- after the other.
facturers operating instructions). or
X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa- X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold :
rate operating instructions). or 9 for longer than one second.
X Establish a Bluetooth connection to Audio The names in the phone book are displayed
20 or COMAND, see the separate operating quickly one after the other.
instructions. If you press and hold the : or 9 button
for longer than five seconds, the name
to open the menu list. appears with the next or previous letter initial
letter in the alphabet.
select the Telephone menu. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored for
wheel.
a name: press the 6 or a button to
You will see one of the following display mes- start dialing.
sages in the multifunction display: or
RPhone READY or the name of the network X If there is more than one number for a
provider: the mobile phone has found a net- particular name: press the 6 or a
work and is ready to receive. button to display the numbers.
RPhone No Service: there is no network X Press the : or 9 button to select the
available or the mobile phone is searching for number you want to dial.
a network. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
Z
or RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186)

X To exit the phone book: press the ~ or RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 215)
% button. RDistance warning and the autonomous
braking function COLLISION PREVENTION
Redialing ASSIST PLUS (Y page 70)

RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 77)
The on-board computer saves the last names or RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 216) or Active
numbers dialed in the redial memory. Blind Spot Assist (Y page 219)
X Press the button on the steering wheel RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 214)
to open the menu list. RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 218) or Active
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 222)
wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering assessment.
wheel.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
memory.
Service menu
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
desired name or number. Introduction
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
X To exit the redial memory: press the ~
Service menu:
or % button.
RCalling up display messages in message
memory (Y page 255)
RChecking the tire pressure electronically
Assistance graphic menu (Y page 369)
RCalling up the service due date
(Y page 334)
RDisplaying the coolant temperature (PLUG-IN
HYBRID vehicles) (Y page 246)
Displaying the coolant temperature

The Coolant menu is only available in PLUG-IN
HYBRID vehicles.
Observe the notes on coolant temperature
(Y page 236).
X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.
to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering select the Service menu.
wheel to select the Assistance Graphic X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
menu. wheel.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press : or 9 to select the Coolant
wheel. submenu.
The multifunction display shows the X Press a to confirm your selection.
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the The coolant temperature is shown in a bar
assistance graphic. display.
The assistance graphic displays the status of
and information from the following driving
systems or driving safety systems:
Settings menu X Press : or 9 to select ESP.

Introduction The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
Depending on the equipment installed in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the ton again.
Settings menu: If the warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the vehicle is ready to
RChanging assistance settings (Y page 247)
drive, ESP is deactivated.
RChanging HYBRID settings (PLUG-IN HYBRID
vehicles) (Y page 248) If the and warning lamps light up
RChanging head-up display settings
continuously, ESP is not available due to a mal-
function.
(Y page 249)
RChanging the light settings (Y page 250)
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 290).
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
Observe the information on display messages
(Y page 251)
(Y page 256).
RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 252)
Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-
Assistance submenu VENTION ASSIST PLUS
Deactivating/activating ESP to open the menu list.
Observe the "Important safety notes" section in X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
the description of ESP (Y page 73). wheel to select the Settings menu.
G WARNING wheel.
If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk submenu.
of skidding and an accident. X Press a to confirm.
Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- X Press 9 or : to select Collision

bed in the following. Prevention.
It may be best to deactivate ESP in the follow- The current selection appears.
ing situations: X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
Rwhen using snow chains

ton again.
When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
Rin deep snow
is deactivated, the symbol appears in
Ron sand or gravel the multifunction display in the Assistance
Deactivating/activating ESP in Mercedes- Graphic menu.
AMG vehicles (Y page 74). For further information about COLLISION PRE-
For further information about ESP, see VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 70).
(Y page 73).
X Start the engine.
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE
Brake
to open the menu list. PRESAFE Brake is only available for vehicles
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to with the Driving Assistance package.
select the Settings menu. X Press the button on the steering wheel
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering to open the menu list.
wheel. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
X Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs wheel to select the Settings menu.
sist submenu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
X Press a to confirm. wheel.
Z
X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist X Press : or 9 to select Off, Standard

submenu. or Sensitive.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
X Press : or 9 to select PRE-SAFE tion.
Brake. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

symbol appears in the Assistance
The current selection appears. Graphic menu in the multifunction display.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- For further information about ATTENTION
ton again. ASSIST, see (Y page 214).
When PRE-SAFE Brake is deactivated, the Setting Lane Keeping Assist
symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the Assistance Graphic menu. X Press the button on the steering wheel
For more information on PRESAFE Brake, see X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
(Y page 77). wheel to select the Settings menu.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
X Press the button on the steering wheel wheel.
to open the menu list. X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist
submenu.
wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press a to confirm.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press : or 9 to select Lane Keeping
wheel. Assist.
X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist X Press a to confirm.
submenu. The current selection, Standard or Adap
tive, appears.
X To change the setting: press a again.
X Press : or 9 to select Blind Spot
Assist. For further information about Lane Keeping
X Press a to confirm. Assist, see (Y page 218).
The current selection appears. For further information about Active Lane Keep-
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- ing Assist, see (Y page 222).
ton again.
For further information about Blind Spot Assist, HYBRID submenu (PLUG-IN HYBRID
see (Y page 216). vehicles)
For further information about Active Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 219). Setting the maximum charge current
Using the Max. Charge Current function, you
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST can limit the charge current value at which the
X Press the button on the steering wheel high-voltage battery should be charged.
to open the menu list. If there are no charge current settings on the
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering charging cable, set the maximum charge current
wheel to select the Settings menu. in the on-board computer.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering If there are no charge current settings on the
wheel. charging cable, set the maximum charge current
X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist on the charging cable (Y page 172).
submenu. X Press the button on the steering wheel
X Press a to confirm. to open the menu list.
X Press : or 9 to select ATTENTION X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
ASSIST. wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press a to confirm. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X Use : or 9 to select the Hybrid sub- X Press : or 9 to select the Hybrid

menu. submenu.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Max. X Press : or 9 to select the Departure

Charge Current function. Time function.
You will see the selected setting. You will see the selected setting.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the a button to save the setting.
Before charging the high-voltage battery, check X To set no departure time and charge
the maximum permissible charge current for the immediately: press the : or 9 to
relevant power socket. select No Pre-selection.
The maximum charge current values in the on- X Press a to confirm.
board computer may deviate from the charging or
cable values. X To set a departure time: press : or 9
Further information on charging the high-volt- A, B or C to select the desired preset.
age battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
(Y page 169). tion.
Setting the departure time X Press : or 9 to set the hours.
Using the "Setting departure time" function you
can: X Press : or 9 to set the minutes.
Rclimatize the vehicle interior before depar- X Press a to confirm.

ture. Further information on pre-entry climate If the selector lever is shifted to position P and
control (Y page 142). the charging cable connector is plugged in,
Rcharge the high-voltage battery at minimum
the multifunction display will show the com-
plete charging prediction after a few
cost before departure at an intelligent charg-
moments.
ing station.
The vehicle will calculate an optimal loading Further information on charging the high-volt-
plan. The charging process starts when the elec- age battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)
tricity is at the best price possible. As a result, (Y page 169).
the high-voltage battery is charged with elec-
tricity at a favorable rate. Head-up display submenu
Please note that the high-voltage battery may
not be fully charged by the time of departure. Selecting other displays
Depending on the condition of charge of the
high-voltage battery and the selected departure
time, the necessary charge time may not be suf-
ficient.
If you would like to charge the high-voltage bat-
tery for a short period of time, please use the
setting "set no departure time and charge imme-
diately".
The charging process will start immediately
when you charge the high-voltage battery at a
normal charging station and have already selec-
ted the departure time.
X Press the button on the steering wheel : Vehicle speed display
to open the menu list. ; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to display
select the Settings menu. = Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign Assist
Using the Display Content function, you can
wheel. choose from up to four display options depend-
Z
ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selected X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
contents appear in the head-up display. position to a level from Level +5 to Level
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose -5.
between two AMG displays. If you select an X Press the a or % button to save the
AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG- setting.

specific contents. Using the Memory function, you can save and
X Press the button on the steering wheel call up the set position of the head-up display as
to open the menu list. a single memory preset (Y page 116).
select the Settings menu. Setting the brightness
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering The brightness of the head-up display is auto-
wheel. matically adjusted to the surrounding ambient
X Press : or 9 to select the Head-up
light. You can also individually adjust the bright-
Display submenu. ness of the head-up display.
X Press a to confirm. X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 238).
X Press : or 9 to select Display Con X Press the button on the steering wheel
tent. to open the menu list.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
A graphic selection list appears. wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press : or 9 to select the desired dis- X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
play. wheel.
X Press the a button to confirm the selec- X Use : or 9 to select the Head-up
tion. Display submenu.
You can find further information on navigation
displays in the multimedia system (see separate X Using : or 9, select the Brightness
operating instructions). function.
Information on displays of Traffic Sign Assist X Press the a button to save the setting.
(Y page 215). X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to a level from Level +5 (bright) to
Setting the position Level -5 (dark).
You can adjust the position of the head-up dis- X Press the a or % button to save the
play on the windshield. You can compensate for setting.
height differences if the seat positions are
changed, for example.
Light submenu
X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 238).
X Press the button on the steering wheel Switching the daytime running lamps on/
to open the menu list. off
This function is not available in Canada.
wheel to select the Settings menu.
menu list.
wheel.
X Use : or 9 to select the Head-up
select the Settings menu.
Display submenu.
wheel.
X Using : or 9, select the Position
X Press : or 9 to select the Lights
function. submenu.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Using : or 9, select the Daytime always shows the outside temperature or the
Running Lights function. speed.
If the Daytime Running Lights function has The speed display is inverse to the speedome-
been switched on, the cone of light and the ter.

W symbol are shown in white in the multi- X Press the button on the steering wheel
function display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running lamps wheel to select the Settings menu.
Daytime Running Lights (Y page 118). X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Instrument cluster submenu X Use : or 9 to select the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
Selecting the distance unit X Press a to confirm.
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function X Press : or 9 to select the Permanent
allows you to choose whether certain displays Display function.
appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunc- X Press a to confirm.
tion display. The current setting Outside Temperature
X Press the button on the steering wheel or Speedometer
to open the menu list. [inverseHardwareSpeedUnit] appears.
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering X To change the setting: press a again.
wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering Switching the additional speedometer
wheel. on/off
X Use : or 9 to select the Instrument This function is not available in PLUG-IN HYBRID
Cluster submenu. vehicles.
X Press a to confirm. If the additional speedometer is switched on,
X Press : or 9 to select the Display the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul-
Unit Speed-/Odometer function. tifunction display instead of the outside tem-
The current setting km or Miles appears. perature.
X Press the a button to save the setting. The speed display is inverse to the speedome-
The selected unit of measurement for distance ter.
applies to: X Press the button on the steering wheel
RDigital
speedometer in the Trip menu
ROdometer and the trip odometer
select the Settings menu.
RTrip computer
RCurrent consumption and the range wheel.
RRange X Press : or 9 to select the Instru
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu ment Cluster submenu.
RCruise Control X Press a to confirm.
RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and X Using : or 9, select the Additional
Stop&Go Pilot Speedometer [km/h] function.
RASSYST PLUS service interval display The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
Selecting permanent display ton again.
This function is only available on PLUG-IN
HYBRID vehicles.
The Permanent Display function allows you to
choose whether the multifunction display
Z
Restoring the factory settings atures ? and A are displayed in white in the
X Press the button on the steering wheel If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
to open the menu list. ature ? or A in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating

wheel to select the Settings menu. temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering put during this time.
wheel.
X Use : or 9 to select the Factory
G-Meter
Settings submenu.
The Reset All Settings? function
appears.
X Press : or 9 to select No or Yes.
X Press a to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Lights submenu is only
reset when the vehicle is stationary.
The G-Meter shows you the forces working on

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) the driver in longitudinal and lateral direction
while driving.
WARMUP Maximum values are marked red in the guideline
system.
menu list.
wheel to select the AMG menu.
wheel.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the G-
Meter appears.
The G-Meter's maximum values are stored.
X To reset the G-Meter: press a again.
: Digital speedometer X Using : or 9, select Yes on the steer-
; Gear indicator ing wheel.
= Charge-air pressure X Press a to confirm.
? Engine oil temperature The G-Meter's maximum values are deleted.
A Transmission fluid temperature If the ignition remains switched off for longer
X Press the button on the steering wheel than four hours, the G-Meter will be automati-
to open the menu list. cally reset.
select the AMG menu.
wheel.
Engine and transmission oil tempera-
tures: when the engine and transmission are
at normal operating temperature, oil temper-
SETUP RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Drive Comfort/Sport/Sport +/ Race
; Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport +
: Lap
= Transmission D/M
; RACETIMER
? Exhaust system Comfort/Sport +
A ESP On/Off or SPORT handling mode The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
Sport closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
SETUP displays the following information and
functions: You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is
running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
Rthe gear indicator ignition lock.
Rthe digital speedometer
Rthe drive system setting list of menus.
Rthe suspension setting X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
Rthe transmission position wheel to select the AMG menu.
Rthe exhaust flap position X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
Rthe ESP (Electronic Stability Program) status wheel.
X Use on the steering wheel to call up the X Press the : or 9 button repeatedly
list of menus. until the RACETIMER is shown.
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering X To start: press the a button to start the
wheel to select the AMG menu. RACETIMER.
wheel. Starting a new lap
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP
is displayed.
: Lap
; RACETIMER
= Quickest lap time
Z
X Press the : or 9 button to select New X Press : or 9 to select Stop.

Lap. The RACETIMER is stopped.
X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select Reset.
A maximum of 32 laps may be stored. X Press a to confirm.
All laps are deleted.

Stopping the RACETIMER
Lap statistics
X Press : or 9 to select Stop.

X Press a to confirm. : Lap
; Lap time
Continuing the RACETIMER
= Average lap speed
? Lap length
This function is only available if you have stored
at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-
TIMER.
list of menus.
wheel to select the AMG menu.
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select Lap
X Press : or 9 to select Continue. List.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm.
The lap statistics are displayed.
Resetting the RACETIMER X Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
ferent lap evaluation.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
Display messages 255
Display messages
Introduction
General notes

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.
You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 194)
RParking (Y page 177)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the message memory.
If there are no display messages, the No Messages display appears in the multifunction display.
When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages.
Z
256 Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) are temporarily not available.
Currently Unavaila Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
ble See Operator's
Manual In addition, the and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
! ABS and ESP are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), and ! warning
lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
ESP is malfunctioning.

Inoperative See
Operator's Manual The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
ESP is temporarily unavailable.

Currently Unavaila
ble See Operator's The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Manual The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
Z
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP are malfunc-
tioning.

Inoperative See In addition, the and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-
Operator's Manual ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
F(USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
only) was switched off.
Turn On the Igni X Switch on the ignition.
tion to Release the
Parking Brake
F(USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
only)!(Canada electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 178).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release Park X Release the electric parking brake manually.
ing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 178).
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada To apply:
only) X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
Operator's Manual

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.

To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 178).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 380).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is not
applied automatically.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:

F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
only)!(Canada after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
only) goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
Parking Brake Inop
voltage or undervoltage.
erative
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp
only)J(Canada lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
only) G WARNING
Check Brake Fluid
Level The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

USA only: the $ red brake system warning lamp is lit while the
Check Brake Pad Wear engine is running.
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.

Inoperative
Collision Preven COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.
tion Assist Plus Possible causes are:
Currently Unavaila
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
ble See Operator's
Manual tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Restart the engine.
Z

Collision Preven COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due
tion Assist Plus to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Inopera Important functions of PRE-SAFE have failed. All other occupant
tive See Operator's safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Functions PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is temporarily inoperative.

Currently Limited Possible causes are:
See Operator's Man
ual Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP is deactivated
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
disappears.
PRESAFE PLUS and PRESAFE Brake are operational again.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP on again (Y page 74).
PRE-SAFE Functions PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is unavailable due to a mal-

Limited See Opera function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.
tor's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Radar Sensors Dirty At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems
See Operator's Man is temporarily restricted or inoperative:

ual RPRE-SAFE PLUS
RPRE-SAFE Brake
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will
not perform a course-correcting brake application.
Possible causes are:
Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty
Rthe function of the driving system or driving safety system is
impaired due to heavy rain or snow
A warning tone also sounds.
disappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems are operative
again.
X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 339):
Rin the radiator trim
Rin the front bumper
Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper
The display message disappears.
6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in

the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction Ser
vice Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 46).
Z
6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left Malfunc

tion Service G WARNING
Required or Front The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Left Malfunc
Required or Rear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 The rear center restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning

lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Malfunc
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air

bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required or The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
Right Side Curtain tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Airbag Malfunction There is an increased risk of injury.
Service Required

Front Passenger Air The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even
bag Disabled See though:

Operator's Manual Ran adult
or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 54)
Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis
abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-
function display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 54).
Z

Front Passenger Air The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
bag Enabled See though:
Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54)
Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis
abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-
function display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see

(Y page 54).
Lights
b The corresponding bulb is faulty.

Check Left Low Beam
(Example) or
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 122).
i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding
lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.
b The active light function is faulty.

Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is defective.

Malfunction See
Operators Manual
b The light sensor is faulty.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone
also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to the position.
b You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.

X Turn the light switch to the L or position.
Switch On Headlamps
Z

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

Assist Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant Level ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
See Operator's Man cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
ual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 333).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.
? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 (120 ), drive to the nearest
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
? The coolant is too hot.


Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 (120 ). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
If the temperature increases again:

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 (120 ).
# The battery is not being charged.

See Operator's Man Possible causes are:
ual
Ra defective alternator
Rdefective power electronics (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

Z
# The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is
too low.
Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.

Operator's Manual
X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
# The battery charge level is too low.

Stop Vehicle Leave attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
Engine Running under any circumstances.
X Leave the engine running.
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
# The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
Start Engine See rear window defroster and interior lighting.
Operator's Manual
X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long distance.
The battery is being charged.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 332).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 332).
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified
specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-

Check Engine Oil
Level (Add 1 quart) erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 332).
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified
specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.
Engine Oil Level
Low Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 332).
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8 The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
Gas Cap Loose
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Z
Hybrid drive system

d
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:

You are exiting the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. The
Vehicle Operational READY indicator in the multifunction display is on. A warning tone also
Switch the Ignition sounds.
Off Before Exiting
If you leave the vehicle:
X Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey.
If you do not leave the vehicle:

X Switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. automatic climate control,
seat heating.
Please note the following: The electrical consumers are supplied by
the 12 V battery. If the vehicle is left in a ready-to-drive state for an
extended period, it will switch off once the 12 V battery is almost
empty. It will then only be possible to start the vehicle using a second
battery (jump-starting).
Change the current PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:
drive program You have attempted to change the operating mode in the automatic
before changing the drive program S (Sport), S+ (Sport Plus) or in the manual drive pro-
operating mode. or gram M.
Exit manual drive
X Activate drive program C (Comfort) or E (Economy) (Y page 229).
program M before
changing the operat X Select the preferred operating mode HYBRID, E-MODE, E-SAVE or
ing mode. CHARGE (Y page 226).
E-MODE Currently PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:

Unavailable The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery has dropped to the
lower limit and the E-MODE operating mode has been switched off.
Driving with the internal combustion engine is activated and the oper-
ating mode switches to the basic HYBRID setting.
X Continue driving using the internal combustion engine.
You can switch to the E-SAVE or CHARGE operating mode as
required (Y page 226).
If you select CHARGE, the high-voltage battery is charged.
Once the charge level display for the high-voltage battery has
increased slightly, you can switch to the E-MODE operating mode
again.
Only E-MODE Availa PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:

ble Power Limited The fuel tank has been run dry and the combustion engine has been

Refuel Immediately switched off.
The vehicle will be powered by electrical energy only. Performance is
restricted and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly than normal.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
In the "Total range and electric range" menu, you can display the
approximate range of the vehicle (Y page 228).
Engine will not You cannot start the engine again due to a malfunction.
restart Service A warning tone also sounds.
required
If the engine is running:
If you switch off the engine:

X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
The hybrid drive system is faulty.

X Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer to the near-
Towing Not Permit est qualified specialist workshop.
ted See Operator's
Manual

Malfunction Service
Required

X Have the vehicle towed away by a professional recovery company to
Malfunction the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
d The drive system is malfunctioning.

The ECO start/stop function may be malfunctioning.
Malfunction The drive power is restricted.

The charging cable connector is still connected to the vehicle socket.
Charger Cable Con You cannot drive off as long as the charging cable connector is still
nected connected.
Before you drive off:
X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket
(Y page 173).
Z
6 PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:

The fuel filler flap unlocking button has been pulled. The fuel tank must
Please Wait be depressurized before refueling.

Depressurizing Tank
X Wait until the fuel tank is depressurized and the fuel filler flap is
unlocked.
The opening process for the fuel filler cap may take up to 15
minutes.

The fuel tank is now depressurized. The vehicle may now be refueled.
Tank is Depressur
ized Ready for Refu X Observe the information on refueling on the fuel filler flap.
eling X Open the fuel filler cap and remove it (Y page 166).

There is a malfunction in the fuel system.
Tank Ventilation
Malfunction Service
Required

The sound generator is not working. The vehicle can still be driven;
Acoustic Vehicle however, no vehicle sounds can be generated. As a result, your vehicle
Indication Inopera may not be heard by other road users until it is very close to them, or
tive it may not be heard at all.
X Drive with particular care, allowing for the possibility that other road
users may behave unpredictably.
Driving systems
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or

a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
ATTENTION ASSIST: sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

ATTENTION ASSIST
Inoperative
Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle Rising
The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning
tone also sounds.

Vehicle Rising X Do not pull away.
Please Wait The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.
Stop Vehicle Vehi
cle Too Low
AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.

X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender
or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi-
cle.
The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling charac-

teristics may be affected.
Malfunction X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and
Currently Unavaila temporarily inoperative.
ble See Operator's Possible causes are:
Manual or Active
Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
ble See Operator's Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.
Manual Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
Z

Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
Inoperative or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping

Assist Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Manual or Active
Blind Spot Assist range.
Currently Unavaila Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
ble See Operator's tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
Manual other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
Inoperative or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot
Assist Inoperative
Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open.

X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the
driver's door closed.
You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-

vention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-
tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 202).
Park Assist Inoper PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.

ative X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with
PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 202).

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.
X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.

If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the j symbol
does not appear in the multifunction display):
Park Assist The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

Switched Off The display message disappears automatically.
Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's
Manual
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display
message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 194).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 194).
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 186).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily
Available unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186).
Z

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
rently Unavailable Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
See Operator's Man Possible causes are:

ual
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.
DISTRONIC PLUS Inop DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.

erative The following may have also failed:
RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
RPRE-SAFE Brake
RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
DISTRONIC PLUS Sus You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186).

DTR+: Steering Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
Assist. Currently Possible causes are:

Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
disappears.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.
DTR+: Steering Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.

Assist. Inoperative However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.
Cruise Control Inop Cruise control is malfunctioning.

erative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-
ple.
RESP is deactivated. The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 185).
or
X Reactivate ESP.
Rall vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74)
RMercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74)
Z
Tires
Check Tire Pressure Canada only:

Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
in pressure.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires.
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 343).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 367).
Check Tire Pressure Canada only:

Then Restart Run The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
Flat Indicator and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 367).
Run Flat Indicator Canada only:

Inoperative The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Please Correct Tire The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 367).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 369).

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.

G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
tire (Y page 343).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 367).
Warning Tire Mal The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
function position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
tire (Y page 343).
Tire Press. Monitor Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
Currently Unavaila signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
ble monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
TirePress. Sen There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul-
tifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Z

Tire Pressure Moni The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
tor Inoperative No tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-
to Start Engine tion R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-
Shift from 'P' tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N, With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-
Depress Brake and mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.
Start Engine X Depress the brake pedal.
X Start the engine.
Transmission Not in The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
P Risk of Vehicle position R, N or D.
Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Close the driver's door completely.
Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is Sta X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
tionary attention to road and traffic conditions.

Service Required Do You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.

Visit Dealer
If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
Reversing Not Possi You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction.
ble Service Required The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.
Transmission Mal A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-

function Stop nents.
A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-
tion N.
Stop Vehicle Leave PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:

Engine Running Wait The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily
Transmission Cool impaired or not possible.
ing
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Leave the engine running.
Auxiliary Battery PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only:

Malfunction The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off
the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
N The trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.
Z
M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
_ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-
hand side.
Rear Left Backrest X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Not Latched or Rear
Right Backrest Not
Latched
_ The center rear seat backrest is not engaged.

X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Rear Center Back
rest Not Engaged
& PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:

With the engine switched off, you have attempted to switch on the pre-
Pre-Entry Climate entry climate control more than twice.
Ctrl. (Via Smart
X Let the engine run for ten seconds.
Key) Available
Again After Engine After running the engine, the pre-entry climate control is opera-
Start tional again.
& PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:

The on-board voltage is too low. The pre-entry climate control cannot
Pre-Entry Climate be switched on.
Ctrl. (Via Smart
X Drive for a longer distance.
Key) Inoperative HV
Battery Low The battery is being charged. When the condition of charge of the
high-voltage battery is over the specified minimum, pre-entry cli-
mate control is operational again.
The power steering is malfunctioning.


Power Steering Mal
function See Opera G WARNING
tor's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:

If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver

range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 333).
SmartKey
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 84).
Replace Key Battery
Z
286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's
door with the engine switched off.
Don't Forget Your This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is
Key simply a reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
The SmartKey is currently undetected.

X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
Key Not Detected
(white display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
(red display message) trally or start the engine.
X Locate the SmartKey.
X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the

key is not detected whilst the engine is running.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.
The SmartKey is continually undetected.

The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is
Remove 'Start' But faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
ton and Insert Key
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator
and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or
whilst driving.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 287
Safety
Seat belts

Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50).
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The warning tone ceases.
N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Z
Safety systems
lamp
N The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running or
the ECO start/stop function is activated.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow brake system warning lamp is shown in the
READY driving status.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow RBS (Recuperative Brake System) warning
lamp is shown in the READY driving status.
G WARNING
The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affec-
ted.
X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in the
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

lamp

$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in the
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow ABS warning lamp is shown in the READY
driving status.
ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
Z

lamp
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
! ESP and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the red brake warning lamp, yellow ESP warning lamp
and ABS are shown in the READY driving status.
ABS and ESP are malfunctioning.
G WARNING
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
N The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP.
In rare cases it may be better to deactivate ESP:
Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 73).

lamp

N The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow ESP warning lamp is shown in the READY
driving status.
ESP is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
N The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO
start/stop function is activated.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is shown in the
ESP is deactivated.
G WARNING
If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform braking actions.
X Reactivate ESP.
In rare cases it may be better to deactivate ESP:
Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 73).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP cannot be activated:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP checked.
Z

lamp
M N Only Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is
lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 74).
F! N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is faulty.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 46).
Engine

lamp
; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon
as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-
ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the
fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Z

lamp
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 333).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248
(120 ). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-start traffic.
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 (120 ). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 333).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.

lamp
X At coolant temperatures below 248 (120 ), drive to the nearest qualified

specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-start traffic.
Driving systems
lamp
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel at too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on PRESAFE Brake (Y page 77).
For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PRE-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 70).
Z
Tires
lamp
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 343).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 367).
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
Vehicle

lamp
N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power steering is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:

If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Z
298 Function restrictions
General notes Please always use this feature instead of con-

sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
The multimedia system section in this manual
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
describes the basic principles for operation.
More information can be found in the Digital
Operator's Manual. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
G WARNING permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is
If you operate information systems and com- desirable that it should be installed and oper-
ated with at least 8 inches (20 cm) and more
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- between the radiator and a person's body
Multimedia system
cle while driving, you will be distracted from (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
traffic conditions. You could also lose control legs.)
G WARNING
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this Modifications to electronic components, their
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention software as well as wiring can impair their
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- function and/or the function of other net-
ment when the vehicle is stationary. worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
You must observe the legal requirements for the result, these may no longer function as inten-
country in which you are currently driving when ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
operating the multimedia system. the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
The multimedia system calculates the route to accident and injury.
the destination without taking the following into Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
account, for example:
tronic components or their software. You
Rtraffic lights should have all work to electrical and elec-
Rstop and yield signs tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Rparking or stopping restrictions specialist workshop.
Rroad narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav- tronics, the general operating permit is ren-
igation recommendations if the actual street/ dered invalid.
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example: Function restrictions
Ra diverted route
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
street has been changed You will notice this, for example, because either
For this reason, you must always observe road you will not be able to select certain menu items
and traffic rules and regulations during your or a message will appear to this effect.
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Operating system 299
Operating system Switching the sound on/off

Overview XPress the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
General notes If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
! Do not use the space in front of the display the media source or set the volume, the sound
for storage. Objects placed here could dam- is automatically switched on.
age the display or impair its function. Avoid i Navigation announcements will be heard
any direct contact with the display surface. even if the sound is muted.
Pressure on the display surface may result in
impairments to the display, which could be
irreversible.
Functions
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your The multimedia system has the following func-
ability to read the display. tions:
Multimedia system
The display has an automatic temperature-con- RRadio mode
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is RMedia mode with media search
automatically reduced if the temperature is too RSound systems
high. The display may temporarily switch off
RNavigation system
completely.
COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Cleaning instructions Audio 20: navigation via SD card
RCommunication functions
! Do not touch the display. The display has a RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
RVehicle functions with system settings
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent RFavorites functions
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have Controller
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not The controller in the center console lets you:
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- Rselect menu items on the display
age to the display. Renter characters
Rselect a destination on the map
Switching the multimedia system Rsave entries
on/off The controller can be:
X Press the u button on the center console Rturned 3
to the right of the controller. Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Adjusting the volume Rslid diagonally 2
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7
X Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
The volume is adjusted: Back button
Rfor the currently selected media source You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements call up the basic display of the current operating
Rin hands-free mode during a phone call mode.
Z
300 Operating system
X To exit the menu: briefly press the % Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func-
button. tion:
The multimedia system changes to the next X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up
higher menu level in the current operating or down with two fingers.
mode.
X To zoom in and out of the map: move two
X To call up the basic display: press the %
fingers together or apart.
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the basic X To increase or reduce the vehicle and
display of the current operating mode. sound settings: turn two fingers to the right
or left.
Touchpad Character entry with handwriting rec-

ognition
Switching the touchpad on/off
Entering characters
Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
X Use one finger to write characters on the sur-
X Select VehicleQSystem Set face.
tingsQActivate Touchpad. The character is entered in the input line. If
The touchpad is switched on O or off . the character that you have entered can be
interpreted in different ways, these character
Operating the touchpad suggestions are displayed.
X If character suggestions are shown, turn and
press the controller.
X Resume the character entry on the touchpad.
Handwriting recognition
: Touch-sensitive surface
; Favorites button
= Calls up audio and telephone menu (quick
access)
? Returns to the previous display : Active input line
Navigating in menus and lists can be done via ; Inserts a space
touch-sensitive surface : by swiping with = Character entered on the touchpad
your finger. ? Deletes characters
X To select the menu item: swipe up, down, to X To display the menu: press the touchpad.
the left or right.
X Press the touchpad.
X To move the digital map: swipe in all direc-
tions.
Quick access for audio

Changing the station/music track
: Exits the menu

; Returns to handwriting recognition
= Uses the phone book or text templates
(COMAND)
Multimedia system
Depending on the audio source that is currently
? Selects the input line or changes the posi-
activated, you can use this function to select the
tion of the cursor next station or music track.
A Switches the language
X Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touch-
B Finishes character entry
pad.
X To select the input line: select p. The current audio source is displayed.
X Swipe up or down. X To select the previous or next station/
music track: glide to the right or left.
X To move the cursor within the input line:
The selected station/music track is played.
select p.
X Swipe to the left or right.
Switching the character entry between
X To delete characters: swipe to the left if an touchpad and controller
input line is selected.
X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad. Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
Switching the text reader function of the X To switch to the controller: press the con-
handwriting recognition on/off troller.
Character entry using the controller is active.
Multimedia system:
X To switch to the touchpad: press the touch-
X Select VehicleQSystem Set pad with your finger.
tingsQRead Out Handwriting Recog Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is
nition. active.
The read-aloud function is switched on O or
off .
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
X To call up: press the button on the con-
troller or on the touchpad.
X Select a favorite, e. g. Vehicle.
The favorites are displayed.
X To exit: press the button again.
Z
Adding favorites You can find all available climate control func-
tions in the climate control menu. You can use
Adding a predefined favorite the climate control bar to switch to the climate
control menu.
Overview
Multimedia system
: Adds a new favorite

; Renames a selected favorite
= Moves a selected favorite
Example: COMAND
? Deletes a selected favorite
: Adjusts temperature and air distribution on
X Press the button. the left and displays the current setting
X Slide 6 the controller. ; Calls up the climate control menu, displays
The menu bar is shown. the current cooling and climate mode set-
X Select Reassign. ting
The categories are displayed. = Adjusts temperature and air distribution on
X Select a category. the right and displays the current setting
The favorites are displayed. There may be fewer settings or none depending
X Select a favorite. on your vehicle's equipment.
X Add a favorite at the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this Calling up the climate control menu
position, it will be overwritten.
Multimedia system:
Adding your own favorite X Select Vehicle.
X Select VehicleQClimate Control. The vehicle menu is displayed.
X Press and hold the button until the X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
favorites are displayed. climate control bar is activated.
X Add a favorite at the desired position. X To select from climate control bar ;: turn
If a favorite has already been added at this and press the controller.
position, it will be overwritten. The menu for selecting climate control func-
tions is activated.
X To select the desired climate control function:
Climate control settings turn and press the controller.
The selected climate control function
General notes appears.
You can adjust the climate control settings

using the climate control bar or the climate con- Calling up the climate control bar
trol menu. Multimedia system:
You can set the most important climate control
functions such as temperature, airflow and air
X Select Vehicle.
distribution using the climate control bar. The The vehicle menu is displayed.
climate control bar is visible in most displays. X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
climate control bar is activated.
Settings in the climate menu Activating or deactivating pre-entry cli-

mate control via the SmartKey
Adjusting the climate mode settings This function is available for PLUGIN HYBRID
By setting the climate mode you determine the vehicles.
type of airflow. The setting is active when the air- PLUG-IN HYBRID: before getting in, the driver's
conditioning system is set to seat area can be briefly warmed or ventilated in
(Y page 133). advance with the air from the air vents being pre-
X Call up the climate control menu cooled.
(Y page 302). X Call up the climate control menu
X To select Climate Mode: turn and press the (Y page 302).
controller. X To select Pre-entry Climate Control
X To change the setting: turn the controller. via Key: turn and press the controller.
Exiting a menu: X To activate or deactivate: turn the control-
ler.
Multimedia system
X Press the % button.
The current airflow setting is shown in the cli- Exiting a menu:
mate control bar: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS. X Press the % button.
Starting/stopping the perfume atomizer Activating or deactivating pre-entry cli-
The perfume atomizer makes it possible to scent mate control at departure time
the air in individual compartments in the vehicle This function is available for PLUGIN HYBRID
interior. Further information (Y page 138). vehicles.
X Call up the climate control menu You can climatize the driver's seat and the vehi-
(Y page 302). cle interior in time for the departure time set.
X To select Air Freshener: turn and press the
X Call up the climate control menu
controller. (Y page 302).
The setting element is active.
X To select Pre-entry Climate Ctrl. at
X To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press
Departure Time: turn and press the control-
the controller.
ler.
X To set the intensity: turn the controller when
A rotary menu appears.
the atomizer is switched on.
X To select the desired setting: turn the con-
Exiting a menu: troller.
X Press the % button. The menu symbol, text and image show the
selected setting.
Switching the ionization on/off X To exit a menu:
The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in Press the % button.
the vehicle interior. Further information
(Y page 140). Settings in the bottom bar of the cli-
X Call up the climate control menu mate control menu
(Y page 302).
X To select Ionization: turn and press the Switching cooling with air dehumidifica-
controller. tion on/off
The setting element is active. X Call up the climate control menu
X To switch the ionization on/off: press the (Y page 302).
controller. X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
Exiting a menu: bottom bar is activated.
X To select O A/C: turn and press the control-
ler.
X Switch cooling with air dehumidification on
O or off .
Z
i The current status of the cooling function is Audio 20 is equipped with MARGIN MAP PILOT
displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
activated, A/C OFF deactivated. The Garmin MAP PILOT operating instructions
are stored on the SD memory card as a PDF file.
i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi- The SD card box contains a quick guide.
fication function reduces fuel consumption.
The following descriptions apply to navigation
Synchronizing the climate control set- with COMAND. Further information can be
tings found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Use O Sync (synchronization) to select the cli-
mate control setting for all zones together O or Selecting a route type and route options
separately . Multimedia system:
X Call up the climate control menu
X Select NaviQNavigation.
(Y page 302).
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
Multimedia system
X Slide 6 the controller.

bottom bar is activated.
X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.
X To select O Sync: turn and press the con-
troller. Notes for route types:
X Switch the synchronization function on O or REco Route
off . RDynamic Traffic Route
For further information on synchronizing climate Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-
control settings, see (Y page 135). ance are taken into account.
RCalculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. Instead
Navigation mode of Start select the Continue menu item.
Notes for route options:
RUse Toll Roads
G WARNING The route calculation includes roads which
If you operate information systems and com- require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
RUse Vignette Roads (not available in all
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
countries)
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette).
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. A vignette allows temporary use of the route
Only operate the equipment when the traffic network, e. g. 10 days or 1 year.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in the
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention USA)
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
ment when the vehicle is stationary. conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
You must observe the legal requirements for the lanes option is activated.
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the navigation system. Entering an address
General notes Multimedia system:
X Select NaviQNavigation.
Among other things, correct functioning of the The map shows the vehicle's current position.
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
X Slide 6 the controller.
certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows: If route guidance has already been activated,
Rtown or zip code, street, house number a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
Rcountry, town or zip code
X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des
Rcity or zip code, center
tination.
Rstreet, city or zip code, intersection Yes cancels the current route guidance and
X Select City. starts route calculation to the new destina-
The city in which the vehicle is currently location.
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Set as Intermediate Destination adds
Below this, you will see locations for which the new destination in addition to the existing
route guidance has already been carried out. destination and opens the intermediate des-
X Enter the city. tinations list.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide the 5 control- Connecting a mobile phone
Multimedia system
ler.
X Select the location. Prerequisites
If available, the zip code is shown. If there are
different zip codes available for the location, For telephony via the Bluetooth interface, you
the corresponding digits are displayed with an require a Bluetooth-capable mobile phone. The
X. mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
X Enter the street and house number. 1.0 or above.
The address is in the menu. Multimedia system:
Further options for destination entry: X Select VehicleQSystem Set
Rsearch for a keyword tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
X Activate Bluetooth O.
The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words. Mobile phone:
Rselect the last destination
X Activate Bluetooth and, if necessary, Blue-
Rselect a contact
tooth visibility for other devices (see the
Rselect a POI manufacturer's operating instructions).
You can search for a POI by location, name or The Bluetooth device names for all of one man-
telephone number. ufacturer's products might be identical. To
Rselect destination on the map make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
Renter intermediate destination phone, change the device name (see the man-
You can map the route to the destination ufacturer's operating instructions).
yourself with up to four intermediate destina- If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
tions. Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Access Profile) Bluetooth profiles, the follow-
Apps ing information will be transmitted after you
Rselect geo-coordinates connect:
Rphone book
Calculating the route Rcall lists
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and Rmessages

is in the menu. i Further information on suitable mobile
X Select Start or Continue. phones can be obtained on the Internet at
The route is calculated with the selected route http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
type and the selected route options. connect.
Z
i In the USA you can also contact the Connecting a mobile phone
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
X Select mobile phone.
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- A code is displayed in the multimedia system
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. and on the mobile phone.
X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
Searching for and authorizing a mobile system.
phone X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
Before using your mobile phone with the multi- ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
media system for the first time, you will need to connection to the multimedia system and for
search for the phone and then authorize (con- the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles. The
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author- prompt to confirm may take up to two
ization either takes place by means of Secure minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The er's operating instructions).
Multimedia system
multimedia system automatically makes the X If the codes are different: select No on the
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone multimedia system.
available. The mobile phone is always connec- The process is canceled.
ted automatically after authorization. Further Repeat authorization.
information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Authorization by entering a passkey:
Manual). X Select Bluetooth name of the mobile phone.
If the multimedia system does not detect your The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
mobile phone, this may be due to particular X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
security settings on your mobile phone (see the nation as a passkey.
manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
X Press to confirm.
multimedia system at any one time.
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
Searching for a mobile phone
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
Audio 20: confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
X Select Tel/QConnect tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
Search. to two minutes to be displayed (see the man-
The available mobile phones are displayed. ufacturer's operating instructions).
COMAND:
Switching between mobile phones
X Select PhoneQConnect
DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart If you have authorized more than one mobile
Search. phone, you can switch between the individual
The available mobile phones are displayed. phones.
Symbols in the device list Multimedia system:
Sym- Explanation X Select Connect Device.
bol X Select a mobile phone from the device list.
New mobile phone found, not yet

authorized.
Media mode
Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected General notes
# Mobile phone is authorized and If you wish to play external media sources, the
connected default display must already be turned on. Fur-
ther information on media mode (see the Digital Ejecting an SD memory card
Operator's Manual). X Press the memory card.
The following external media sources can be The memory card is ejected.
used: X Remove the memory card.
RApple devices (e.g. iPhone)
RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) Connecting USB devices
RCD
There are two USB ports in the stowage space
RDVD (COMAND) under the armrest.
RSD memory cards
X Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth
X Select the media source (Y page 307).
i Information on single CD/DVD drive (see
the Digital Operator's Manual).
Multimedia system
Activating media mode
Multimedia system:
X Select MediaQDevices.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X Select the media source.
Playable files are played.
Inserting and ejecting an SD memory

card
G WARNING
SD memory cards are small parts. They can be
swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of
children. If an SD memory card is swallowed,
seek immediate medical attention.
! If you are no longer using the SD memory

card, you should remove it and take it out of
the vehicle. High temperatures can damage
the card.
Inserting an SD memory card
The SD card slot is located in the stowage com-
partment under the armrest.
X Insert the SD memory card into the SD card
slot until it engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face downwards.
X Select the media source (Y page 307).
Z
308 Stowage areas
Stowage areas tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's

door.
Loading guidelines RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
G WARNING RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust RThe load must not protrude above the upper
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the edge of the seat backrests.
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a seats if possible.
risk of poisoning. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
Always switch off the engine before opening protection.
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
Stowage spaces
Stowage and features
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or Important safety notes
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
G WARNING
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- If objects in the passenger compartment are
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
den change in direction. thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
Always store objects so that they cannot be
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
loads against slipping or tipping before the
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
journey.
braking or a sudden change in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
G WARNING
thrown around in such situations.
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
yourself. There is a risk of injury. stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces before
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow starting a journey.
these components to cool down before touch- RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ing them. ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
are dependent on the distribution of the load Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308).
within the vehicle. For this reason, you should
observe the following notes when transporting a
load:
RNever exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
The values are specified on the vehicle iden-
Stowage areas 309
Stowage compartments in the front Eyeglasses compartment
Glove box
X To open: press marking :.

The eyeglasses compartment opens down.
To open: pull handle : and open glove box

X
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
flap ;. always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until
it engages. Stowage compartment in the front center
Objects in A4 format or an iPad, for example,
console
can be stored in the glove box. For vehicles with
a perfume atomizer (Y page 138) the storage
space of the glove box is restricted.
X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the

arrow.
Cover : swings upwards.
The glove box can only be locked and unlocked
using the mechanical key. Stowage compartment under the armrest
X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90 clockwise to position 2.
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90 counter-clockwise to
position 1.
X To open: press button : at the front.

The stowage space opens.
Z
310 Stowage areas
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol- X To open: fold down the seat armrest.
lowing may be in the stowage space: X Press on the front of release catch : and fold
Ra multimedia connector unit with 2 USB ports the cover of the armrest upwards.
and a SD card slot, e.g. for use with an iPod,
iPhone or MP3 player, see the separate
Operator's Manual Additional stowage space
Ra small stowage space in the upper front sec-
tion Depending on the equipment, the following
additional stowage areas are available in the
Stowage compartment in the doors vehicle:
Rcard and coin holder in the dashboard above
the light switch (not suitable for holding thin
objects such as shopping tokens)
Rthe open stowage compartment in the center
console
Rstowage net in front-passenger footwell
Rthe map pockets on the back of the driver's

and front-passenger seat
Rthe parcel nets on the left and right-hand side
in the trunk
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
You can store items such as a rolled-up fluores- (Y page 308).
cent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle docu-
ment wallet (front-passenger door) in stowage
compartment : in the doors.
In doors ; you can store bottles with a capacity Ski and snowboard bag
of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter). Important safety notes
Stowage space in the rear G WARNING
The skibag in conjunction with the lashing
Stowage compartment in the rear seat
straps cannot restrain any objects other than
armrest
skis.
! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, Vehicle occupants could be struck in the
as you could otherwise damage it. event of sudden braking or an accident, for
instance, if you:
! Close the cover of the stowage compart-
ment before folding the rear seat armrest Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edged
back into the seat backrest. objects in the skibag
Rdo not secure the skibag with the lashing
straps
There is a risk of accident and injury.
Store only skis in the skibag. Always secure
the skibag with the lashing straps so that it
cannot move around.
A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow-

boards can be transported in the ski and snow-
board bag.
Stowage areas 311
Securing the ski and snowboard bag in Rear bench seat through-loading fea-
the trunk ture
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
X Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards
level of protection and could even cause

(Y page 311).
X Slide the ski and snowboard bag between the
injuries.
two outside rear seat backrests. Ensure that RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
the wheels of the ski and snowboard bag are restrained by the seat backrest.
in the trunk. There is an increased risk of injury.
X Open the ski/snowboard bag with zip : and
place the skis or snowboards inside it. Before every trip, make sure that the seat
X Close the ski and snowboard bag.
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
X Pull tensioning strap ; tight by the loose end
are engaged.
until the skis or snowboards are held firmly
inside the ski/snowboard bag. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308).
The outside and the middle rear seat backrests
can be folded down separately to increase the
trunk capacity. The division ratio is 40% to 20%
to 40%.
Folding the rear seat backrests forward

X Vehicles without memory function: if neces-
sary, move the driver's or front-passenger
seat forward.
X Vehicles with memory function: when one or
both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded
forward, the respective front seat moves
X Engage tensioning strap = in a diagonal pat- forward slightly, when necessary, in order to
tern on hooks ? in cargo tie-down rings A as avoid contact.
shown. X Open the trunk.
X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head
restraints.
Z
312 Stowage areas
X Fold corresponding rear seat backrest ;

forward.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Folding the rear seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
Left and right seat backrest

X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest
release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is
released.
Vehicles with memory function: when one or
both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded
forward, the respective front seat moves
forward slightly, when necessary, in order to
avoid contact.
Left and right seat backrest

forward if necessary.
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
engages.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster. A warning
tone also sounds.
Middle rear seat backrest

X Pull release lever = forwards.
Rear seat backrest ; is released.
Middle rear seat backrest

forward if necessary.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visi-
ble.
Stowage areas 313
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
(Y page 107). load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat protection for light loads.
back if necessary. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or
You should always engage the rear seat backr- corners.

ests if you do not need the through-loading fea- RPad sharp edges for protection.
ture. This will prevent unauthorized access to
the trunk from the vehicle interior.
Locking the center rear seat backrest

Vehicles with the through-loading feature in the
rear bench seat:
X Fold up the cargo tie-down rings next to the
rear seat backrest and put them through the
In order to prevent the trunk from being slots in the carpet.
accessed by unauthorized persons, the center
seat backrest can be locked using a catch. The Bag hook
center seat backrest can only be folded forward
together with the left seat backrest. G WARNING
X To lock: fold the left and center seat backr- The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
ests forward. Make sure that the center and or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
left seat backrests are engaged and joined gage could be flung around and thereby hit
together.
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
X Slide catch : upwards.
The release mechanism of the center seat changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
backrest is locked. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
X To unlock: fold the left and center seat backr- Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
ests forward. objects on the bag hooks.
X Slide catch : downwards.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure
a load.
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 308).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
Z
314 Stowage areas
The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK

trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load of above
approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of the
box moves downward until it rests on the mat of
the trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box is
avoided.
Adjusting the height to any position
: Bag hook
EASY-PACK trunk box


G WARNING
When the load surface moves up, your hands
Example
may become trapped on the frame of the
EASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury. X Pull the box out by handle : in the direction
of the arrow all the way to the stop.
When the load surface moves up, make sure X Lowering the load surface: push the center
that your hands are not within the sweep of of load surface ; down by hand in the direc-
the load surface. If someone becomes trap- tion of the arrow until load surface ; has
ped, carefully push the center of the load sur- reached the desired position and the box is
face downward. the desired size.
X To raise the load surface: press switch =.
! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulled Load surface ; of the box moves up auto-
out, no objects may be placed on the frame of matically.
the box, nor should the frame be pushed from X To stow the box: push the box in by han-
above. Otherwise, the box could be damaged. dle : all the way to the stop.
! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects can
damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and then Removing and installing
be thrown out. There is a risk of injury.
Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or
fragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.
Always store and secure these or similar
objects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACK
trunk box.
! If you exceed the maximum permitted load
of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects can be
thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk box and
strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always observe the maximum permitted load Example
of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store
and secure heavy objects in the trunk outside X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into
of the EASY-PACK trunk box. slots =
Stowage areas 315
X Raise box : and press hooks A into anchor- X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
age ? as far as they will go.
X Turn left-hand rotating catch B counter-
clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B Roof carrier

clockwise by 90.
X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B Important safety notes
clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B
counter-clockwise by 90. G WARNING
X Move box : downwards and pull it out from When you load the roof, the center of gravity
anchorages ?. of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat surface istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf. load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Stowage well under the trunk floor
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
! Unhook the handle before again before clos- adjust your driving style.
ing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to pre-
vent the handle flap from protruding. Other- You will find information on the maximum roof
wise, you could damage the handle. load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 394).
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure
that when the roof carrier is installed you can:
Rraise the sliding sunroof/panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel fully
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
Ropen the trunk lid fully
located in the stowage compartment.
X To open: pull handle : up. ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers,
do not use metallic or hard objects to open
them.
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
may become detached from the vehicle. You
Z
316 Features
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. thrown around in such situations.
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
tilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened if a trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
roof carrier is installed. The panorama roof with stowage nets.
power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to RClose the lockable stowage spaces before
allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. starting a journey.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
panel makes contact with a roof carrier
approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. the trunk.
Attaching the roof carrier ! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup

holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center con-
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
centrated and reflected sunlight.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308).
Cup holder in the front-compartment

center console
X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
the arrow.
X Fold covers : upwards.
X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage
points under covers :.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Features
Cup holder
If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use
Important safety notes the resulting compartment for stowage.
X To open: open the stowage compartment
G WARNING
(Y page 309).
If objects in the passenger compartment are X To remove: slide catch = forwards and pull
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be out cup holder ;.
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In X To insert: insert cup holder ; and slide back
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces catch =.
and mobile phone brackets cannot always X To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk partment closed.
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for
braking or a sudden change in direction. cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
Features 317
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the rear
seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder
could be damaged.
: Mirror light
; Bracket
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror

A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
X To open: press the front of cup holder : been folded up.
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X To fold out: place a container in the cup
Rear side window roller sunblinds
holder.
The cup holder folds down automatically. ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do
X To fold in: remove the container. not let it snap back suddenly as this would
The cup holder folds in automatically. damage the automatic roller mechanism.
X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until ! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun-
it engages. blind hooked in and the side windows opened
simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump
out of the retainers and spring back suddenly
Sun visors when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving
on the freeway. This could damage the inertia
Overview reel. Therefore, either close the side window
or retract the roller sunblind before driving at
G WARNING high speeds.
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
Z
318 Features
X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by Ashtray

tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the top
of the window. Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is not
heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in
Rear window roller sunblind the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
Important safety notes space could be damaged.
G WARNING
Parts of the body could be trapped in the
sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller
sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a
risk of injury.
When extending or retracting make sure that
no parts of the body are in the sweep of the

roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again
if someone becomes trapped. The opening or
closing process is briefly stopped. The roller
sunblind then returns to its initial position.
Example
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move X To open: open the stowage compartment
freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other (Y page 309).
objects could be damaged. X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at its
right side =.
Extending/retracting the roller sun- X To remove the insert: hold the sides of
blind insert ?, push it forward and lift it up ; and
out.
X To install the insert: press insert ? into the
holder until it engages.
X To close: close the cover of the ashtray.
X Push cover : of the stowage compartment
closed.
i You can remove the ashtray insert and use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
Rear-compartment ashtray

X To extend or retract: briefly press button :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
X To stop: briefly press button : again.
The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves
back into the out-of-use position.
Features 319
X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
X To remove the insert: push ribbing = from Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
the left side and pull insert : upwards. when the heating element is red-hot.
X To install the insert: install insert : from X To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
above into the holder and press down into the partment closed.
holder until it engages.
12 V sockets
Cigarette lighter
General notes
G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot lock (Y page 146).
heating element or the socket of the cigarette The sockets can be used for accessories with a
lighter. maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: include such items as chargers for mobile

phones.
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls If you use the sockets for long periods when the
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
objects, for example charge.
There is a risk of fire and injury. An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there
out of reach of children. Never leave children is sufficient power to start the engine.
unsupervised in the vehicle. If you have connected a device to the 12 V
socket, leave the cover of the stowage com-
Your attention must always be focused on the partment open. This prevents the cover from
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter being blocked.
when road and traffic conditions permit.
Socket in the front-compartment center
console
(Y page 309).
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
X To close: push the cover of the stowage com-
partment closed.
Socket in the rear-compartment center

console
Example X Pull the cover out by the top of its handle
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition edge.
lock (Y page 146). X Lift up the cover of the socket.
(Y page 309).
Z
320 Features
mbrace System self-test

General notes After you have switched on the ignition, the sys-
tem carries out a self-diagnosis.
The mbrace system is only available in the USA. A malfunction in the system has been detected
You must have a license agreement to activate if one of the following occurs:
the mbrace service. Make sure that your system RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not
is activated and operational. To log in, press the come on during the system self-test.
MB Info call button. If any of the steps RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
mentioned are not carried out, the system may
Assistance button does not light up during
not be activated.
self-diagnosis of the system.
If you have questions about the activation, con- RThe indicator lamp in the MB Info call
tact one of the following telephone hotlines:
button does not light up during self-diagnosis
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at of the system.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
1-866-990-9007
lowing buttons continues to light up red after
Shortly after successfully registering with the the system self-diagnosis:

mbrace service, a user ID and password will be - SOS button
sent to you by mail. You can use this password
to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners - F Roadside Assistance call button
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. - MB Info call button
The system is available if: RThe Inoperative or the Service Not
Rit has been activated and is operational

Activated message appears in the multi-
function display after the system self-diagno-
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is sis.
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
tomer Center
the system may not operate as expected. In the
Ra service subscription is available event of an emergency, help will have to be
Determining the location of the vehicle on a map summoned by other means.
is only possible if: Have the system checked at the nearest author-
RGPS reception is available. ized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol-
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the lowing service hotlines:
Customer Assistance Center. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
The mbrace system 1-866-990-9007
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as Emergency call

follows:
X Press the W or X button on the multi- Important safety notes
function steering wheel. G WARNING
or
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
X Use the volume control on the multimedia
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
system.
emergency if:
The system offers various services, e.g.:
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
RAutomatic and manual emergency call
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
RRoadside Assistance call
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
RMB Info call
road
You can find information and a description of all
available features under "Owners Online" at Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
http://www.mbusa.com. seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
Features 321
There is a risk of an accident and injury. The Call Failed message appears in the mul-
tifunction display and must be confirmed.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
In this case, summon assistance by other
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. means.
Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
cle occupants. In such situations, secure the Making an emergency call
vehicle in accordance with national regula-
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
General notes
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 320).
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-
gered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initi- X To initiate an emergency call manually:
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button press cover : briefly to open.
flashes. The Connecting Call message X Press and hold SOS button ; for at least one
appears in the multifunction display. second.
The audio output is muted. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
until the emergency call is concluded.
Once the connection has been made, the Call
X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-
Connected message appears in the multifunc-
tion display. Benz Customer Assistance Center.
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example: If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined mbrace will not be able to make the emergency
by the GPS system) call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after
pressing the SOS button, you will not know
Rvehicle identification number
whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In
Rinformation on the severity of the accident this case, always summon assistance by other
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi- means.
ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-
lished between the Customer Assistance Center Roadside Assistance button
and the vehicle occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-
pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
the system has been unable to initiate an emer-
gency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The indi-
cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-
ously.
Z
322 Features
X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road- X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
side Assistance button :. multifunction steering wheel.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus- or
tomer Assistance Center. X Press the corresponding multimedia system
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button for ending a phone call.
button : flashes while the call is active. The
Connecting Call message appears in the
multifunction display. The audio output is MB Info call button
muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle

Rvehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a
call is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
X To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :.
ton on the multimedia system, for example. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Center.
Voice output is not available in this case.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
A voice connection is established between the flashes while the connection is being made.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center The Connecting Call message appears in
and the vehicle occupants. the multifunction display. The audio output is
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the muted.
can ascertain the nature of the problem If a connection can be made, the Call Con
(Y page 325). nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech- If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle are available, the system transfers data to the
to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
Mercedes-Benz Center. for example:
You may be charged for services such as repair Rcurrent location of the vehicle
work and/or towing. Rvehicle identification number
You can find more information in the separate The multimedia system display indicates that a
mbrace manual. call is active. During the call, you can change to
The system has not been able to initiate a Road- the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
side Assistance call, if: ton on COMAND, for example.
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance Voice output is not available in this case.
call button F is flashing continuously. A voice connection is established between the
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Customer Assistance Center was estab- and the vehicle occupants.
lished. You receive information about operating your
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- vehicle, about the nearest authorized
work is not available, for example. Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-
ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.
The Call Failed message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
Features 323
You can find further information on the mbrace gation system in your vehicle. If you know the
system under "Owners Online" at http:// destination, the address can be downloaded.
www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of
The system has not been able to initiate an MB Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations
Info call, if: in the vicinity.
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button Furthermore, you can download routes with up
is flashing continuously. to four way points.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz You are prompted to confirm route guidance to
Customer Assistance Center was estab- the address entered.
lished. X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- the controller and confirm with 7.
work is not available, for example. The system calculates the route and subse-
The Call Failed message appears in the mul- quently starts the route guidance with the
tifunction display. address entered.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.

multifunction steering wheel.
or The destination download function is available
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
if:
button for ending a phone call. Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-
tem.
Call priority Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-
ble and data transfer is possible.
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call Route Assistance
can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package
call will take priority and override all other active and cannot be purchased separately.
calls. You can use the route assistance function even
The indicator lamp of the respective button if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation
flashes until the call is ended. system.
An emergency call can only be terminated by the Within the framework of this service, you receive
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. a professional and reliable form of navigation
All other calls can be ended by pressing: support without having to leave your vehicle.
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering The customer service representative finds a
wheel suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-
rent position and the desired destination. You
Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia
will then be guided live through the current route
system to end the voice call section.
When a call is initiated, the audio system is
muted.
Search & Send
The mobile phone is no longer connected to the
multimedia system. General notes
However, if you want to use your mobile phone,
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in
equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.
a safe location.
Additionally, an mbrace service subscription
must be completed.
Downloading destinations "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A
destination address which is found on Google
Downloading destinations Maps can be transferred via mbrace directly to
Downloading destinations gives you access to a your vehicle's navigation system.
database with over 15 million points of interest
(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-
Z
324 Features
Specifying and sending the destination Vehicle remote opening

address
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
X Go to the website http://maps.google.com have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a
and enter a destination address into the entry replacement SmartKey is not available.
field. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-
X To send the destination address to the e- Benz Customer Assistance Center.
mail address of your mbrace account:
The vehicle can be immediately opened
click on the corresponding button on the web- remotely within four days of the ignition being
site. turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
Example: may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will remotely.
be sent to your vehicle. The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-
X When the "Send" dialog window appears: ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-
Enter the e-mail address you specified when able and a data connection is possible.
setting up your mbrace account into the cor- X Contact the following service hotlines:
responding field. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
X Click "Send". at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
Information on specific commands such as or 1-866-990-9007
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the You will be asked for your password.
website. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
Calling up a transmitted destination tance Center.
address Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
lock (Y page 146). tion
The transmitted destination address is loaded
Rthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone,
into the vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking whether Android)
navigation should be started. To do this, you will need your identification num-
X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
ber and password.
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and subse- Vehicle remote closing
quently starts the route guidance with the
The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used
address entered.
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and
If you select No the address can be stored in you are no longer nearby.
the address book.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-
If you have sent more than one destination Benz Customer Assistance Center.
address, each individual destination must be
The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked
confirmed separately.
within four days of the ignition being turned off.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same After this time, remote closing may be delayed
order as the order in which they were sent. by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with can no longer be locked remotely.
mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: The vehicle remote closing feature is available if
If multiple vehicles are registered under the the relevant mobile phone network is available
same e-mail address, the destination will be and a data connection is possible.
sent to all the vehicles. X Contact the following service hotlines:
Features 325
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center The Roadside Assistance Connected mes-

at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health
or 1-866-990-9007 Check can be started, the Request for Vehi
You will be asked for your password. cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi
The next time you are inside the vehicle and you cle diagnostics? message appears in the
switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked display.
Remotely message appears in the multifunction X Press the Yes button to confirm the message.
display. X When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Start Ignition message appears: turn the
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
tion (Y page 146).
X If the Please follow the instructions
Rthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone,
received by phone and move your vehi
Android) cle to a safe position. message
To do this, you will need your identification num- appears: please follow the instructions
ber and password. received by phone and move your vehicle to a

safe position.
Stolen vehicle recovery service The message in the display disappears.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
If your vehicle has been stolen: During this procedure, you will see the Vehi
X Notify the police. cle Diagnostics Active message.
The police will issue a numbered incident If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health
report. Check is canceled completely.
X This number will be forwarded to the
When the check is complete, the Sending
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con
together with your PIN.
nection may be interrupted during
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance data transfer) message appears. The vehicle
Center then tries to locate the system. The data can now be sent.
contacts you and the local law enforcement X Press the OK button to confirm the message.
agency if the vehicle is located. The voice connection with the Customer
However, only the law enforcement agency is Assistance Center is terminated.
informed of the location of the vehicle. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer
ring Data... message appears.
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Customer Assistance Center is automatically Assistance Center.
notified. Depending on what the customer service rep-
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
Vehicle Health Check tion is re-established after the transfer is com-
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
Assistance Center can provide improved sup- phone.
port for problems with your vehicle. During an Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the the transfer of service data to the Customer
Customer Assistance Center. Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display
The customer service representative can use shows a message to this effect together with
the received data to decide what kind of assis- information about any special offers at your
tance is required. You are then, for example, workshop.
guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes- This information can also be called up under
Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called. "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an Information on the data stored in the vehicle
MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is (Y page 32).
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
Z
326 Features
Information on Roadside Assistance Geo fencing

(Y page 29).
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the
vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be
Downloading routes informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries
Downloading routes allows you to transfer and of the selected areas. You can select the way in
save predefined routes in the navigation sys- which you receive this information beforehand.
tem. Possible options include text message, e-mail or
A route can be prepared and sent by either a an automated call.
customer service representative or under "Own- The area can be determined as either a circle or
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You
Each route can include up to four way points. can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-
ferent settings are possible for each area.
Once a route has been received by the naviga-
These settings can be called up under "Owners
tion system, you will see the External route
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
ICON_POI_Category Name_1 has been
saved to "Previous destinations". Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and
Would you like to start navigation? inform the customer service representative that
message on the multimedia system display. you wish to activate geo fencing.
The route is saved. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text
message.
X To start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
play. Triggering the vehicle alarm
If you select No, the saved route can be called With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's
up later in the navigation menu. panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds
X Select Start. and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on
Starting route guidance. the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-
onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.
Downloaded and saved routes can be called up
again.
You can find further information in the separate
multimedia system operating instructions. Garage door opener
General notes
Speed alert
The HomeLink garage door opener integrated
You can define the upper speed limit, which in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
must not be exceeded by the vehicle. to three different door and gate systems.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, Use the integrated garage door opener only on
a message will be sent to the Customer Assis- garage doors that:
tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center
then forwards this information to you. Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
You can select the way in which you receive this Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
information beforehand. Possible options Once programed, the integrated garage door
include text message, e-mail or an automated opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
call. function of the garage door system's remote
The data you receive contains the following control. Please also read the operating instruc-
information: tions for the garage door system.
Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-
When programming a garage door opener, park
ded the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
engine while programming.
Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee-
ded Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
Features 327
door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
More information on HomeLink and/or com-
patible products is also available online at Garage door remote control A is not included
http://www.homelink.com. with the integrated garage door opener.
Notes on the declaration of conformity X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
(Y page 31). lock (Y page 146).

USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to con-
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 trol the garage door drive.
X To start programming mode: press and
Important safety notes hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated
garage door opener.
G WARNING The garage door opener is now in program-
When you operate or program the garage door ming mode. After a short time, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow.
with the integrated garage door opener, per-
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
sons in the range of movement of the garage
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.
door can become trapped or struck by the If the selected button has already been pro-
garage door. There is a risk of injury. grammed, indicator lamp : will only light up
When using the integrated garage door yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
opener, always make sure that nobody is X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
within the range of movement of the garage lamp : flashes yellow.
door. X To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-
G WARNING tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust X Press and hold button B on remote control
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave gramming is finished.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
out sufficient ventilation. gramming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code (Y page 328).
X Release button B on remote control A for
Programming the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
Programming buttons programing procedure for the corresponding
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
(Y page 327). so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Z
328 Features
Several attempts might be necessary. You Proceed as follows:

should test every position for at least Rif you live in Canada
25 seconds before trying another position.
Rif you have difficulties programming the
Synchronizing the rolling code garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) when using the programming steps
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
(Y page 327).
integrated garage door opener.
If the garage door system uses a rolling code, After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up
you will also have to synchronize the garage yellow.
door system with the integrated garage door
X Release the button.
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
drive control panel. The programming button X Press button B of garage door remote con-
may be located in different places depending on trol A for two seconds, then release it for two
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the seconds.
door drive unit on the garage ceiling. X Press button B again for two seconds.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program- control A until indicator lamp : lights up
ming additional remote controls", before carry- green.
ing out the following steps. When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage gramming is finished.
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei- When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are gramming was successful. The next step is to
present within the sweep of the door or gate. synchronize the rolling code.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition X Release button B of remote control A of the
lock (Y page 146). garage door drive.
X Get out of the vehicle. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
X Press the programming button on the door
programming process for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
drive unit.
so, vary the distance between remote control
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate A and the rear-view mirror.
the next step.
The required distance between remote con-
X Get into the vehicle. trol A and the integrated garage door opener
X Press previously programmed button ;, = depends on the garage door drive system.
or ? on the integrated garage door opener Several attempts might be necessary. You
repeatedly and in quick succession until the should test every position for at least
door closes. 25 seconds before trying another position.
The rolling code synchronization is then com-
plete. Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programing
Notes on programming the remote con- the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
trol view mirror, take note of the following instruc-
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" tions:
(or interruption) of the transmission signals RCheck the transmitter frequency used by
after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, garage door drive remote control A and
these signals may not last long enough for the whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not quency can usually be found on the back of
recognized during programming. Comparable the garage door drive remote control.
with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open-
ers also feature a "break". The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which
Features 329
operate in the frequency range of 280 to Clearing the memory

433 MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door remote
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
control A. This increases the likelihood that integrated garage door opener before selling the
garage door remote control A will transmit a vehicle.
strong and precise signal to the integrated X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
garage door opener. lock (Y page 146).
RWhen programming, hold remote control A X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
at varying distances and angles from the but- The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
ton which you are programming. Try various and then green.
angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches X Release buttons ; and ?.
(5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying The memory of the integrated garage door
distances. opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
RIf another remote control is available for the
same garage door drive, repeat the same pro-
gramming steps with this remote control. Floormats

Before performing these steps, make sure
that new batteries have been installed in G WARNING
garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only transmit
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
for a limited amount of time (the indicator pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
button B on remote control A again before jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
transmission ends. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
tion/transmission.
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
Opening/closing the garage door
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
After it has been programmed, the integrated top of one another.
garage door opener performs the function of the
garage door system remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
door system.
lock (Y page 146).
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is X Slide the relevant seat back.
halted after a maximum of ten seconds and X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
Z
330 Engine compartment
Engine compartment Rremove jewelry and watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Hood
ple, away from moving parts
G WARNING
G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem work under high voltage. If you touch
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. components which are under voltage, you
There is a risk of an accident. could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before injury.
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
G WARNING is switched on.
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is Opening the hood
a risk of injury to persons within range of
Maintenance and care
movement of the hood. G WARNING

Open and close the hood only when no one is Certain components in the engine compart-
within its range of movement. ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
G WARNING Working in the engine compartment poses a
Opening the hood when the engine is over- risk of injury.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine Where possible, let the engine cool down and
compartment could expose you to hot gases touch only the components described in the
or other service products. There is a risk of following.
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before G WARNING
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the When the hood is open and the windshield
engine compartment, keep the hood closed wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
and contact the fire department. the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
G WARNING the ignition before opening the hood.
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
ers or the hood.
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Engine compartment 331
Engine oil
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are touch only the components described in the
turned off. following.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released. G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may

ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
up and lift the hood. 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
automatically by the gas-filled strut. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in a different location.
Closing the hood When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
imately five minutes if the engine is at normal
X Check that the hood has engaged properly. operating temperature.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
Rall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG C 63/C
properly engaged. Open it again and close it
with a little more force. 63S): the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only star-
ted briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Radiator The oil level of the Mercedes-AMG C 63/C63 S
Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a must only be checked when the engine is at
thermal mat or insect protection cover. The normal operating temperature.
readings of the on-board-diagnostic system may
otherwise be inaccurate. Some of these read-
ings are required by law and must be accurate at
all times.
Z
332 Engine compartment
Checking the oil level using the oil dip- ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
stick engine oil can result in damage to the engine
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.
Example
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide Example
tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
X Add engine oil.

X Slowly slide dipstick : into the guide tube to
the stop, and take it out again after approx- If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
imately 3 seconds. the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX oil.
mark ;, the oil level is correct. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
clockwise.
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 332).
Adding engine oil
Further information on engine oil (Y page 391).
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
Additional service products
the environment. Important safety notes
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have G WARNING
been approved for vehicles with a service sys- Certain components in the engine compart-
tem. You can obtain a list of the engine oils
and oil filters tested and approved in accord- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
ance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Working in the engine compartment poses a
Service center. risk of injury.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is Where possible, let the engine cool down and
caused by the following: touch only the components described in the
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not following.
been specifically approved for the service
system G WARNING
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after the
interval for replacement specified by the The cooling system is pressurized, particularly
service system has been exceeded when the motor is warm. If you open the cap,
Rusing engine oil additives. you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.
ASSYST PLUS 333
Let the engine cool down before you open the X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
open the cap to relieve pressure. in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
G WARNING If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- when warm, there is enough coolant in expan-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of sion tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
fire and injury.
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Make sure that no windshield washer con- X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
Checking coolant level (Y page 392).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield

washer system

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down. X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab and
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition open.
lock (Y page 146). X Add the premixed washer fluid.
or X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the until it engages.
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 146).
If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-
X Check the coolant temperature display in the
mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears
instrument cluster (Y page 236).
in the multifunction display prompting you to
The coolant temperature must be below
add washer fluid (Y page 285).
158 (70 ).
Further information on windshield washer fluid/
antifreeze (Y page 393).
lock (Y page 146).
or
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/
ASSYST PLUS
Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 146). Service message
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clock-
wise to allow excess pressure to escape. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Z
334 ASSYST PLUS
Information on the type of service and service X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book- select the Service menu and confirm with
let). a.
You can obtain further information from an X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con-
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). firm with a.
The service due date appears in the multi-
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display function display.
does not show any information on the engine
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil
level (Y page 331).
The multifunction display shows a service mes-
Information about Service
sage for several seconds, e.g.: Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
RService A in XX Days interval display
RService A Due
RService A Overdue by XX Days
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can
Depending on the operating conditions of the be corrected at a qualified specialist work-
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the shop.
next service due date is displayed.

Have service work carried out as described in
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
number or another letter, indicates the type of lead to increased wear and damage to the
service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major assemblies or the vehicle.
major service.
You can obtain further information from an A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does service work has been carried out. You can also
not take into account any periods of time during obtain further information on maintenance
which the battery is disconnected. work, for example.
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
ule: Special service requirements
X Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnect- The specified maintenance interval takes only
ing the battery. the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions or
or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the work must be carried out more frequently, for
battery disconnection periods from the ser- example:
vice date shown on the display.
Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate
stops
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
Hiding a service message distances
X Press the a or % button on the steering Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
wheel. surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
Displaying service messages example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
X Switch on the ignition. arduous operating conditions, the tires must be
X Use on the steering wheel to call up the checked more often. Further information can be
list of menus. obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care 335
Driving abroad Washing the vehicle and cleaning the

An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is paintwork
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information from any authorized Automatic car wash
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
Care the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
General notes carefully while paying attention to the traffic
H Environmental note conditions until full braking power is restored.
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is
cloths in an environmentally responsible man- activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in
ner. certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following: the following or other similar situations:

Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rabrasive cleaning agents Rin the car wash
Rsolvents
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
Do not scrub. cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.
You could otherwise scratch or damage the
! Make sure that:
surfaces and protective film. Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the
period straight after cleaning it, particularly OFF button has been pressed).
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and Rthe 360 camera or rear view camera is
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you switched off.
should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
Braking heats the brake discs and the brake
pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
can then be parked. range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for tional opening of the trunk:
retaining the quality in the long term.
Rusing a car wash
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
Rusing a power washer
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft
(3 m) away from the vehicle.
! Make sure that the automatic transmission
is in neutral position N when washing your
vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle
may otherwise be damaged.
ROperating with the SmartKey:
Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock. Do not open the driver's door
Z
336 Care
when the engine is switched off or at very Washing by hand

low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmis-
sion position D or R the automatic trans- In some countries, washing by hand is only
mission will automatically switch to park allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
position P and block the wheels. Observe the legal requirements in each country.
ROperating with the Start/Stop button: X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
Do not open the driver's door when the vehicle in direct sunlight.
engine is switched off or at very low X Use a soft sponge to clean.
speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
position D or R the automatic transmission shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
will automatically switch to park position P X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-
and block the wheels. tle jet of water.
Observe the following to make sure that the X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
automatic transmission stays in position N neu- air inlet.
tral: X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop frequently.
button: X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.

thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
work.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
Operating with the Start/Stop button only: soon as possible when driving in winter.
X Engage park position P.
X Release the brake pedal. Power washers
X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock
(Y page 146). G WARNING
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
X Switch on the ignition. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
X Depress and hold the brake pedal. to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop edly. There is a risk of an accident.
button:
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
X Release the brake pedal.
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
X Release the electric parking brake, if neces-
diately.
sary.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey ! Always maintain a distance of at least
in the ignition lock. 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car power washer nozzle. Information about the
wash from the very start. correct distance is available from the equip-
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before ment manufacturer.
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. Move the power washer nozzle around when
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax cleaning your vehicle.
from the windshield and the wiper blades. This Do not aim directly at any of the following:
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises Rtires
caused by residue on the windshield. Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
Relectrical components
Rbattery
Rconnectors
Care 337
Rlights If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint

Rseals surface, use the paint care products recommen-
Rtrim ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
case approximately every three to five months,
Rventilation slots depending on the climate conditions and the
Damaged seals or electrical components can care product used.
lead to leaks or failures. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- should be used.
tional opening of the trunk: Do not use these care products in the sun or on
Rusing a car wash
the hood while the hood is hot.
Rusing a power washer X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-
Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft work quickly and provisionally.
(3 m) away from the vehicle.
! Edition 1 special model: parts of your vehi- Matte finish care
cle are covered with a decorative foil. Main-
tain a distance of at least 70 cm between the ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy

foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle and the noz- wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
zle of the high pressure cleaner.
Information about the correct distance is ! The following may cause the paint to
available from the equipment manufacturer. become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle. Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with
unsuitable materials
Rfrequent use of automatic car washes
Cleaning the paintwork
Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight
! Do not affix:
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
Rstickers products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These
Rfilms products are only suitable for high-gloss sur-
Rmagnetic plates or similar items faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise leads to considerable surface damage (shiny,
damage the paintwork. mottled areas).
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by qualified specialist workshop.
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
care cannot always be completely repaired. In ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. treatment under any circumstances.
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
while avoiding rubbing too hard. matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage
X Soak insect remains with insect remover and to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off a clear matte finish.
the treated areas afterwards. The vehicle should preferably be washed by
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and
fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a plenty of water.
cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter Use only insect remover and car shampoo from
fluid. the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. products.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Z
338 Care
Cleaning the vehicle parts vent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
Cleaning the wheels tronic components.
X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
G WARNING with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt is recommended and approved by Mercedes-
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage Benz.
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- Cleaning wiper blades
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
G WARNING
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged You could become trapped by the windshield
tires or chassis components replaced imme- wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
diately. windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products Always switch off the windshield wipers and
to remove brake dust. This could damage the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wheel bolts and brake components.
wiper blades.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel wiper blade could be damaged.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
increased corrosion of the brake discs and not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you ite coating could be damaged. This could
should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. cause wiper noise.
Braking heats the brake discs and the brake
pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
can then be parked. back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the windows X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield (Y page 126).
G WARNING X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
You could become trapped by the windshield cloth.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of before switching on the ignition.
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and Cleaning the exterior lighting
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
wiper blades. which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- ses.
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
Care 339
Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning AIRPANEL
! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
and the power washer nozzle. Information X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with

about the correct distance is available from water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
the equipment manufacturer.
Vehicles with AIRPANEL have shutters in the Cleaning the rear view camera and 360
radiator trim. If the vehicle is very dusty, the camera
adjustment range of the shutters may be restric-
ted. The actuation mechanics of the radiator ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
trim must then be cleaned with a power washer. around the rear view camera or 360camera
with a high-pressure water jet.

lock. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
Shutters : open automatically after approx- that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-
imately 120 seconds. tion lock.
X Clean the location points of shutters ; in the X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
radiator trim with a power washer. multimedia system (see separate operating
instructions).
Cleaning the sensors X To clean the camera: use clean water and a
soft cloth to clean camera lens :.
! If you clean the sensors with a power 360camera: if you drive at speeds above
washer, make sure that you keep a distance 20 mph (30 km/h) or with the key in position 0
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360
and the power washer nozzle. Information
about the correct distance is available from camera closes automatically.
the equipment manufacturer.
Z
340 Care
Cleaning the exhaust pipes X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
G WARNING X Clean the display surface using a commer-
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
become very hot. If you come into contact display cleaner.
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
yourself. There is a risk of injury. cloth.

Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow Cleaning the plastic trim
these components to cool down before touch- G WARNING
ing them.
Care products and cleaning agents containing
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
cleaner or wheel cleaner. come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
ment. There is a risk of injury.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust
pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers Do not use any care products and cleaning
should not be polished with a chrome polish. agents to clean the cockpit.
They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For
optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:
with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Rstickers
Commercially available engine and care oils
are suitable for this. Rfilms
For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint- Rscented oil bottles or similar items
work polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove You can otherwise damage the plastic.
the excess polish residue after polishing.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
and corrosive environmental factors may cause tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
flash rust to form on the surface. You can the surfaces.
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing. cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
ucts recommended and approved by
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Interior care
Cleaning the display Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline leather care agents that have been recom-
Rabrasive cleaning agents mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Rcommercially-available household cleaning
agents Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
These may damage the display surface. Do ments
not put pressure on the display surface when
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam- ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
age to the display. such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes
Care 341
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- Rdifferences in the texture

ing the surface. Rmarks caused by growth and injury
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. Rslight nuances of color
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are These are characteristics of leather and not
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can material defects.
lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning Seat covers of other materials
the trim pieces. ! Observe the following when cleaning:
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are moistened with a solution containing 1%
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
X Trim elements with piano black finish: tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
clean with a soft, damp cloth and a commer- the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
cially available soap solution. depend on the type of dirt and how long it

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- has been there.
ucts recommended and approved by Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Mercedes-Benz. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat covers
Cleaning the seat belts
General notes
G WARNING
! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers
made out of real leather, artificial leather or Seat belts can become severely weakened if
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
the cover. belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
Note that regular care is essential to ensure that an accident. This poses an increased risk of
the appearance and comfort of the covers is injury or fatal injury.
retained over time. Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
Genuine leather seat covers
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
! To retain the natural appearance of the cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
leather, observe the following cleaning heating at temperatures above 176 (80 )
instructions: or in direct sunlight.
RClean genuine leather covers carefully with X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
become soaked. It may otherwise become X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
rough and cracked. dry shampoo.
ROnly use leather care agents that have X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
been tested and approved by Mercedes- agents recommended and approved by
Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified Mercedes-Benz.
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
Z
342 Where will I find...?
Where will I find...? Notes on the reflective safety jackets

Reflective safety jacket
Removing/stowing the reflective
safety jackets
: Maximum number of washes

; Maximum wash temperature
= Do not bleach
? Do not iron
A Do not use a laundry dryer
The reflective safety jackets are located in the B Do not dry-clean
safety jacket compartments in the stowage
compartments of the front doors. There are also
C This is a class 2 vest
Breakdown assistance
safety jacket compartments in the stowage RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require-
compartments of the rear doors, in which reflec- ments defined by the legal standard only if:
tive safety jackets can be stowed. - the correct size is used, and
X To remove: pull out safety jacket bag : with - the reflective safety jackets are fastened
the reflective safety jacket by loop ;. correctly.
X Open safety jacket bag : and pull out the REnsure before use that the reflective safety
reflective safety jacket. jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-
X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll erties may otherwise be compromised.
it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored
X Slide safety jacket bag : along the lower in their original packaging in a dry place away
edge of the armrest into the safety jacket from sources of heat and light.
compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that RThe maximum number of washes specified is
loop ; hangs out well within reach. not the only factor influencing the life span of
i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
its packaging material before sliding it into also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
the safety jacket compartment. The packag- RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis-
ing material may otherwise cause it to slip out posed of and replaced with new ones:
or make removing it difficult. - after 15 washes, and/or
Observe the legal requirements in each country. - if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
- if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
- the fluorescence of a reflective safety vest
has faded e.g. due to the effects of sunlight
RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.
Flat tire 343
Vehicle tool kit Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-

cles with MOExtended tires
General notes Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 343)
In vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires with Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
run-flat characteristics) and on PLUG-IN HYBRID not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
vehicles, the towing eye is in a bracket under the is therefore recommended that you additionally
parcel shelf. equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
Apart from certain country-specific variations, winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change a qualified specialist workshop.
tool kit.
Information on changing and mounting wheels
Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to (Y page 379).
the vehicle. For more information on which tire
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
changing tools are required and approved to
perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult level ground, as far away as possible from
a qualified specialist workshop. traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example: X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 177).
RJack
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
RWheel chock
straight-ahead position.
RLug wrench
RRatchet wrench
RAlignment bolt
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESSGO
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit X Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock (Y page 146).
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone (Y page 149).
X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
near the danger area while a wheel is being
changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting
in the wheel change should, for example,
: Tire inflation compressor stand behind the barrier.
; Tire sealant filler bottle X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
= Towing eye conditions when doing so.
X Open the trunk lid. X Close the driver's door.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 315).
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

Flat tire properties)
Preparing the vehicle General notes

Your vehicle may be equipped with: With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper- cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
ties) (Y page 343)
344 Flat tire
or more tires. The affected tire must not show winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
any clearly visible damage. a qualified specialist workshop.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the Important safety notes
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear- G WARNING
ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 374). When driving in emergency mode, the driving
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor. ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
If a pressure loss warning message appears There is a risk of an accident.
in the multifunction display: Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Robserve the instructions in the display mes- Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
sages (Y page 280). and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
Rcheck the tire for damage. off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
Rif driving on, observe the following notes. vehicle.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is Stop driving in emergency mode if:
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi- Ryou hear banging noises.
cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully
laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). Rthevehicle starts to shake.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
tance possible depends upon: RESP is intervening constantly.

Rvehicle speed Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
Rroad condition
After driving in emergency mode, have the
Routside temperature
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode workshop with regard to their further use. The
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a defective tire must be replaced in every case.
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
counted from the moment the tire pressure loss TIREFIT kit
warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of Important safety notes
50 mph (80 km/h). TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
When replacing one or all tires, please observe You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
the following specifications for your vehicle's 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tires: tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-
Rsize tures down to 4 (20 ).
Rthe type and
G WARNING
Rthe "MOExtended" mark
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
used as a temporary measure. Make sure that tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
you use the proper size and type (summer or Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
winter tire).
than those mentioned above.
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount on a flat tire.
Flat tire 345
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified X Do not remove any foreign objects which have
specialist workshop. penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
G WARNING compressor from the stowage well under-
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- neath the trunk floor (Y page 343).
tion. It must not come into contact with your X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not instrument cluster within the driver's field of
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away vision.
from children. There is a risk of injury. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which X Remove filler hose B and connector = from
has come into contact with tire sealant. the bottom section of the tire inflation com-
pressor housing ;.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the
attention immediately.
mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant filler
bottle : until the connector engages.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap
for longer than ten minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat. A of tire sealant filler bottle : into the
mounting of tire inflation compressor ;. The
The tire inflation compressor can be operated cap must engage in both hooks.
again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturers safety instruc-
tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
pressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty

tire.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X Insert connector = into a socket in your vehi-

cle.
Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 319)
Z
346 Flat tire
12 V socket: (Y page 319) damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
(Y page 319). Observe the notes on sockets pressure that is too low can significantly
(Y page 319).
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
lock (Y page 146).
X Press on and off switch ? on the tire inflation Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
compressor to ON. specialist workshop.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. Tire pressure reached
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure may briefly rise to approximately G WARNING
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
Do not switch off the tire inflation com- impairs the driving characteristics and is not
pressor during this phase.
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
accident.
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then
have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa You should therefore adapt your driving style
(2.0 bar/29 psi). accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has the specified maximum speed with a tire that
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres- has been repaired using tire sealant.
sure reached" (Y page 346).

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has The maximum permissible speed for a tire
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).
pressure not reached" (Y page 346). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if field of vision.
possible. ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have of the filler hose after use. This could cause
them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry stains.
cleaner as soon as possible. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
Tire pressure not reached
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
not been attained after ten minutes: professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. workshop.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire. If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
Note that tire sealant may escape when you been attained after ten minutes:
unscrew the filler hose. X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx- X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
imately 30 ft (10 m). faulty tire.
X Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pres-
sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
Battery (vehicle) 347
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-

tion compressor.
X Pull away immediately.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with the
tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire
inflation compressor, press together the lock-
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a ing tabs on the yellow cap.
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
tion compressor.
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified sealant bottle.
specialist workshop. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop and have the tire changed there.
i In cases such as the one mentioned above, X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- replaced as soon as possible at a qualified
ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the specialist workshop.
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values. Battery (vehicle)
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
12 V battery important safety notes
tire inflation compressor.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles are equipped with a
12 V battery and a high-voltage battery. The fol-
lowing notes refer to the 12 V battery. Notes on
the high-voltage battery can be obtained in the
"High-voltage battery important safety notes"
section (Y page 349).
Special tools and expert knowledge are required
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work
involving the battery carried out at a qualified
G WARNING
X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres- Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
sure release button : next to pressure can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
gauge ;. thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the lead to function restrictions applying to
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
sealed tire.
Z
348 Battery (vehicle)
ESP (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. connected battery does not come into con-
You could lose control of the vehicle, for tact with vehicle parts.
example: RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
Rwhen
tery.
braking
RIt is important that you observe the descri-
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
bed order of the battery terminals when
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
adapted to the road conditions
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- connected.
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
RIt is particularly important to observe the
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
described order when connecting and dis-
should have all work involving the battery car-
connecting the jumper cables.
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
For further information about ABS and ESP, terminals while the engine is running.
see (Y page 68) and (Y page 73).
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- G WARNING
ion battery: Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

G WARNING Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- the battery. Keep children away from batter-
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
explosion. plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle tion.
body to remove any existing electrostatic All vehicles:
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when Batteries contain dangerous
charging the battery as well as when jump-start-
substances. It is against the
ing.
law to dispose of them with
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of the household rubbish. They
electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam- must be collected separately
ple: and recycled to protect the
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic environment.
fibers Dispose of batteries in an
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats environmentally friendly
Rif you push or pull the battery across the car- manner. Take discharged
pet or other synthetic materials batteries to a qualified spe-
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
G WARNING
teries.
During the charging process, a battery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or ! Have the battery checked regularly at a
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can qualified specialist workshop.
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
Observe the service intervals in the Mainte- been tested and approved for your vehicle by
nance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
workshop for more information. increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
! Always have work on batteries carried out at battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in
exceptional circumstances, be absolutely In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery possible service life, it must always be suffi-
yourself, observe the following: ciently charged.
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can dis-
Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
charge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In
away. this case, have the battery disconnected at a
Rswitch off the ignition. qualified specialist workshop. You can also
Ralways disconnect the negative terminal charge the battery with a charger recommended
clamp first, followed by the positive termi- by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-
nal clamp. ist workshop for further information.
After the battery has been disconnected, the Have the battery condition of charge checked
transmission is locked in position P. more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
After the work has been done, install the bat- short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
tery and replace the cover of the positive ter- lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
minal clamp firmly. workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
parked for a long period of time.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
tective measures when handling batteries.
and do not require any electrical consumers.
Risk of explosion. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
conserving battery power.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if the battery
charge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery can
Fire, open flames and smoking are
also supply the 12 V battery. This only happens
prohibited when handling the bat-
if the condition of charge of the 12 V battery
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
requires this, e.g. after using electrical consum-
ers for an extended period with the engine
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro- switched off. As the on-board voltage is contin-
sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or uously monitored this can also be performed
clothing. when the engine is switched off. The condition of
Wear suitable protective clothing, charge of the 12 V battery and the on-board
especially gloves, apron and face- voltage are thereby kept stable for a longer
guard. period.
Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid
splashes off with clean water. Con-
tact a physician if necessary. High-voltage battery important
Wear eye protection. safety notes
Only PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles are equipped
with a high-voltage battery.
Keep children away.
G DANGER
The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is
under high voltage. If you modify components
Observe this Operator's Manual. in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system
or touch damaged components, you may be
electrocuted. The components in the vehi-
cle's high-voltage electrical system may be
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have
Z
350 Battery (vehicle)
damaged in an accident, although the damage G WARNING

is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. During charging and jump-starting, explosive
Following an accident, do not touch any high- gases can escape from the battery. There is a
voltage components and never modify the risk of an explosion.
vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
the vehicle towed away after an accident and sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
checked by a qualified specialist workshop. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING G WARNING
In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres- Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed a Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
critical value. In this case flammable gas not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
escapes through a ventilation valve on the the battery. Keep children away from batter-
underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
of injury. plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure tion.
the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst
observing legal requirements. G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-

G WARNING tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
been damaged, electrolyte and gases may can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
leak out. These are poisonous and caustic. an explosion.
There is a risk of injury. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. charging it or jump-starting.
Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off
with water and seek medical attention ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum
straight away. charging voltage of 14.8 V.
All vehicles:
! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehicle
standing idle for lengthy periods can damage ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
the high-voltage battery. If the vehicle is idle starting connection point.
for lengthy periods leave the high-voltage bat- The jump-starting connection point is in the
tery connected to a charging station. engine compartment (Y page 352).
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if X Open the hood.
you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long X Connect the battery charger to the positive
period of time. terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (Y page 352).
Charging the 12 V battery Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it
is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum battery charger which has been tested and
charging voltage of 14.4 V. approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger
All other vehicles: unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the
charging of the battery in its installed position.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for further information and availability. Read the
battery charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
ion battery: if the indicator/warning lamps in
the instrument cluster do not light up at low
temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case you may
neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the
battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery
may be shorter. The starting characteristics can
be impaired, particularly at low temperatures.
Have the thawed-out battery checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: at low
temperatures, do not charge a battery which has
been removed using a battery charger. Allow the
battery to warm up gently first, if necessary.
Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and
the starting characteristics impaired, especially
at low temperatures.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if the battery
charge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery can
also supply the 12 V battery. This only happens
if the condition of charge of the 12 V battery
requires this, e.g. after using electrical consum-
ers for an extended period with the engine
switched off. As the on-board voltage is contin-
uously monitored this can also be performed
when the engine is switched off. The condition of
charge of the 12 V battery and the on-board
voltage are thereby kept stable for a longer
period.
Z
352 Jump-starting
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-
partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up,
it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the
battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The
starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
All vehicles:
Jump-starting 353
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp
do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be
off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it
(Y page 146).
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery B using the
jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
Z
354 Towing and tow-starting
X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery B to ground point ? of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point ? and negative terminal =, then from pos-
itive clamp : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
X Close cover A of positive terminal : after removing jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if your vehicle has been jump-started, it may not be possible to use the
electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
Towing and tow-starting G WARNING

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible
G WARNING gross weight of your vehicle, the:
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or Rthe towing eye could detach itself
no longer available if: Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
Rthe engine is not running. over.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is There is a risk of an accident.
malfunctioning. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply its weight should not be greater than the per-
or the vehicle's electrical system. missible gross weight of your vehicle.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
force may be necessary to steer or brake. of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-
There is a risk of an accident. tification plate (Y page 387).
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
make sure that the steering moves freely. PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically
G WARNING in certain situations. To avoid damage to the
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the fol-
lowing or similar situations:
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
is a risk of an accident. Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing
eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could
become damaged.
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery. This
could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, have
the vehicle recovered using a crane.
Towing and tow-starting 355
! When towing, pull away slowly and longer distances, have the vehicle loaded and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the transported.
vehicles could be damaged.
! Shift the automatic transmission to N and
do not open the driver's or front passenger's Installing/removing the towing eye
door during towing. The automatic transmis- Installing the towing eye
sion may otherwise shift to position P, which
could damage the transmission.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This
could damage the vehicle.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,
have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in position
N when the vehicle is being towed. If the auto-
matic transmission cannot be shifted to position
N, have the vehicle transported on a transporter The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
or trailer. located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and
The battery must be connected and charged. at the front, under covers :.
Otherwise, you: X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the kit (Y page 343).
ignition lock X Press the mark on cover : inwards and
Rcannot release the electric parking brake remove.
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
position N will go and tighten it.
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the
vehicle is towed (Y page 89). You could other- Removing the towing eye
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle. X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: X Attach cover : to the bumper and press until
PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles may not be towed it engages.
away but must instead be transported, if: X Put the towing eye back into the vehicle tool
Rthe multifunction display is not working or

kit.
Rthe Towing Not Permitted See
Operator's Manual message appears in the
multifunction display Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
If the vehicle is in a dangerous area, it can be raised
towed out of that area with both axles on the Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed
ground. In this case, the towing distance must with the rear axle raised.
not be greater than 165 ft (50 m) and must not
exceed a towing speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). For PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: towing the vehicle
away with the rear axle raised should only be
carried out by professional recovery companies.
Z
356 Towing and tow-starting
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as matic transmission
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up
and transported.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be towed with the rear axle raised. The
vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise
swerve or even roll over.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on

the ground
! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
The automatic transmission automatically shifts front and rear axles must be stationary and on
to position P when you open the driver's or front- the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
passenger door or when you remove the Smart- over the connection point of the transport
Key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
that the automatic transmission stays in posi- otherwise be damaged.
tion N when towing the vehicle, you must
observe the following points:

All vehicles
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
lock. wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
N. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni- poses.
tion lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
X Release the brake pedal. lock.
X Release the electric parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps N.
(Y page 120).
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
lamps switched on, use the combination switch applying the electric parking brake.
as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
for the direction of travel flash. After resetting tion P.
the combination switch, the hazard warning X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
lamp starts flashing again. lock and remove it.
X Secure the vehicle.
Transporting the vehicle

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
Transportation of the vehicle should only be car- ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
ried out by professional recovery companies. with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
Fuses 357
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away ! Only use fuses that have been approved for
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
and transported. correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is Otherwise, components or systems could be
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a damaged.
truck or trailer.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
In the event of damage to the electrical sys- fuse box when the cover is open.
tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To shift ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is
the automatic transmission to position N, you lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
must provide power to the vehicle's electrical ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
system in the same way as when jump-starting ation of the fuses.
(Y page 352). The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
trailer. nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Tow-starting (emergency engine

starting) Before changing a fuse
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must Observe the important safety notes
(Y page 357)
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-
age the automatic transmission. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
i You can find information on "Jump-starting" (Y page 177).

under (Y page 352). X Switch off the engine.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Fuses or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESSGO
Important safety notes X Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0.
G WARNING This is the same as the SmartKey having been
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if removed.
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- The drivers door can be closed again.
age, the electric cables could be overloaded. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an must be off.
accident and injury. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard
new fuses having the correct amperage. RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the driver's side
color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the RFuse box under the trunk floor on the right-
fuse allocation chart. hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the direction of travel
trunk (Y page 357).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special- Dashboard fuse box
ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-
driver to open the cover in the dashboard. You
could damage the dashboard or the cover.
Z
358 Fuses
X Open the driver's door. X Open the hood (Y page 330).

X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the bot- X To open: press safety clips : on the cover
tom in the direction of arrow =. together.
X Fold cover : outwards in the direction of X Remove fuse box cover ; upwards.
arrow ;.
X To close: fold in cover : until it engages.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-

well
X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from

the fuse box.
X Loosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ? and
remove it.
X To close: check whether the seal is posi-
tioned correctly in the lid ?.
X Insert lid ? into the bracket at the rear of the
X Open the front-passenger door. fuse box.
X To open: fold cover : out towards the rear X Fold down lid ? of the fuse box and tighten
and remove it. screws =.
X To close: clip in cover : at the rear. X Insert cover ; on both sides and engage
X Fold cover : forwards until it engages. safety clips :.
X Close the hood.
Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
the ignition before opening the hood.
Fuses 359
Fuse box in the trunk
X Open the trunk lid.

X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 315).
X To open: swing cover : upwards in the
direction of the arrow.
X To close: fold down cover : in the opposite
direction to the arrow.
Make sure that the cover is in the recess pro-
vided for it.
i The fuse allocation chart is located in a
recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find
the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type
on the fuse allocation chart.
Z
360 Operation
Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tires

can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 384).
G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
the wheel brakes or suspension components Mercedes-Benz Center.
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Information on tire pressure can be found:
dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Always replace wheels and tires with those on the B-pillar on the driver's side
that fulfill the specifications of the original (Y page 370)
part. Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 165)
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 363)
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel Operation
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Information on driving
correct:
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
Rdesignation heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
Rmanufacturer While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
Rmodel and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
ing to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
G WARNING a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
Wheels and tires
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
There is a risk of accident. tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
Tires without run-flat characteristics: damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. qualified specialist workshop.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over
consult a qualified specialist workshop. obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
Tires with run-flat characteristics: angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels
or tires.
Rpay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics). Notes on high performance tires
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- G WARNING
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-
rectly can impair the operating safety. Due to the special tire tread in combination
Before purchasing and using non-approved with the optimized rubber compound, there is
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- an increased risk of hydroplaning and skid-
shop and inquire about: ding on a damp or wet road surface. tire grip is
Rsuitability also noticeably reduced at low outside tem-
Rlegal stipulations peratures and low tire operating tempera-
Rfactory recommendations
tures. There is a risk of an accident.
Operation 361
Turn on ESP and adapt your driving style Notes on tire tread
accordingly. When the outside temperature
G WARNING
falls below 10 , use M+S tires.
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
i Different driving styles may lead to high tire The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
wear and the tires may reach the minimum This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
tire tread depth after only a short time. of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
G WARNING may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation present locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of should regularly check the tread depth and
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately. Minimum tire tread depth for:
RSummer tires: in (3 mm)
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once RM+S tires: in (4 mm)
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels For safety reasons, replace the tires before
can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
attention to damage such as: tire tread depth is reached.
Rcuts in the tires
Rpunctures
Rtears in the tires
Wheels and tires

Rbulges on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 361). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard Marking : shows where the bar indicator
valve cap or other valve caps approved by (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any tread.
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
monitoring systems. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par- They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- imately in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
sure as necessary (Y page 363). is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
The service life of tires depends, among other replaced.
things, on the following factors:
Rdriving style
Rtire pressure Selecting, mounting and replacing
Rdistance covered
tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
and make.
Z
362 Winter operation
Exception: it is permissible to install a differ- to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire. temperatures could cause cracks to form,
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with thereby damaging the tires permanently.
run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 343). Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the this type of damage.
wheels.
G WARNING
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
full performance after this distance. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
RDo not drive with tires which have too little your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). and replace any damaged tires immediately.
RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
M+S tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat G WARNING
properties) M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one a risk of an accident.
or more tires.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than in
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
system or with an active tire pressure monitor
and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes- At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), use winter
Benz. tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
Wheels and tires
identified by the M+S marking.

Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire (Y page 343). Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount such as ABS and ESP to function optimally in
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter. These tires have been developed specif-
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from ically for driving in snow.
a qualified specialist workshop. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
tics.
Winter operation Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
General notes mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. X Check the tire pressures (Y page 366).
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
section (Y page 379). (Y page 367).
X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
sure loss warning system (Y page 367).
Driving with summer tires X Restart the tire pressure monitor
(Y page 369).
At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle
Tire pressure 363
Snow chains You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a

controlled manner, achieving an increased driv-
G WARNING ing force (cutting action).
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
Tire pressure
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. Tire pressure specifications
To avoid hazardous situations: Important safety notes
Rnever install snow chains to the front G WARNING
wheels Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the following risks:
rear wheels. Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mount
snow chains on steel wheels, you may dam- Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
age the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
the relevant wheels before mounting the traction.
snow chains. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
mends that you only use snow chains that have
been specially approved for your vehicle by There is a risk of an accident.
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
standard of quality. For more information, and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
please contact a qualified specialist workshop. ing the spare wheel:
Wheels and tires

If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear
Rmonthly, at least
the following points in mind:
Rif the load changes
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel- Rbefore beginning a long journey
tire combinations (Y page 384). Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads off-road driving
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
come to a road that is not snow-covered.
The data on the Tire and Loading Information
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow
placard and tire pressure table shown here are
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-
you wish to mount snow chains. cle-specific and may deviate from the data
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible shown here. The tire pressure specifications
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at the Tire and Loading Information placard and
raised vehicle level if snow chains have been tire pressure table on the vehicle.
installed (Y page 196).
RWhen snow chains are installed, never use General notes
Active Parking Assist (Y page 202).
You may wish to deactivate ESP when pulling The recommended tire pressures for the tires
away with snow chains installed: mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
RAll vehicles (except MercedesAMG vehicles)
Further information on tire pressures can be
(Y page 74) obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
RMercedesAMG vehicles (Y page 74)
Z
364 Tire pressure
Tire and Loading Information placard
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully

laden" are defined in the table for different num-
: Recommended tire pressures
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on actual number of seats may differ.
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 370).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
Wheels and tires
illustration (example).
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can
be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 374).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or
The tire pressure table contains the recommen- higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- table, may have a negative effect on driving
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- comfort.
ditions. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol- lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sud-
lowing tire pressure information is only valid for den loss of pressure.
that tire size; see illustration (example). For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire pressure 365
Important notes on tire pressure too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
G WARNING warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
pressure that is too low may result in a tire be too low.
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tire pressures for
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. cold tires:
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
valve is leaking. on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
(Y page 165)
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and Underinflated tires
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
G WARNING
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
risk of an accident. they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Wheels and tires

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire tires, including the spare wheel.
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire Underinflated tires may:
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec- Roverheat,leading to tire defects
tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
Radverselyaffect handling
can be checked in the on-board computer.
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- Overinflated tires
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold: G WARNING
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours because they are damaged more easily by
and road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than also suffer from irregular wear, which can
1 mile (1.6 km) severely impair the braking properties and the
The tire temperature changes depending on the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the accident.
tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
18 (10 ), the tire pressure changes by Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take tires, including the spare wheel.
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
Z
366 Tire pressure
Overinflated tires may: Checking tire pressures manually

Rincrease the braking distance
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
Radversely affect handling proceed as follows:
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort checked.
Rbe more susceptible to damage X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
Maximum tire pressures X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(Y page 363).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Tire pressure loss warning system
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom-
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when General notes
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 363).
Wheels and tires
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
cific and may deviate from the values in the sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
illustration. This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
Checking the tire pressures a corresponding warning message will appear in
the multifunction display.
Important safety notes You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
Observe the notes on tire pressure 'OK' to Restart message which appears in
(Y page 363). the Service menu of the multifunction display.
Information on air pressure for the tires on your Information on the message display can be
vehicle can be found: found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
warning system" section (Y page 367).
placard on the B-pillar
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap Important safety notes
(Y page 165) The tire pressure warning system does not warn
Rin the "Tire pressure" section you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 363).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
Tire pressure 367
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres- X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres
sure loss warning system. sure.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you X Press the a button.
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is The Run Flat Indicator ActivePress
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a 'OK' to Restart message appears in the
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a multifunction display.
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
If you wish to confirm the restart:
movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning X Press the a button.
system is limited or delayed if: The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
X Press 9 or : to select Yes.
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
acceleration). sures of all four tires.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-
cle or on the roof). If you wish to cancel the restart:
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- or
ing system X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, press 9 or : to select Can
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if cel.
you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure The tire pressure values stored at the last
Wheels and tires

Rchanged the wheels or tires restart will continue to be monitored.
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires for Tire pressure monitor
the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be found General notes
on the Tire and Loading Information placard If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
pressure loss warning system can only give itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
reliable warnings if you have set the correct more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is functions if the corresponding sensors are
set, these incorrect values will be monitored. installed in all wheels.
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
pressures (Y page 363). multifunction display. After a few minutes of
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
in the ignition lock (Y page 146). shown in the Service menu of the multifunction
X Use on the steering wheel to call up the display; see illustration (example).
list of menus.
X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
select the Service menu.
Z
368 Tire pressure
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-

sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
For information on the message display, refer to
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" cle is started as long as the malfunction
section (Y page 369). exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect
Important safety notes or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
G WARNING reasons, including the installation of incom-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), patible replacement or alternate tires or
should be checked at least once every two wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure from functioning properly. Always check the
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
on the Tire and Loading Information placard or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres- ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
Wheels and tires
your vehicle has tires of a different size than function properly.

the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure label, you should determine the pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
proper tire pressure for those tires.
(Y page 363). Note that the correct tire pressure
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has for the current operating situation must first be
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- a substantial loss of pressure, the warning
sure telltale when one or more of your tires threshold for the warning message is aligned to
the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, the cold tires (Y page 369). The current pres-
you should stop and check your tires as soon sures are saved as new reference values. As a
as possible, and inflate them to the proper result, a warning message will appear if the tire
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- pressure drops significantly.
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
lead to tire failure. an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
notes on the recommended tire pressure
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency (Y page 363).
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
handling and stopping ability. Please note that of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
underinflation has not reached the level to movements.
Tire pressure 369
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating sure.
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the X Press the a button.
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire in the multifunction display.
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
If the vehicle was parked for longer than
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire 20 minutes, the following message appears:
pressure on one or more tires is significantly Tire pressure will be displayed after
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal- driving a few minutes.
functioning. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a itor automatically detects new wheels or new
minute and then remains lit constantly, the sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. pressure value to the individual wheels is not
In addition to the warning lamp, a message possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active
appears in the multifunction display. Observe message is shown instead of the tire pressure
the information on display messages display. The tire pressures are already being
(Y page 280). monitored.
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres- sages
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately
one minute and then remaining lit. When the If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
driving. tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure
board computer may differ from those meas- message appears in the multifunction display,
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The
Wheels and tires

the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer The tire pressure must be corrected when the
refer to those measured at sea level. At high opportunity arises.
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a RIf the Check Tires message appears in the
pressure gauge are higher than those shown by multifunction display, the tire pressure in at
the on-board computer. In this case, do not least one tire has dropped significantly. The
reduce the tire pressures. tires must be checked.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message
be affected by interference from radio transmit- appears in the multifunction display, the tire
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way pressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-
radios) that may be being operated in or near the denly. The tires must be checked.
vehicle.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
display messages in the "Tires" section
Checking the tire pressure electroni- (Y page 280).
cally If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 the tire pressures may be displayed for the
in the ignition lock (Y page 146). wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
sures are displayed for the correct positions.
list of menus.
X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
select the Service menu.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
X Press the a button. When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-
rently set tire pressures as the reference values
Z
370 Loading the vehicle
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure Loading the vehicle
monitor will automatically detect the new refer-
ence values after you have changed the tire Instruction labels for tires and loads
pressure. However, you can also define refer-
ence values manually as described here. The tire G WARNING
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
pressure values.
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
steering and driving characteristics and lead
ded for the corresponding driving situation on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 363). Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
You can find more tire pressure values for rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
various operating conditions in the tire pres- your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
sure table inside the fuel filler flap exceeding the maximum load.
(Y page 363).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
all four wheels. maximum possible load.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
in the ignition lock (Y page 146). on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
X Use on the steering wheel to call up the and Loading Information placard shows the
list of menus. maximum permissible number of occu-
X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
select the Service menu. load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
and corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres
sure. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
Wheels and tires
tification plate informs you of the gross

The current tire pressure for each wheel or vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
the Tire pressure will be displayed vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
after driving a few minutes message fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
will be displayed in the multifunction display. mation about the maximum gross axle
X Press the : button. weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The Use Current Pressures as New Ref The maximum gross axle weight rating is
erence Values message appears in the mul- the maximum weight that can be carried by
tifunction display. one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
If you wish to confirm the restart: the maximum load or the maximum gross
axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted mes-
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures are
within the specified range. The new tire pres-
sures are then accepted as reference values
and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
: B-pillar, driver's side
Loading the vehicle 371
Maximum permissible gross vehicle i The specifications shown on the Tire and
weight rating Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Safety Act of 1966".
Information placard: "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicles
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load Tire and Loading Information placard.
and luggage must not exceed the specified
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
value.
the driver and passengers that will be riding in
i The specifications shown on the Tire and your vehicle.
Loading Information placard in the illustration X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
are examples. The maximum permissible driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific XXX lbs.
Wheels and tires

and may differ from that in the illustration. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
You can find the valid maximum permissible
able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on
city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
the Tire and Loading Information placard.
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
Number of seats 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
culated in step 4.
Maximum number of seats : indicates the

maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
Z
372 Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 370).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2
Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Wheels and tires
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)

Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
Step 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
All about wheels and tires 373
Vehicle identification plate sponding quality grading markings on the side-

wall of the tire.
Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
fully, you should still make sure that the gross on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight maximum section width.
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on Example:
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 370). RTreadwear grade: 200
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating RTraction grade: AA
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas- RTemperature grade: A
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if All passenger car tires must conform to the stat-
applicable) must not exceed the permissible utory safety requirements in addition to these
gross vehicle weight. grades.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
one axle (front or rear axle). cific and may deviate from the values in the
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the illustration.
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), Treadwear
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.
government course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times as well
All about wheels and tires on the government test track as a tire graded
100.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
The relative performance of tires depends upon
ards
Wheels and tires

the actual conditions of their use, however, and
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
ards and differences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
Traction
G WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to
the drive train.
government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information The traction grades from highest to lowest
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
have to grade tires using three performance fac- tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and ured under controlled conditions on specified
= temperature grade. These regulations do not government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
North America are provided with the corre- performance.
Z
374 All about wheels and tires
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy Tire labeling

road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road condi- Overview
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (Y page 361). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
priate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
(Y page 362).
Temperature
G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- (Y page 378)
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or ; DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 377)
in combination, can cause excessive heat
= Maximum tire load (Y page 376)
build-up and possible tire failure.
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 366)
Wheels and tires
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, A Manufacturer

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the B Tire material (Y page 377)
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
heat when tested under controlled conditions and speed rating (Y page 374)
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- D Load index (Y page 376)
tained high temperature can cause the material E Tire name
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire The markings described above are on the tire in
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of addition to the tire name (sales designation) and
performance which all passenger car tires must the manufacturer's name.
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent from the data in the example.
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for description, depending on the manufacturer
your vehicle. (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim
flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a
numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 370).
Example:
: Tire width Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
; Nominal aspect ratio in % load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
= Tire code For further information on the maximum tire
? Rim diameter load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 376).
A Load bearing index For further information on the load bearing
B Speed rating index, see "Load index" (Y page 376).
General: depending on the manufacturer's Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may approved maximum speed of the tire.
not contain any letters or may contain one letter i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
that precedes the size description. from the data in the example.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
Wheels and tires

the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your
vehicle tires according to European manufac- driving style to the traffic conditions.
turing standards.
Summer tires
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man- Index Speed rating
ufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
are only designed for temporary use in an emer- T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
gency. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
width in millimeters. V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
ratio between the tire height and tire width and
is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula- Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height. ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag- ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
Z
the size description, depending on the man- Make sure that your tires have the required
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
The service specification is made up of load- required speed rating for your vehicle can be
bearing index A and speed rating B. found in the "Tires" section (Y page 384).
RIf the size description of your tire includes Further information about reading tire data can
"ZR" and there are no service specifications, be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out shop.
the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the max- Load index
imum speed is limited according to the speed
rating in the service specification. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
resents the speed rating. The maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specifica-
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man- In addition to the load-bearing index, load
ufacturer about the maximum speed. index : may also be imprinted on the sidewall
All-weather tires and winter tires of the tire. You will find this after the letter that
identifies the speed rating (Y page 374).
Index Speed rating RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
Wheels and tires
Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) (SL) tire

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In from the data in the example.
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire Maximum load rating
wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
snow. They have been especially developed
for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
1 Or M+S i for winter tires.

Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis- Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
sible weight for which the tire is approved. provides information about the age of a tire. The
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the first and second positions represent the week of
specified load limit. The maximum permissible manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and endar week. Positions three and four represent
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that
the driver's side (Y page 370). is marked with "3208", was manufactured in
week 32 in 2008.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
illustration. from the data in the example.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire characteristics

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.
This information describes the type of tire cord

and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
Wheels and tires

The TIN is a unique identification number. The i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders from the data in the example.
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the Definition of terms for tires and loading
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica- Tire ply composition and material used
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
Describes the number of plies or the number of
manufacturing date A.
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the polyester and other materials.
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-
portation. Bar
Manufacturer identification code: manufac- Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
turer identification code ; provides details on per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code are the equivalent of 1 bar.
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols. DOT (Department of Transportation)
For further information about retreaded tires, DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
see (Y page 384). U S Department of Transportation.
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Normal occupant weight
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific The number of occupants for which the vehicle
characteristics of the tire. is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Z
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the
temperature characteristics. The quality grad- vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
ing assessment is made by the manufacturer fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
following specifications from the U.S. govern- applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is
ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the tire. the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Recommended tire pressures Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The recommended tire pressure applies to the The maximum weight is the sum of:
tires mounted at the factory. Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- Rthe weight of the accessories
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
Rthe load limit
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
mum permissible vehicle speed. Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
The tire pressure table contains the recommen- equipment
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- Kilopascal (kPa)
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions. Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is
Increased vehicle weight due to optional bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
equipment 1 bar.
The combined weight of all standard and Load index
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
the vehicle or not. index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
Wheels and tires
Rim more precisely.

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is Curb weight
mounted.
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
tem and optional equipment if these are instal-
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
gers or luggage.
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's Maximum load rating
side.
The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
Speed rating sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved.
The speed rating is part of the tire identification.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is Maximum permissible tire pressure
approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Maximum load on one tire
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross two.
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
Changing a wheel 379
PSI (pounds per square inch) Load bearing index

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
Aspect ratio city of a tire.
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent. Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires
Tire pressure and the road surface.
This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur- Treadwear indicators
face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
The tire pressure should only be corrected when with the bars, the wear limit of in (1.6 mm)
the tires are cold. has been reached.
Cold tire pressure Occupant distribution
The tires are cold: The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires designated seating positions.
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours Total load limit
and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
1 mile (1.6 km)
the vehicle.
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
the road. Changing a wheel
Bead Flat tire
Wheels and tires

The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely The "Breakdown assistance" section
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the (Y page 343) contains information and notes on
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-
the wheel rim. ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
Sidewall with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 343).
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras Rotating the wheels
The combined weight of those optional extras G WARNING
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
optional extras, such as high-performance severely impair the driving characteristics if
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per- the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
formance battery, are not included in the curb The wheel brakes or suspension components
weight and the weight of the accessories. may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
TIN (Tire Identification Number) dent.
This is a unique identifier which can be used by Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example and tires are of the same dimensions.
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur- ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and monitor, electronic components are located
the manufacturing date. in the wheel.
Z
380 Changing a wheel
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near Mounting a wheel

the valve. This could damage the electronic
components. Preparing the vehicle
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
Always observe the instructions and safety X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
(Y page 380).
position.
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern X Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Nor-
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically mal" on vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 196).
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in X Switch off the engine.
the center. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
On vehicles that have the same size front and SmartKey from the ignition lock.
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord- X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no The on-board electronics now have status 0.
warranty book is available, the tires should be
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
removed.
10,000 km). Earlier may be necessary, depend-
ing on the degree of tire wear. Do not change the X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
direction of wheel rotation. or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the ton from the ignition lock (Y page 146).
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota- X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, via your smartphone (Y page 149).
restart the tire pressure loss warning system X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
(Y page 367) or the tire pressure monitor the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
Wheels and tires
(Y page 369). X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

Direction of rotation rolling away
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 343).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away, for example when changing a wheel.
X Fold both plates upwards :. inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
X Fold out lower plate ;. parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
openings in base plate =. non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
used, e.g. rubber mats.
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RNever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
X Place chocks or other suitable items under
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. raised.
RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
Raising the vehicle RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
G WARNING
Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps: the
If you do not position the jack correctly at the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. the hub cap. Two different variants can be instal-
Wheels and tires

There is a risk of injury. led.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking

up the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-
wise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the vehi-
cle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved Vehicles with plastic hub cap:
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the X To remove: turn the center cover of hub
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
cap : counter-clockwise and remove.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the
X To install: before installing, ensure that hub
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. It must not be used for performing cap : is in the open position. To do this, turn
maintenance work under the vehicle. the center cover counter-clockwise.
X Position hub cap : and turn the center cover
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes. clockwise until hub cap : engages physically
and audibly.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
X Make sure that hub cap : is installed
ing away by applying the parking brake and
securely.
Z
382 Changing a wheel
Vehicles with aluminum hub cap: The jacking points are located just behind the
X To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 343). wheel housings (arrows).
X Position socket ; on hub cap :.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with
AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body,
X Position lug wrench = on socket ;.
the vehicle has covers installed next to the jack-
X Using lug wrench =, turn hub cap : coun- ing points on the outer sills.
ter-clockwise and remove it.
X To install: before installing, check hub cap :
and the wheel area for soiling and clean if
necessary.
X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in
the right position.
X Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and
Wheels and tires
tighten hub cap :.

The tightening torque must be
18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
i Note that the hub cap should be tightened X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). with AMG equipment: fold cover ?
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have upwards.
the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X Position jack B at jacking point A.

X Using lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the
wheel you wish to change by about one full
turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
beneath the jacking point. bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
X Turn crank C clockwise until jack B sits lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
completely on jacking point A. The base of accident.
the jack must lie evenly on the ground. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
X Turn crank C until the tire is raised a maxi-
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
Removing a wheel replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-
brake disc: during removal and repositioning G WARNING
of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
you should proceed carefully and get a sec- over. There is a risk of injury.
Wheels and tires

ond person assist to you. Alternatively, you
can use a second alignment bolt. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could Always pay attention to the instructions and
otherwise be damaged when you screw them safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
in. (Y page 379).
When mounting/removing wheels, and for as Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
any external force on the brake disks. This could sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
impair the level of comfort when braking. only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-
brake disc: during removal and repositioning
of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the
ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,
you should proceed carefully and get a sec-
ond person assist to you. Alternatively, you
can use a second alignment bolt.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Z
384 Wheel-tire combination
The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft

(130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools
in the trunk again.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
with AMG equipment: insert the cover into
the outer sill.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- (Y page 363).
faces. When you are driving with the collapsible spare
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align- wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
ment bolt and push it on. system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func-
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger- tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
tight. warning system or tire pressure monitor when
the defective wheel has been replaced with a
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
new wheel.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-
tight. tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Lowering the vehicle
G WARNING Wheel-tire combination
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
Wheels and tires
and bolts are not tightened to the specified You can ask for information regarding permitted
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
after a wheel is changed. mends that you only use tires and wheels
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise specifically for your vehicle.
until the vehicle is once again standing firmly These tires have been specially adapted for
on the ground. use with the control systems, such as ABS or
X Place the jack to one side. ESP, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). driving with a load, tire dimension variations
could cause the tires to come into contact
Wheel-tire combination 385
with the bodywork and axle components. This

could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-
cle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information about their previous
usage.
The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
(Y page 363).
Wheels and tires

Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment always equip
the vehicle with:
Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left
and right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer
tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 343).
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
386 Vehicle electronics
Information regarding technical data In particular, the following conditions must be

complied with:
i The data stated here specifically refers to a Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an Rcompliance with the maximum permissible
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the output in these wavebands is required.
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
Vehicle electronics may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
Retrofitting two-way radios and account current scientific discussions relating
mobile phones (RF transmitters) to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from modified
or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can
interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can
compromise the operational safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from incor- Approved antenna positions
rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere : Front roof area
with the vehicle electronics, for example: ; Rear roof area
= Rear fender
Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with
? Trunk lid
an exterior antenna
Technical data
Rthe exterior antenna has been installed i On vehicles with panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to the
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
front or rear roof area is not permitted.
This can compromise the operational safety On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. position the antenna on the side of the vehicle
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna closest to the center of the road.
mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
When operating RF transmitters in the vehi- when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles
cle, always connect them with the low-reflec- - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket
tion exterior antenna. radio frequency transmitting equipment).
Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings.
! The operating permit may be invalidated if If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
the instructions for installation and use of RF equipment, use the power supply or antenna
transmitters are not observed. connections intended for use with the basic wir-
ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's addi-
tional instructions when installing.
Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-
mum transmission outputs or antenna positions
must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Identification plates 387
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the Identification plates

base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values: Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Waveband Maximum
cle identification number (VIN)
transmission
output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
Trunked radio/Tetra 10 W
380 - 460 MHz X Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
70 cm waveband 35 W
400 - 460 MHz
Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
The following can be used in the vehicle without

restrictions:
RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-
mum transmission output of up to 2 W
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
(trunked radio/Tetra)
; VIN
RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)
= Vehicle model
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following wave-
bands:
RTrunked radio/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

; VIN
= Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
different for every vehicle and can deviate
Z
388 Service products and filling capacities
from the data shown here. You can find the Service products and filling capaci-
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle ties
identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN) G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Dispose of service products in an environ-
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost mentally responsible manner.
position.
X Fold floor covering ; upwards. Service products include the following:
The VIN is visible :. RFuels
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden- RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
tification plate (Y page 387). RCoolant
The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of RBrake fluid
the windshield (Y page 388).
RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Engine number Components and service products must be
matched. Only use products recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the
Technical data
use of products which have not been recom-

mended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in
this Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the
appropriate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
: Engine number (stamped into the crank- the containers:
case) RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
= Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and Cali- Other designations or recommendations indi-
fornian emissions standards cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Service products and filling capacities 389
Other identifications, for example: Tank capacity

R0 W-30
R5 W-30
Model Total capacity
R5 W-40 C 350 e 13.2 US gal
(50.0 l)
All other models 17.4 US gal
Fuel (66.0 l)
Model Of which
G WARNING reserve
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
MercedesAMG vehicles Approx.
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
2.6 US gal
sion. (10.0 l)
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
All other models Approx.
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
1.8 US gal (7.0 l)
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
Gasoline
G WARNING
Fuel grade
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
There is a risk of injury. gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
You must make sure that fuel does not come if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
If you or others come into contact with fuel, and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
observe the following: completely.
Technical data
RWash away fuel from skin immediately ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
using soap and water. gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
out delay. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- failure.
ing. ! Do not use the following:
RImmediately change out of clothing which RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)
has come into contact with fuel. RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
RE100 (100% ethanol)
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
RM100 (100% methanol)
RGasoline with metalliferous additives
RDiesel
Z
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- The quality of the fuel available in some coun-
mended for your vehicle. tries may not be sufficient. Residue could build
up in the injection system as a result. In such
! To ensure the longevity and full perform- cases, and in consultation with an authorized
ance of the engine, only premium-grade Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be
unleaded gasoline must be used. mixed with the cleaning additive recommended
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline and mixing ratios specified on the container.
of a lower grade, observe the following pre-
cautions: Flexible Fuel vehicles
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre- Important safety notes
mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as
possible. G WARNING
RDo not drive at the maximum speed. Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
speeds over 3,000 rpm. sion.
You will usually find information about the fuel You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
i For further information, consult a qualified refueling.
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). G WARNING
C 300 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if the Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
recommended fuel is not available, you may also There is a risk of injury.
use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
You must make sure that fuel does not come
rating of 88 AKI/93 RON.
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
All other models: as a temporary measure, if
the recommended fuel is not available, you may and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
also use regular unleaded gasoline with an vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may If you or others come into contact with fuel,
Technical data
reduce engine performance and increase fuel observe the following:

consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel RWash away fuel from skin immediately
with a lower AKI. using soap and water.
Information on refueling (Y page 165). RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
Additives immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
! Operating the engine with fuel additives out delay.
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
include additives for the removal and preven- tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be ing.
mixed with additives recommended by RImmediately change out of clothing which
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions
for use on the product label. More information has come into contact with fuel.
about recommended additives can be
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-
ded fuels that have additives.
Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the damage or damage to the exhaust gas after-
following fuel types: treatment.
Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline Follow the instructions in the service interval
RE85 fuel display regarding the oil change. Otherwise,
you may damage the engine and the exhaust
Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade
gas aftertreatment.
unleaded gasoline
When handling engine oil, observe the important
i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by safety notes on service products (Y page 388).
the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of The engine oils are matched to the performance
the fuel filler flap. of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
Fuel consumption You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
The energy content of E85 fuel is less than that tenance systems.
of the same amount of premium-grade gasoline. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
The amount of fuel consumed when operating consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the vehicle with E85 fuel is therefore higher than Or visit the website
with premium-grade gasoline. http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Maintenance The table shows which engine oils have been
Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center approved for your vehicle.
that you are operating or have operated the Missing values were not available at time of
vehicle with E85 fuel. going to print.
Low outside temperatures Model MB-Freigabe or

MB-Approval
If the outside temperature is below 32 (0 ),
the starting procedure can take noticeably lon- Mercedes-Benz
ger when operating with E85 fuel. C 450 AMG 4MATIC
E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside tem-
peratures under -4 (-20 ). All other models 229.5
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils

Engine oil for MercedesAMG vehicles.
Technical data
General notes i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
MercedesAMG 9.4 qt (9.0 l)
vehicles
C 300 7.4 qt (7.0 l)
C 350 e
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec- All other models 6.9 qt (6.5 l)
ification other than is necessary to fulfill the
prescribed service intervals. Do not change
the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve
longer replacement intervals than those pre-
scribed. You could otherwise cause engine
Z
Additives antifreeze from components before starting

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. the engine.
This could damage the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Brake fluid
Further information on coolants can be found
G WARNING in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the in countries where high temperatures prevail.
brake system when the brakes are applied
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. sufficiently protected from corrosion and
There is a risk of an accident. overheating.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
the specified intervals. qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products Comply with the important safety precautions
(Y page 388). for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 388).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in
the Maintenance Booklet. The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- lowing tasks:
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0. Rcorrosion protection
Information about approved brake fluid can be Rantifreeze protection
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or Rraising the boiling point
on the Internet at If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
Technical data
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. -35 (-37 ), the boiling point of the coolant

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a during operation is approximately 266
qualified specialist workshop in accordance (130 ).
with the replacement intervals and the The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance tion in the engine cooling system should:
Booklet. Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 (-37 ).
Coolant Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 [-45 ]). Otherwise, heat will not be
Important safety notes dissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
G WARNING corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- with MB Specifications for Service Products
ponents in the engine compartment, it may 310.1.
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled
Let the engine cool down before you add anti- with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled antifreeze and corrosion protection.
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
i The coolant is checked with every mainte- At temperatures below freezing:

nance interval at a qualified specialist work- X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
shop. water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
Filling capacities mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
Model Capacity i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
C 400 4MATIC 11.5 US qt (10.9 l) year round.
Mercedes-Benz
C 450 AMG 4MATIC
MercedesAMG 11.7 US qt (11.1 l) Climate control system refrigerant
vehicles
All other models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
led with refrigerant R134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
Windshield/headlamp cleaning sys- type used can be found on the radiator cross
tem member.
Important safety notes ! Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
G WARNING The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- control system may be damaged.
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or
fire and injury. replacing components, may only be carried out
Make sure that no windshield washer con- by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must
be adhered to.
Technical data
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for Always have work on the climate control system
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Refrigerant instruction label
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
level sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 388).
At temperatures above freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of Example: refrigerant instruction label
water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB : Warning symbol
SummerFit. ; Refrigerant filling capacity
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. = Applicable standards
Z
394 Vehicle data
? PAG oil part number Dimensions and weights

A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about:
Rpossible dangers
Rhaving service work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Model Refrigerant
C 350 e 23.6 0.4 oz
(670 10 g)
Missing values were not available at time of
Mercedes-Benz 21.5 0.4 oz going to print.
C 450 AMG 4MATIC (610 10 g)
Model : Opening height
All other models 22.2 0.4 oz
(630 10 g) C 300 69.6 in (1768 mm)
C 300 e 69.5 in (1765 mm)
Model PAG oil Mercedes-Benz
C 450 AMG 4MATIC
C 350 e 4.2 oz
MercedesAMG (120 g) MercedesAMG 68.8 in (1748 mm)
vehicles vehicles
All other models 2.8 oz All other models 69.8 in (1774 mm)
(80 g)
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Technical data
Vehicle data MercedesAMG

vehicles
General notes
Vehicle length 187.2 in (4756 mm)
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: Vehicle width 79.5 in (2020 mm)
- tires
including exterior
mirrors
- load
- condition of the suspension Vehicle height 56.1 in (1426 mm)
- optional equipment Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm)
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload. Turning radius 37.0 ft (11.29 m)
Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load
Vehicle data 395
All other models

Vehicle length, 185.1 in (4702 mm)
MercedesBenz
C 450 AMG 4MATIC
Vehicle length, all 184.5 in (4686 mm)
other models
Vehicle width 79.5 in (2020 mm)
including exterior
mirrors
Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm)
Turning radius 36.8 ft (11.22 m)
Maximum roof load,
MercedesBenz
C 450 AMG 4MATIC
Maximum roof load, 165 lb (75 kg)
all other models
Maximum trunk
load,
MercedesBenz
C 450 AMG 4MATIC
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load, all other mod-
els
Model Vehicle height
Technical data
C 300 57.0 in (1447 mm)
C 350 e 56.9 in (1444 mm)
Mercedes-Benz 56.3 in (1429 mm)
C 450 AMG 4MATIC
All other models 57.2 in (1452 mm)
Z
396

C-Class Operator's Manual

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

C-Class Operator's Manual

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Your Operator's Manuals

Digitally - in the vehicle

Printed manual - in the vehicle

Digitally - via the Internet

Apple iOS AndroidTM

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

Index ....................................................... 3 Introduction ......................................... 27

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 25 At a glance ........................................... 35

Opening and closing ........................... 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 104

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 118

Climate control ................................. 129

Driving and parking .......................... 145

On-board computer and displays .... 235

Multimedia system ........................... 298

Stowage and features ...................... 308

Maintenance and care ...................... 330

Breakdown assistance ..................... 342

Wheels and tires ............................... 360

Technical data ................................... 386

1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Damping System

AMG Automatic transmission

Battery (SmartKey) Maintenance .................................. 183

Steering wheel ............................... 340 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat

Problem with the rear window Convenience opening feature ............ 96

Switching on/off (on-board com- with Steering Assist and Stop&Go

Driving systems DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Starting problems .......................... 153 Exhaust check ................................... 180

Problem (malfunction) ................... 168 Handwriting recognition

Problems with the charging proc- Indicators

Lane Tracking package ..................... 216 M

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186 Multifunction display

OCS Operating system

Parking lamps Fuel consumption (COMAND) ........ 228

Pre-entry climate control via Radio-wave reception/transmis-

Refueling process (PLUG-IN S

Storing settings (memory func- Convenience closing feature ............ 96

Speedometer Stowage areas ................................... 308

Display message ............................ 285 Tires

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 379 Towing a trailer

Obstacle recognition ........................ 90 Transporting .................................. 356

Seat belt ........................................ 287 Winter tires

X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3

X To call up the basic menu of the Digital

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-

Vehicle operation outside the USA

One Mercedes Drive tronic equipment carried out at a qualified

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

Correct use If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

Leave warning stickers in position. cannot become involved in individual problems

In general, this technical information docu- Rdamage to the vehicle

These data can help provide a better under- Information on copyright

Function Page Function Page

? Distance warning 295 N J This lamp has no func-

E ! ABS 289 S 8 Reserve fuel level with

i You can find further information on the

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

i In vehicles with multimedia system

Center console, lower section

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Overhead control panel